5088 6088 7088 OM - Case

Axial-Flow® 5088
Axial-Flow® 6088
Axial-Flow® 7088
Combines
Operator’s Manual
Print No. 87479245

1st edition
English 09/08
CASE
PERSONAL SAFETY
!
THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL.
WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND BE
ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. M171C
Throughout this manual and on the machine’s safety decals, you will find precautionary statements: DANGER,
WARNING or CAUTION followed by specific instructions or ISO two panel safety pictorial symbols. These
precautions are intended for your personal safety.
Failure to follow the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION instructions may result in death or serious bodily injury.
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
The color associated with Danger is RED.
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with Caution is YELLOW.
ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:
● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.
● Background color is YELLOW.

● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.
! WAR NI NG
IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE CAN CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY. BEFORE USING THIS MACHINE, MAKE CERTAIN THAT EVERY OPERATOR:
● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine.
● Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the machine.
● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine.
● Clears the area of other persons.
● Learns and practices safe use of machine controls in a safe, clear area before
operating this machine on a job site.
It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws and regulations and follow CNH
America LLC instructions on machine operation and maintenance.
CNH America LLC Technical Manuals
Manuals are available from your Dealer for the operation, service and repair of your machine. For prompt
convenient service, contact your Dealer for assistance in obtaining the manuals for your machine.
Your Dealer can expedite your order for Operator’s Manuals, Parts Catalogs, Repair Manuals and maintenance
records.
Always give the Machine Name, Model and P.I.N. (Product Identification Number) or S.N. (Serial Number) of your
machine so your Dealer can provide the correct manuals for your machine.
The company is continually striving to improve its products and therefore reserves the right to make improvements
and changes when it becomes practical and possible to do so, without incurring any obligation to make changes or
additions to the equipment sold previously.
All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. IMPORTANT: OPERATING AND SERVICE
MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE ELECTRONIC OPERATING PANEL MAY VARY FROM WHAT IS SHOWN IN
THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL. SHOULD THIS OCCUR ADHERE TO THE LATEST INSTRUCTION ON THE
ELECTRONIC OPERATING PANEL.
Dimensions and weights are approximate only and the illustrations do not necessarily show the machine in
standard condition. For exact information about any particular machine, please consult your dealer.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
MACHINE PUBLICATION ISSUE DATE ISSUE
®
AXIAL-FLOW 5088, 6088 and 7088 Combine 87479245 September, 2008 First Issue
GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 - TO THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AXIAL-FLOW® COMBINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
TO THE OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 - IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MACHINE MAIN COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 - SAFETY/DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PARK BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HAZARD WARNING LAMP/PARK BRAKE DISABLE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
BEACON - IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
HIGHWAY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SEAT BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NEUTRAL START SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
OPERATOR’S PRESENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BACKUP ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SAFETY AND INFORMATIONAL DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
REFLECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4 - INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
YIELD MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
REAR LADDER SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
OPERATING CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
COMBINE ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ERROR, ALARM AND ABORT CODE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
TIRE RADIUS CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
AUTOMATIC CROP SETTINGS (ACS) (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
RUN-IN PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
STOPPING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
TRANSPORTING PREPARATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
MAIN HYDRAULIC VALVE STACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
TAIL LAMPS, TURN INDICATOR LAMPS, STOP LAMPS, ROTATING BEACONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
COMBINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
HEADER AND COMBINE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
HEADER HEIGHT AND TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
REEL CONTROL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SHAFT SPEED MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
MONITOR HARVEST SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
FEEDER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
UNLOADER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
OPERATOR’S LADDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
SIDE PANEL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
I
6 - FIELD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IDENTITY PRESERVED (IP) CROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
FIELD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
TROUBLESHOOTING THRESHING AND SEPARATING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
CUTTING AND FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
THRESHING AND SEPARATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
CONCAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
GRATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
GRAIN CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
AUGER TROUGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
AUGER BED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
CLEANING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
CHAFFER SIEVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
SHOE SIEVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
GRAIN HANDLING AND MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ELEVATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
GRAIN TANK AND UNLOADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
UNLOADER DRIVE SHEAR BOLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DISCHARGE BEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
STRAW SPREADERS AND STRAW/CHAFF SPREADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
STRAW AND CHAFF SPREADER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
BALING STRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
STRAW CHOPPER (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
SEED LOSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7 - TIRES/WHEELS/SPACING/BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
TIRE INFLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
TIRE PRESSURE CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
DRIVE WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
DRIVE AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
STEERING AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
POWER GUIDE WHEEL DRIVE (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
STEERING AXLE WEIGHTS - BALLAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
TIRE SELECTION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
8 - LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
SHIELDS AND SIDE PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
SERVICE REMINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
PLASTIC AND RESIN PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
LUBRICATION/MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
GREASE FITTINGS - TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
GREASE FITTINGS - LEFT SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
GREASE FITTINGS - RIGHT SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CHAIN LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
COMBINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
ENGINE LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
FINAL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR AND FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
PROPULSION SYSTEM AIR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
PTO HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
II
FEEDER AND CLEANING FAN GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
UPPER UNLOADER GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
LOWER UNLOADER GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
INCLINED AUGER GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
ROTOR GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
TWO SPEED FEEDER GEAR CASE (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
OPERATOR’S CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
9 - MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
FIRE PREVENTION - ENGINE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
ENGINE FAN, ALTERNATOR AND COMPRESSOR BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ROCKER ARM TO VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ROTOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
SEPARATOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
FEEDER JACKSHAFT DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
FEEDER DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
CLEANING FAN DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
CLEANING FAN JACKSHAFT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
ELEVATOR DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
STRAW SPREADER DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
ELEVATOR DRIVE SLIP CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
MOISTURE SENSOR CLEANING (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
TAILINGS ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
TAILINGS ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
ROCK TRAP DRIVE CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
FEEDER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
STRAW SPREADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
SEPARATOR DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
CONCAVES AND GRATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
FRONT SIGNAL PLATE ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
ALTERNATOR CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
SEVEN TERMINAL ELECTRICAL OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
FRONT LIGHTING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
ROAD LAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
AFTER CUT LAMPS, SIDE AND REAR FLOOD LAMPS, UNLOADER ARM LAMP AND SIEVE LAMP
REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
TAIL LAMP AND WARNING LAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
SIDE MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
FRONT TURN SIGNAL AND CLEARANCE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
III
11 - STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
STORAGE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
REMOVING FROM STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
12 - SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
POWER TRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
GENERAL MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
IV
Template Name: OML_2_col Rac 0-00000
Template Date: 2001_03_06
1 - TO THE OWNER
AXIAL-FLOW® COMBINE
RH08E034
NOTE: When you are in the Combine seat looking

forward, the right and left side of the Combine are the
DEALER’S STAMP
same as your right hand and left hand.
522L94
CNH America, LLC

700 State Street
Racine, WI 53404 U.S.A.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This Combine complies with the provisions of

directive 89/392/EEC, Machinery, as well as directive
89/336/EEC, Electromagnetic Compatibility.
1
1 - TO THE OWNER
TO THE OWNER
Read this manual before you start the engine or T his Com bine, with s tandard equipment a nd
operate the AXIAL-FLOW ® Combine. This manual authorized attachments, is intended to be used for
contains impor tant infor mation about the safe harvesting agricultural food grains such as corn,
operation, adjustment and maintenance of your wheat, rice, soybeans, etc.
machine. Refer to the Detail Index at the end of this
manual for locating specific items about your DO NOT use this machine for any application or
machine. If you need more information, see your purpose other than those described in this manual.
dealer. Consult an authorized dealer or CNH America LLC
on changes, additions or modifications that can be
If your Combine is equipped with AFS Yield Monitor required for this machine to comply with various
and/or AccuGuide™ refer to your CASE IH Yield countr y regulations and safety requirements.
Monitor, AFS Pro 600™ or AccuGuide™ Manual(s) Unauthorized modifications will cause serious injury
for operating instructions. or death. A nyon e mak ing s uch unauthor ized
modifications is responsible for the consequences.
DO NOT operate or permit anyone to operate or
service this machine until you or the other persons Your dealer can give you assistance with CNH
have read this manual. Use only trained operators America LLC approved service and par ts. Your
who have demonstrated the ability to operate and dealer has technicians with special training that know
service this machine correctly and safely. the best methods of repair and maintenance for your
machine.
Call your dealer if you need any assistance or
information.
Signal Plate Location - Italy Only
Signal plate location is on the rear service ladder.

Signal plate is installed locally by our dealer.
RH06F283
Manual Storage Compartment

Ke e p t h e O p e r a t o r ’s M a nu a l i n t h e s t o r a g e
compartment located behind the operator’s seat on
the Combine. The Operator’s Manual must be
available for use by all operators.
20033351
2
2 - IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

Write your machine model number and Product Identification Number (P.I.N.) and Serial Numbers of major
components on the lines provided. If needed, give these numbers to your dealer when you need parts or
information for your machine. The P.I.N. plate on your machine depends on the country of destination.
87041945/RI08F200
MODEL NUMBER AND PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER PLATE
Identification Number Locations
Product Identification Number
RI08F202
RIGHT FRONT OF COMBINE BETWEEN SERVICE LADDER MOUNTING BRACKETS
3
Engine Serial Number
RD07G025
Combine Model Number________________________________________________________________
Product Identification Number____________________________________________________________
Engine Serial Number___________________________________________________________________
4
MACHINE MAIN COMPONENTS
11 4
12 5
11
3
6
2
7
10
1 9 8
RH08E034
1. FEEDER HOUSING 7. LEFT SIDE PANELS
2. OPERATOR’S CAB 8. BATTERY COMPARTMENT
3. LEFT SIDE SERVICE DOOR 9. OPERATOR’S LADDER
4. FRONT HEAD LAMPS 10. OPERATOR’S PLATFORM
5. GRAIN TANK 11. REAR VIEW MIRROR
6. GRAIN TANK UNLOADER TUBE 12. ROTATING BEACON LAMP
NOTE: For internal Combine components see Field

Operation in this manual.
5
1 3
10
6
2
9
4 5
7
RH08E036
1. ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6. OPERATOR’S PLATFORM HANDRAILS

2. RIGHT SIDE PANELS 7. ELEVATORS
3. RIGHT SIDE SERVICE DOOR 8. STATIONARY AIR SCREEN
4. ROTOR HOUSING (INTERNAL) 9. RIGHT SIDE OPERATOR’S PLATFORM
5. SERVICE LADDER 10. REAR BEACON
12
13 16
17
15
14 11
18
Rh08e038
11. STRAW SPREADER 15. TURN SIGNALS
12. REAR ACCESS LADDER 16. STOP LAMPS
13. HOOP GUARD 17. TAIL LAMPS
14. STEERING AXLE 18. REFLECTOR
6
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
SAFETY
Understand that your safety and the safety of other persons is measured by how you operate and service this
machine. Know the positions and operations of all controls before you try to operate them. MAKE SURE YOU
CHECK ALL CONTROLS IN A SAFE AREA BEFORE STARTING YOUR WORK.
READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make sure you understand the controls.
The safety information given in this manual does not replace safety codes, insurance needs, federal, state and
local laws. Make sure your machine has the correct equipment needed as designated by the local laws and
regulations.
The CNH America LLC is continuing to work for your safety and protection by giving these rules for safe operation.
THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL.
! WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND BE ALERT
TO THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. M171C
! Safety Rules !
● Failure to comply to the following messages will result in death or serious injury.
● Operate controls only when seated in the operator’s seat. R137A
● Never operate the machine with shields removed. R423
● Never refuel the machine when the engine is hot or running. Never smoke while refueling. R139C
● Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection or other injury. To
Prevent Personal Injury:
- Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines or performing work on the hydraulic system.
- Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and components are in good condition.
- NEVER use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
- Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose.
- If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately. R149C
● The engine can be stared when the neutral or safety start switch is bypassed:
1. Do not connect across terminals on starter.
2. Attach a booster battery by connecting the positive terminal of the booster battery to the “positive terminal”
provided at the left front of the machine or to the positive terminal of the machine battery. Connect the negative
terminal of the booster battery to the chassis of the machine.
3. When necessary, repair electrical system components promptly so that “jump starting” will not be attempted.
Machine runaway can cause injury or death to operator and bystanders. R107D
● Travel speed should be such that complete control and machine stability is maintained at all times. Where
possible, avoid operating near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning, crossing slopes,
and on rough, slick, or muddy surfaces. R109B
● Collision of high speed road traffic and slow moving machines can cause personal injury or death. On roads,
use flasher/lights according to local laws. Keep SMV emblem visible. Pull over to let faster traffic pass. Slow
down and signal before turning off. R110E
● The Brake Latch is used to lock both Brake Pedals together. Brake pedals must be locked together for road
travel. This will ensure uniform brake application and maximum stopping ability. R112B
7
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
● Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required under all circumstances. R142A
● Check and service cooling system according to maintenance instructions. Hot coolant can spray out if
deaeration tank cap is removed while system is hot. To remove deaeration tank cap, let system cool, turn to first
notch, then wait until all pressure is released. Scalding can result from fast removal of deaeration tank cap.M513
● Fire Extinguishers are equipped on your machine. Make sure that the extinguishers are properly inspected,
fully charged, maintained in operational condition and on the machine during field or job site operation. Be
familiar with their proper use in the event of a fire. Failure to comply could result in death, serious injury or
machine damage. M1274
● Due to the flammable nature of the crop materials encountered by Combines, fire risks are high. This risk can
be minimized by frequent removal of accumulated crop material from the machine and checking for overheated
machine components. If oil leaks appear, retorque bolts or replace gaskets if necessary. R363
● On narrow or hilly roads or blind curves - where motor vehicles can suddenly come upon slow moving traffic,
extra caution should be exercised, such as having two vehicles proceed/follow the Combine to warn and/or
removing the Header and transport separately. R751
! Personal Safety !
Throughout this manual and on the machine’s safety decals, you will find precautionary statements: DANGER,
WARNING or CAUTION followed by specific instructions or ISO two panel safety pictorial symbols. These
precautions are intended for your personal safety.
Failure to follow the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION instructions may result in serious bodily injury or death.
DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:
● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
The color associated with Danger is RED.
● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with Caution is YELLOW.
ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:
● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.
● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.
● Background color is YELLOW.
● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.
8
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
Feeder Safety Lock

The left feeder lift cylinder is equipped with a safety lock. The safety lock is used to prevent accidental lowering of
the feeder or Header. ALWAYS engage the feeder safety lock before working under the feeder or Header.
To Engage the Feeder Safety Lock:
1. Raise the feeder to the maximum height.

1
2. Lift safety lock lever (1). Lower the feeder
safety lock (2) over the Left lift cylinder rod (3).
2 3
RH07G004
To Disengage the Feeder Safety Lock:
Raise feeder to maximum height. Raise feeder

safety lock (2) and lock in storage position using
the safety lock lever (1).
1
2
RH07G003
WARNING: Always shut OFF engine, remove the key and engage feeder safety lock in position on lift
! cylinder before working under Header or feeder. Failure to engage feeder safety lock may cause injury or
death. M184D
9
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
FIRE AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION

! !
● Due to the flammable nature of the crop materials encountered by Combine, fire risks are high. This risk can be
minimized by frequent removal of accumulated crop material from the machine and checking for overheated
machine components. If oil leaks appear, retorque bolts or replace gaskets as necessary. M363
● Remove all trash or debris from the machine each day. Especially check the engine area and exhaust system.
● Sparks or flame can cause the hydrogen gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an explosion do the following:
1. When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the negative (-) cable first; when connecting the battery
cables, connect the negative (-) cable last.
2. When connecting jumper cables to start the engine, use the procedure shown in this manual (see Auxiliary
Battery connections in this manual).
3. Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal items.
4. Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.
● Sparks from the electrical system or engine exhaust can cause an explosion and fire. Before you operate this
machine in an area with flammable dust or vapors, use good ventilation to remove the flammable dust or
vapors.
● Use nonflammable cleaning solvent to clean parts.
● A fire can cause death or injury. Always have fire extinguisher near or on the machine. Make sure the fire
extinguishers are serviced according to the manufacturers instructions.
● If a fire extinguisher has been used, always recharge or replace the fire extinguisher before operating the
machine.
● Keep the cooling system clean and maintain the correct coolant level.
● Make sure that you DO NOT store oily rags or other flammable materials on the machine.
● Engine fuel can cause an explosion or fire. Do not fill the fuel tank with the engine running; if you are near an
open fire; or if you are welding, smoking, etc.
● If the machine has an oil, fuel or hydraulic leak, always repair the leak and clean the area before operating.
● Check the electrical system for loose connections or frayed insulation. Repair or replace the loose or damaged
parts.
● Before welding or using a torch on the machine, clean the area to be repaired.
10
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
! LADDER SAFETY !
● Always use access ladder only after the Combine has come to a complete stop.
● Always face the Combine when using the access ladders.
● Always make sure ladder safety chains are properly connected.
● Make sure rear access ladder is UP during field operation.
● Always position cab access ladder to the FORWARD position when transporting the Combine.
RH08a020
RD07J042 REAR ACCESS LADDER SHOWN IN THE
CAB ACCESS LADDER SHOWN IN THE UP POSITION
FORWARD POSITION
11
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Ri08b167
SERVICE COMPARTMENT
A fire extinguisher is equipped on your machine in the left hand service compartment on the operator’s platform.
Make sure the fire extinguisher is maintained and on the Combine during field operation to assist in the event of a
fire.
Fire Extinguisher Inspection

It is the responsibility of the person operating the machine to regularly inspect the condition of the fire extinguisher
to ensure that it are fully charged and operable.
Inspection items:
1. Operating instructions decal not damaged and legible. Replace if necessary.
2. Safety seals and pull pin not broken or missing. Replace if necessary.
3. Inspect extinguisher gauge. Gauge must not be damaged. Indicator needle must be in green zone. Replace/
recharge if necessary.
4. Visually inspect extinguisher for obvious physical damage, corrosion, blocked discharge nozzle, or leakage.
Replace if necessary.
5. Determine by weighing or “hefting” that extinguisher is full of dry chemical. Replace if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Inspect fire extinguisher before harvest operation and each day of harvest operation.
IMPORTANT: Fire extinguisher recharge or service work must be performed by a trained professional.
IMPORTANT: Fire extinguishers will not prevent machine fires. The danger of fire is ever present during harvest. It
is essential that you regularly clean and maintain the machine. Clean at least daily or more often as required by
harvest conditions. Refer to the “Fire Prevention” on the Next Page.
12
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
FIRE PREVENTION
Fire Sources
The possibility of accidental fires is ever present Your best defense against potential fires on your
during the harvest. The three ingredients needed for machine is to know how to minimize the potential
a fire - combustible materials, oxygen and a potential through proper adjustment, operation, maintenance
source of ignition - are always present during the and cleaning of the machine. This section will provide
harvesting process. information on operating practices to minimize the
potential start of a fire.
Good Management Practices During Machine Operation
Stop Machine Immediately if a Foreign Check for Fuel or Hydraulic Fluid Leaks
Object Enters the Machine Correct any fuel or hydraulic fluid leaks immediately.
Nearly every field contains various foreign objects Clean the machine thoroughly after any hydraulic
(rocks, lost machine parts, irrigation pipe, etc.) that fluid or fuel leaks or spills. Residual hydraulic fluid or
can enter a machine. This can cause friction ignition fuel mixed with debris and trash creates a very
of fire if the machine is not stopped immediately. combustible mixture. This can make an accidental
After the obstruction has been cleared, check and fire much harder to control.
thoroughly clean the areas before resuming harvest:
Cigarette/Cigar Smoking
Stay Alert to any Noises That May DO NOT smoke around machine or in the field. If you
Indicate Interference do smoke, you MUST confine this practice to inside
the cab with the door and window both closed tightly.
Correct any problems immediately. Be sure all
Extinguish any smoking materials completely before
operators and ground crew are alert to potential
you open the door to get out of the cab.
problems.
Be Alert
Keep the Chassis and Engine
Compartment Clean If you are constantly alert, you will be in a better
position to handle a fire if one occurs. Frequently
Clean all debris and trash build-up from around the check your rear-view mirrors and immediately
engine compar tment and rotar y air screen. recognize the unmistakable odor of burning debris or
Excessive trash accumulation makes an accidental trash.
machine fire much harder to control.
What to Do in the Event of a Fire

1. Above all, Do Not Panic. Alert monitoring, along 3. Immediately stand by with fire extinguishers
with good management practices, will PREVENT while completely inspecting the chassis and
most fires, but follow the sequence below if a fire Header to determine and correct the source of
should occur. the fire.
2. Stop the machine in a safe location, turn off the 4. Finally, completely inspect the machine to make
engine, and remove the key. sure there is no smoldering debris or trash
remaining anywhere on the machine.
13
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
PARK BRAKE
RD07G026
PARK BRAKE SWITCH - To engage the Park Brake push front half of the switch. To disengage the Parking Brake
push rear half of the switch.
14
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
! Battery Safety !
● DO NOT make sparks or use an open flame near the battery.
● When disconnecting battery terminals, remove the Negative (-) cable first; then remove the Positive (+). When
connecting cables, connect the Positive (+) first, then connect the Negative (-).
● Disconnect the battery (both terminals) before welding on any part of the machine. Failure to do so may cause
damage to sensitive electrical components.
● BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL - flush with water. INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or milk. DO NOT
induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention immediately. BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes
away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed area. Always wear eye protection when working near
batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
● When working around storage batteries, remember that all of the exposed metal parts are “live”. Never lay a
metal object across the terminals because a spark, short circuit, explosion or personal injury may result.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT SWITCH
3
RH08A015
The electrical disconnect switch (1) is located above

the battery box.
RI08A196
Push lever UP (2) to disconnect electrical system.

Push the lever DOWN (3) to connect the electrical
system.
15
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
! Maintenance Safety !
● Always keep safety and informational decals clean and visible. Replace decals that are damaged, lost, painted
over or can not be read.
● When assembling, operating or servicing the machine, wear protective clothing and personal safety devices
that are necessary for the particular procedure. Some personal safety devices that may be necessary are
protective shoes, face and/or eye protection, hard hat, heavy gloves, filter mask and hearing protection.
● Do Not wear jewelry or loose fitting clothing that may get caught in moving parts. Always wear close fitting
clothing. Keep hands, feet, clothing and hair away from moving parts.
● Never attempt to clear obstructions or objects from the machine while the engine is running.
● Always stop the engine and remove the key from the key switch when leaving the operator’s seat or the
machine.
● When servicing the machine, always have the machine on a firm level surface.
● If shields or guards are removed or opened for service, always replace shields or guards before operating the
machine. Never operate machine with missing or open shields or guards.
● Keep the area used for servicing the machine clean and dry. Wet or oily floors are slippery. Wet spots can be
dangerous when working with electrical equipment. Be sure all electrical outlets and tools are properly
grounded.
16
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
HAZARD WARNING LAMP/PARK BRAKE DISABLE SWITCH

HAZARD WARNING LAMP/PARK BRAKE DISABLE
SWITCH - Push the upper half of the switch to the
CENTER position to activate the amber warning
lamps. Push the bottom half of the switch to turn OFF
the warning lamps. Refer to Towing in this manual for
park brake disable.
RD05D107R
BEACON - IF EQUIPPED
Your Combine may be equipped with a front and rear
rotating beacon. Use the rotating beacons while
operating the Combine on the road as required by
local law.
RH08A009
RD05D107R
17
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
HIGHWAY OPERATION
WARNING: On narrow or hilly roads or blind curves where motor vehicles can suddenly come upon slow
! moving traffic, extra caution should be exercised, such as having two vehicles proceed/follow the Combine
to warn and/or removing the Header and transport separately. M751
1. Comply with state and local laws governing 4. Use road lamps and beacons in accordance with
highway safety regulations. local law.
2. Maintain complete control of the Combine. DO 5. Check clearance before going under electrical
NOT exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h). lines, bridges or entering buildings.
3. Connect the brake pedals and the brake latch.

Make sure that the Combine brake pedal linkage
is correctly adjusted. Make certain the latch is
fully engaged.
Rear Lighting
RH08A020 RH08A016
LIGHTING CONFIGURATION - LIGHTING CONFIGURATION -

EUROPE EXCEPT GERMANY GERMANY ONLY
18
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
Front Lighting
RD08E029 RH08E031
LEFT HAND EUROPEAN LIGHTING RIGHT HAND EUROPEAN LIGHTING

CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION
Travel Speed - Germany Only
20
RH08A016 RH08A017
20 KPH DECAL - REAR 20 KPH DECAL - LEFT SIDE
19
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
Tire Chocks - Germany Only Rear View Mirror - Germany Only
RH08A015 Rd06D153
MIRROR MOUNTED ON RIGHT HAND RAIL
! Instructional Seat Safety !

● Extra riders, especially children, are not A. Machine must be driven at a slower speed
permitted on the machine. and on level ground.
● The Instructional Seat is used only when training B. Avoid driving on highways or public roads.
a new operator or when a service technician is
diagnosing a mechanical problem. C. Avoid quick starts or stops.
● A frequent cause of personal injury or death is D. Avoid sharp turns.

persons falling off and being run over. DO NOT
permit others to ride, except in designated E. Always wear seat belts.
instructional seat.
F. Cab door must be closed at all times.
● When the Instructional Seat is occupied, the
following precautions must be taken:
WARNING: Before starting the engine make sure seat belts are securely fastened. The seat belt can help
ensure your safety if it is used and properly maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the
! belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
M422B
WARNING: A frequent cause of personal injury or death is persons falling off and being run over. DO NOT
! permit others to ride, except in designated instructional seat. Instructor must wear the instructional seat belt.
M488A
20
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
SEAT BELTS
The Operator and Instructor should securely fasten the seat belts before the Combine is operated either in the field
or on the road.
NOTE: The illustrations below show an Instructional Seat Belt. Operator Seat Belt is the same.
RP95J008 RP95J014
1. Pull the seat belt completely across your body. 3. To release the seat belt, push the red button in
Push the metal eye into the buckle until it locks. the center of the buckle and separate the buckle
and metal eye.
2. Adjust the position of the seat belt as low on your
body as possible.
WARNING: Before starting the engine make sure seat belts are securely fastened. The seat belt can help
ensure your safety if it is used and properly maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the
! belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
M422B
Seat Belt Inspection and Maintenance

Keep the Operator and Instructional Seat Belts in 5. Check that bolts are tight on the seat bracket or
good condition by doing the following: mounting.
1. Keep sharp edges and items that can cause 6. If belt is attached to seat, make sure seat or seat
damage away from the belts. brackets are mounted securely.
2. From time to time, check belts, buckles, 7. Keep seat belts clean and dry.
retractors, tethers, slack take-up system and
mounting bolts for damage. 8. Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm
water.
3. Replace all parts that have damage or wear.
9. DO NOT use bleach or dye on the belts, because
4. Replace belts that have cuts that can make the this can make the belts weak.
belt weak.
21
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
NEUTRAL START SYSTEM

Make sure the Neutral Start System is operating 2. If engine does start, Neutral Start System needs
properly by doing the following: adjustment. See your dealer.
1. With the propulsion handle in a position other

than Neutral, the engine should not start.
OPERATOR’S PRESENCE SYSTEM

Make sure the Operator’s Presence System is 2. With everyone clear of the machine engage
operating properly by doing the following: separator and feeder switches.
1. With the Combine running, place the Park Brake 3. After separator and feeder are running, stand up
On and the transmission in Neutral. out of the seat. In approximately 7 seconds the
fee de r s h ou l d s hu t O FF. If n ot , O pe rat or
Presence System needs repair, see your dealer.
BACKUP ALARM
The machine is equipped with a backup alarm. When
the machine is moving in reverse, the alarm will
sound.
RH07G084
22
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
SAFETY AND INFORMATIONAL DECALS

IMPORTANT: Install new decals if the old decals are destroyed, lost, painted over or cannot be read. When parts
are replaced that have decals make sure you install a new decal with each new part.
NOTE: New decals are available from your dealer.
Decals which display the “Read Operator’s Manual”

symbol are intended to direct the operator to the
Operator’s Manual for further information regarding
maintenance, adjustments and/or procedures for
par ticular areas of the Combine. When a decal
displays this symbol refer to the appropriate page of
the Operator’s Manual.
782L95
“READ OPERATOR’S MANUAL”
23
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
RI08C031
1 2
RI08B171
Caution - Sound Horn When Starting Engine

256147A
Read Operator’s Manual
24
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
4
4A
RI08C031
RI08B172
Machine Clearance - Electrocution Hazard
4 4A
429497A
Operator’s Manual Location

371078A On Right Hand Armrest
Do Not Block Recirculation Filter
On Rear Cab Wall
25
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
5 5
6
RI08B167
5 7
RI08B152
Oil Type - On Base Of Grain Tank Near Fill Neck
RI08B151 8
Jack Lift Point
RH97G045 182270A1
T-Hook Tie Down Location Avoid Falls
26
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
10
RI08B167
9 10
RI08B194
Fire Extinguisher
144384A1
Do Not Enter Grain Tank

(Centered On Inside Of Door)
27
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
12 11 12
RI08B168
11 12
RI08B151
Caution Tie Down Point

RI08B151
Caution Jack Point
28
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
15
14
13
RI08B168
13 14
RI08B159
Use Case IH 135 HEP
15
RI08C044
Ladder Hazard - Stay Clear

RI00H088
Hydraulic Fluid Level
29
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
16 17
RI08B168
16 17
87488845
Lubrication Points
144384A1
30
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
19 20
18
RI08B168
18 20
RI08C043
Keep Engine Compartment Clean
19
RI08C043
RI08C048
Hot Surface Hazard Do Not Unplug Or Clean With Engine Running -
Shut Off Engine And Remove Key
31
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
21
22
RI08B168
21 22
RI08C047
Do Not Use Ether
RI08B158
Elevator Chain Adjustment
32
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
26 23
25
24
RI08B166
23 25
329044A1
RI08C021 Warning Hot Liquid Under Pressure Hazard

Do Not Open - Chain Entanglement
On Top Of Feeder Housing Access Door 26
24
RI08C035
Do Not Open- Belt Entanglement

RI08C038
33
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
RI08B166
87347223
WARNING: High fuel pressure. DO NOT open

pressure fuel system with engine running.
Located on engine fuel injection rail.
34
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
28
27
30 29
RI08B169
27 29
RI08C028
Pinch Point 144380A1
Lock Lift Cylinder
28
30
175782A
Feeder Drum Adjustment RI08C021
Caution - Chain Entanglement
35
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
31
33
32
33
RI08B169
31 32
RI08C025
RI08C023
Keep Hand Out Of Auger 33
RI08C021
Caution - Chain Entanglement
36
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
35
34
RI08B169
34 35
RH97G045
T - Hook Tie Down Point
Fan Hazard - Keep Clear
37
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
38
37 36
RI08B169
36 38
RI08C026
Stay Clear Of Machine
RI08C025
37
87720295
Lubrication Points
38
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
41
42
40
39
RI08B170
39 41
RI08C034
CE Designation
42
RI08C028
Pinch Point
40
RI08B174
Unlatch Ladder
144380A1
Lock Lift Cylinder
39
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
45
43
44
RI08B170
43 44
RI08B159
Transmission Oil Type

On Bottom Of Transmission
45
RI08C025
RI08B173
Vane Position
40
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
46 47
RI08B170
46 47
RI08C035
Do Not Open - Belt Entanglement

RI08C023
Keep Hand Out Of Auger
41
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
51
48 50
49
RI08B170
48 50
87720294
Lubrication Points
RI08C025

51
49
RI08C026
Stay Clear Of Machine
RH97G045
T - Hook Tie Down Point
42
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
52
RI08B170
52
RI08C039
Warning Pressurized Vessel - Read Operator’s

Manual (To Right of Cab Door Inside Service
Compartment)
43
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
Additional Decals
RI08C019
Under Panel Lamp Switch
RI08C022
Warning - Spring Under Tension

Optional Chaff Spreader
RI08C015
Right And Left Hand Trim Panel Locks
RI08C018
Engine Compartment Lamp Switch

Rear Of Combine Left of Access Ladder
RI08F027
Two Speed Feeder Gearcase Shift Lever -

Inside Service Compartment
44
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
REFLECTORS
1 1
RH08A020 RH08A022
EUROPE EXCEPT GERMANY
2 2 2
RH08A023
RH08A021
RH08A024
1
2 1
87105503
1. RED 2. AMBER
IMPORTANT: Replace reflectors that are damaged NOTE: New reflectors are available from your
or missing immediately. When parts are replaced that dealer.
have reflectors, make sure that the reflectors are
installed again.
45
3 - SAFETY/DECALS
This Page Left Blank.
46
4 - INSTRUMENTS/CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Instrument Panel is located on the right front “A”
post. It consists of three gages (A), Warning Indicator
Lamps (B), Digital RPM and Header Height Indicator
(C), Re-Configurable LCD (D) and a Key Pad (E).
A
RD07G042
47
Gauges (A)
1. OIL PRESSURE GAUGE - Oil pressure is
dependent on engine speed. The colored area at
the end of the sweep at high idle (2410 rpm) is
A 1
41 psi. The halfway position is 60 psi. If the oil
pressure is less than 42 psi at 2410 rpm, the
indicator (A) will illuminate and the Klaxon Alarm
will sound twice. If the oil pressure is less than 30
psi at 2400 rpm, the indicator (A) will flash and
the Laser Alarm will sound continuously. If oil
pressure does not increase, the engine will shut
down in 30 seconds.
Turn off the engine and check the oil level in the 2 B
crankcase. Add oil if necessary to bring it to the
proper level. Start the engine. If the indicator still
illuminates and the alarm sounds, stop the
engine. DO NOT operate the engine. See your
dealer.
2. COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE- This

gauge shows the temperature of the coolant C
3
circulating through the engine. Under normal
operation the pointer will be in the center of the
gauge. If the pointer enters the red zone, engine
temperature is 225° F (107° C). The indicator (B)
will illuminate and the Klaxon Alarm will sound
twice. If the temperature exceeds 235° F (112.8°
C), the indicator (B) will flash and the Laser RH07G115
Alarm sounds continuously. If the temperature is

not reduced, the engine will shut down in 30
seconds.
3. FUEL GAUGE - When the key switch is in the

ON position the fuel gauge indicates the level of
fuel in the fuel tank. The start of the yellow area
indicates that the tank is approximately 17% full.
LOW FUEL WARNING - The operator sets the
low fuel level alarm through the Selection Menu
screen\ Set up menu screen\Set Alarm screen.
Depending on fuel tank size, the operator can set
the alarm per reference level and percent of fuel
remaining (See Instrument Calibration in this
manual). The indicator (C) will illuminate and the
chime alarm sounds once when the fuel level is
one reference level above the alarm set point for
one minute. When the level reaches the set point
for one minute, the indicator (C) will flash and the
Klaxon Alarm will sound twice.
48
Warning Indicators (B)

There are four types of audible alarms along with the warning indicators. Listed in order of high to low priority they
are:
A. Laser Alarm - Sounds continuously while alarm condition is present.
B. Klaxon Alarm - Sounds twice in a row.
C. Chime Alarm - Sounds once unless otherwise noted.
D. High Tone Alarm - Sounds three times in a row.
All warning indicator lamps will illuminate for 1 to 2 seconds on startup.
1. ENGINE WARNING INDICATOR - The indicator
will illuminate and the Klaxon Alarm will sound 2
1
when the controller detects a non - critical fault
condition.
2. A/C REFRIGERANT PRESSURE INDICATOR 3 4 5
- Not used at this time.
3. STOP ENGINE INDICATOR - The indicator will
illuminate and the Laser Alarm will sound if there 6 7
is low engine oil pressure, high coolant temp and
high intake manifold temp. The engine will shut
down within 30 seconds of this warning. 8 9
4. COMBINE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR - This
indicator will illuminate if any fault is detected that
is not engine or Header/reel related. There is no
audible alarm.
5. HEADER MALFUNCTION INDICATOR - This
indicator will illuminate for any Header or reel
fault detected. There is no audible alarm.
6. PARK BRAKE INDICATOR - This indicator will
illuminate when the Parking Brake is engaged. If
ground speed is detected, the Klaxon Alarm will
sound continuously.
7. WATER IN FUEL INDICATOR - This indicator
will illuminate and the Chime Alarm will sound RH07G116
when water needs to be drained from the primary
fuel filter.
8. COOLANT LEVEL LOW INDICATOR - Not used
at this time.
9. INTAKE MANIFOLD TEMP HIGH INDICATOR -
There are two levels of warning.
A. The first level of warning occurs at 200° F
(93.3° C). The indicator lamp will illuminate
and the Klaxon Alarm will sound.
B. The second level of warning occurs at 235°
F (112.8 ° C). The indicator lamp will flash
and the Laser Alar m will sound. If the
temperature is not lowered in 30 seconds,
the engine will shut down.
49
10. LUBE ON INDICATOR - This indicator will

illuminate when automatic lubrication system
(If equipped) is on. Consult the lubrication
system manufacture operation manual.
11. HYDRAULIC FLUID LEVEL LOW INDICATOR -
The indicator will illuminate and the Klaxon
Alarm will sound when the level of the hydraulic
fluid in the reservoir becomes low. Stop the
engine and check the fluid level in the reservoir.
12. HYDRAULIC FLUID TEMPERATURE HIGH
INDICATOR - The indicator will illuminate and
the Klaxon Alarm will sound when the
temperature of the hydraulic fluid becomes too
high. Stop the engine and check for the cause.
13. UNLOADER AUGER ON INDICATOR - This 11 12 13
indicator will illuminate when the unloader auger
is turned ON.
If the unloader tube is returned to the saddle
14 15 16
while the grain tank is being unloaded, the auger
will shut off and the UNLOADER ON INDICATOR
will turn off. The auger will not engage while the 17 18 19
tube is in the saddle.
14. TRAILER/HEADER TURN SIGNALS ON
INDICATOR - This indicator will illuminate when
a trailer or Header light harness is connected RH07G116
and the turn signals are in use.
15. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION INDICATOR - This
indicator will illuminate and the chime warning
will sound when the engine air filter needs
cleaning.
16. UNLOADER OUT INDICATOR - This indicator
will illuminate and the Chime Alarm will sound
when the unloader tube is swung out. It will
remain illuminated until the unloader tube is
returned to the saddle.
17. ENGINE PREHEAT INDICATOR - This indicator
will illuminate and the Chime Alarm will sound
when the key switch is turned to the ON position
and the ambient temperature is 66° F (19° C) or
less. When the indicator turns OFF, continue to
start the engine. The indicator may come on and
go off up to 3 times in extremely cold weather
until the engine warms.
18. BATTERY CHARGING WARNING INDICATOR -
This indicator will illuminate and Chime Alarm will
sound when key switch battery voltage drops
below 11.6 volts for 3 seconds. Stop the engine
and check for the cause.
50
19. GRAIN TANK FULL INDICATOR - This indicator

will flash at a high rate and the high tone will
sound when the tank is detected full. If the
Combine is equipped with rotating beacons,
when the tank is detected 3/4 full, the indicator
will flash at a low rate, the Chime Alarm will
sound and the beacons will be activated.
19
RH07G116
51
Custom LCD Display (C)

The Custom LCD Display is divided into three
sections.
1. Shaft Speed Monitor
2. Tachometer 1
3. Header Position Monitor
RD07G037
1. SHAFT SPEED MONITOR DISPLAY - The Shaft

Speed Monitor will monitor these speeds.
A. Feeder
B. Rotor
C
C. Grain Elevator D
B
D. Beater Chopper
E. Sieve Shaker A E
F. Straw Spreader and optional Chaff
Spreader if equipped. H
F
G. Tailings Elevator G
H. Fan
See Operating Instructions in this manual. RD07G038
52
2. TACHOMETER DISPLAY - The tachometer

functions are displayed on two digital displays.
2
The upper display will show ENGINE speed (1)
or FAN (2) speed.
1
The lower display will show GROUND speed (3)
or ROTOR (4) speed.
Depressing the ENGINE/CLEANING FAN button 4

(A) on the keypad will toggle the tachometer
between the two. The function being monitored 3
will be highlighted on the tachometer display.
Depressing the GROUND/ROTOR button (B) on

the keypad will toggle the tachometer between
the two. The function being monitored will be
highlighted on the tachometer display. A B
Engine Speed Alarm - If the feeder is engaged

and the engine speed is below the engine speed
alarm set value but is above 1800 RPM, the
engine speed will be displayed (1) flashing and
the Chime Alarm will sound continuously. The
engine speed alarm and chime will be
deactivated if:
● The engine speed increases above the alarm
set point.
● The engine speed falls below 1800 RPM.
● The feeder is turned OFF.
When the engine speed alarm is deactivated, the RD07G039
display will return to the previously displayed

RPM.
See Set Up Alarm Screen in Combine
Adjustments and Calibration in this manual for
engine speed alarm set value information.
3. HEADER POSITION MONITOR - The Header
Position Monitor displays Header height mode
( A ) a nd H ea d er po s it i on ( B ) i n in c he s or B
centimeters
A
A. Height Mode
● Up arrow on constantly - Return to cut.
● Both arrows on constantly - Auto height.
● Down arrow on constantly - Pressure float.
B. Position
● Feeder Position - When height system is in
manual mode or RTC. RD07G041
● Ground Height Position - When height

system is in Auto Height.
● Percent Ground Pressure - When height system is in Pressure Float.
53
Re-Configurable LCD (D)

1. The Re-Configurable LCD (RCD) is a multi
function display that can have up to four different
screen sections. The RCD works in conjunction
with input from the keypad. The screens of the
RCD will be displayed according to the following
priority listed from highest to lowest:
● Alarm/Abort screens.
● Selection Menu screen and sub screens.
● Error screens.
● CAN (Controller Area Network) and
Instrumentation Controller input initiated
screens.
● Service Reminder alarm mode screens.
● Keypad initiated screens.
● Monitor screens.
RD07M087
54
Keypad (E)
The following touch switches are used in the
selection of screens, adjustments and calibration of
the Combine: 1 2 3
1. Toggle tachometer between engine and cleaning
fan speed.
2. Alarm Off/Hours - Cancel alarms, display engine
and separator hours, adjust alarm volume and
display backlighting.
4 5 6
3. Toggle tachometer between ground and rotor
speed.
4. Enter - Select highlighted menu and to save 7 8 9
changes.
5. Up Arrow - Increase highlighted item.
6. Cancel - Exits screen. Does not save changes.
7. Service - Service hours. When pressed less than 10 11 12
5 seconds after start up, it will access:
● Combine setup.
● Combine calibration.
● Error history.
● Troubleshooting.
8. Down Arrow - Decreases highlighted items. RD07G053
9. Grain Scan - Rotor loss sensitivity, sieve loss

sensitivity and seed size setting.
10. Area Settings - Zero area counter, set Header
width, set area counter stop height (if no yield
monitor).
11. Combine Information - Concave, upper and lower
sieve position settings, total area and electrical
power.
12. Header Settings - Height sensitivity, tilt sensitivity and Header type setup.
55
YIELD MONITOR
(IF EQUIPPED)
Refer to your Yield Monitor and AFS Pro 600
Operator’s Manuals for correct procedures in
operating your monitor display.
Clean monitor screen with a clean soft dry cloth only.

DO NOT use any solvent to clean.
RD07G027
56
REAR LADDER SENSOR

The Combine is equipped with a rear ladder sensor
(1). The purpose of the rear ladder sensor is to
disable the grain tank unloader auger system 2
anytime the rear ladder (2) has been lowered.
Additionally, if the rear ladder is lowered while the
s e p a r a to r i s e n g a g e d , t h e s e p a r a t o r w i l l b e
disengaged.
RD07G043
Whenever the rear ladder is down, the Rear Ladder

alarm screen A 204 (3) will be shown on the RCD.
RD07M088
57
OPERATING CONTROLS
Propulsion Control Lever
2 The propulsion control lever is used to control the direction of travel and the ground speed of the
Combine.
1
NEUTRAL POSITION - The neutral position is

located in the center of the propulsion control lever 1
slot. Moving the propulsion control lever toward the
neutral position decreases the ground travel speed.
Moving the propulsion control lever into the neutral
position will stop all ground travel. The propulsion
control lever must also be in the NEUTRAL position
to start the engine.
RD07G028
FORWARD TRAVEL - Move the propulsion control
lever forward from the NEUTRAL position to start 2
forward ground travel. Moving the propulsion control
lever farther forward in the slot increases the forward
travel speed.
RR07G029
REVERSE TRAVEL - Move the propulsion control
lever toward the right and then rearward from the
neutral position to start reverse ground travel. Moving 3
the propulsion lever far ther rearward in the slot
increases the reverse travel speed.
RD07G030
58
6
3
4 5
7
8
2 9
1
RD07G033/RD07G034
1. REEL POSITION SWITCH - This is a four position switch which operates as follows:
Raise - Push the bottom of the switch to raise the reel. If Folding Corn Head (and feeder off), push
the bottom of the switch to fold the Header.
Lower - Push the top of the switch to lower the reel. If Folding Corn Head (and feeder off), push the
top of the switch to unfold the Header.
Forward - Push the switch to the Left to move the reel forward (if equipped with the reel fore/aft
option). If corn head, push the switch to the left to increase the stripper plate opening.
Aft - Push the switch to the Right to move the reel to the rear (if equipped with the reel fore/aft
option). If corn head, push the switch to the Right to decrease the stripper plate opening.
2. HEADER CONTROL SWITCH - This is a four position switch which operates as follows:
Raise - Push the bottom of the switch to raise the Header.
Lower - Push the top of the switch to lower the Header.
Tilt Left - Push the switch to the left to tilt the Header counterclockwise (Terrain Tracker® option).
Tilt Right - Push the switch to the right to tilt the Header clockwise (Terrain Tracker® option).
3. GRAIN TANK UNLOADER TUBE SWITCH - Push the left side of the switch to swing the unloader
tube out. Push the right side of the switch to swing the unloader tube in. When the switch is released,
it will return to the Neutral position. The switch operates in two modes dependent on unloading auger
status.
4. GRAIN TANK UNLOADER DRIVE SWITCH - To start the unloader, press and release the switch
and then release it. To stop the unloader press and release the switch again.
59
5. HEADER RESUME- While the height system is in the Manual mode and the feeder is engaged, if
the operator momentarily presses the RESUME button, the height system will lower or raise the
Header to the feeder position, then transition to the working setting mode specified in Setting #1 or
Setting #2 for the appropriate Header type. The settings selected is the last one operated in. If there
was no prior setting used, the default is Setting #1.
While in the AUTO mode, momentarily actuating the RESUME switch will toggle between the
settings and the Header will be raised or lowered to the feeder position then transition to the
working setting and mode specified in the new setting.
If auto tilt is available but tilt is in manual mode, momentary actuation of the RESUME switch will
enable auto tilt if auto height is running. An additional momentary actuation of the RESUME switch
will then toggle between the settings. See Header Operation in this manual for more information.
6. QUICK STOP BUTTON - One pulse on the yellow quick stop button will stop the Feeder / Header
drive and unloading auger. To re-enable the Feeder/Header drive, cycle the feeder switch on the
console. To re-enable the unloader, momentarily push the unloader drive switch (4) on the
propulsion lever handle.
7. SHIFT BUTTON - The shift button located on the back of the propulsion lever handle, when used with switches
on the front, allows operation of secondary features:
● Shift + Header Tilt Left/Right - Adjusts the Edge Offset when AFS AccuGuide ™ System is enabled.
● Shift + Reel Fore/Aft - Controls the Knife fore/aft.
● Shift + Reel Raise - If hydraulic Flex Header (North America Only), increase flex pressure (increase cutter bar
downward force). Flex pressure setting screen will also be displayed on the RDC.
● Shift + Reel Lower - If hydraulic Flex Header (North America Only), decreases flex pressure (decrease cutter
bar downward force). Flex pressure setting screen will also be displayed on the RDC.
NOTE: Flex head pressure can be set from 0 to 250 bar (0 to 3625 psi).
● Shift + Header Resume - Raises the reel (if equipped with optional reel position sensors) and Header to the
Headlands Mode and disables area counter. Reel is returned to work position and enables area counter when
Resume is pressed.
8. OPERATOR HAND REST
9. HAND REST ADJUSTING KNOB - The operator’s hand rest can be adjusted using the adjusting knob. To
loosen the adjusting knob turn it counterclockwise. Adjust the hand rest and retighten the adjusting knob.
60
Right Console
8
2
1 7
3
4 6
5
RD07G032
1. REEL SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH - This is a two position rocker switch used to select
automatic or manual reel speed operation.
Automatic Position - Push the front of the switch to select automatic reel speed operation.
The reel speed will automatically increase or decrease with the Combine ground speed.
The ratio of reel speed to ground speed can be adjusted as needed.
Manual Position - To select manual reel speed operation, push the switch to the rear
position. The reel speed will not be affected by ground speed. The reel speed can be
adjusted as needed.
2. REEL SPEED CONTROL - The reel speed control allows the operator to set the reel speed in
manual mode and varies the reel offset speed in automatic mode.
When the Reel Speed Selector Switch is in the MANUAL position, it allows the operator to
adjust the operating speed of the reel. The reel speed is adjustable from zero (0) RPM to full
speed. Turn the control clockwise to increase reel speed or counterclockwise to decrease
reel speed. The selected speed will remain constant.
With the Reel Speed Selector Switch is in the AUTOMATIC position, turn the control
clockwise to increase the offset speed or turn the control counterclockwise to decrease the
offset speed ratio. The offset speed defines an additional reel constant speed above the reel
speed that is proportional to ground speed.
3. SEPARATOR DRIVE SWITCH - This is a two position switch. Lifting and pushing the switch
forward to ON engages the separator drive. Pulling the switch rearward to OFF disengages
the separator drive.
NOTE: Engine RPM must be <1800 RPM for the separator to engage.
61
4. FEEDER CLUTCH SWITCH - To engage the feeder and Header drive and automatic Header
controls, the operator must be seated. Lift and push the feeder clutch switch forward to the ON
position to engage the feeder, Header drives, automatic Header controls and reel drive. The
feeder clutch switch also engages the feeder reverser. Lift and pull the switch rearward to
engage the feeder reverser.
The feeder and Header drives will not engage unless the SEPARATOR is also engaged. The
reverser will operate anytime the engine is running.
If the FEEDER CLUTCH SWITCH is left “ON” and the operator is seated, engaging the
SEPARATOR will not engage the feeder and other functions as stated above. To engage the
feeder, the feeder clutch switch must be cycled.
NOTE: Automatic Header controls include RTC (Return to Cut), Pressure Float (if equipped), Auto Header Height
(if equipped) and Terrain Tracker® Automatic Mode (if equipped).
NOTE: The operator’s seat on the Combine is equipped with a switch that permits operation of the feeder and
Header drive only when the operator is seated. The feeder and Header drive and the automatic Header controls
will disengage seven (7) seconds after the operator leaves the seat and will remain disengaged until reset. To
reset, turn the FEEDER CLUTCH SWITCH off, then ON while the operator is seated.
5. Auto Header Height Adjustment Control- Used for making fine Header height
adjustments while in the Auto Header mode.
● Increase - Press the top of the switch to increase Header height during operation.
● Decrease - Press the bottom (-) of the switch to decrease Header height during
operation.
NOTE: If the circuit for the manual controls for RAISE and LOWER are detected faulty, this control can be used for
manually raising and lowering the Header. Auto control will be disabled.
6. Auto Header Height Set Control- Used to set the Header working position and mode in
relation to the ground and the type of Header. This setting can only occur in manual mode.
● Set 1- Press the top (1) of the switch to set height Setting 1.
● Set 2- Press the bottom (2) of the switch to set height Setting 2.
The arrows in the Header position monitor show the height mode.
RTC - The UP Arrow (1) is on.
Auto Height - The Up Arrow (1) and Down Arrow (2) are both on.
Pressure Float - The Down Arrow (2) is on.
7. Field/Road Mode Switch- Two position switch for changing the Combine from field ready
to road ready.
Road - Press the top of the switch for roading and the Roan Mode Screen will be
displayed on the RDC and the following systems will be disabled:
● Separator
● Feeder
● Reel and unloader auger drives
● Unloader swing out
● Reel fore/aft and reel up/down
Field- Press the bottom of the switch for field work. The above systems will be re-enabled.
62
8. SIDE KNIFE CONTROL SWITCH - (If Equipped) Depress the center of the switch to engage the
right side knife. Depress the front of the switch to engage both the right and left side knives.
Depress the rear of the switch to disengage the knife or knives.
9. MINIMUM REEL SPEED CONTROL - This

control is located under the right hand arm rest
and is used to set the minimum reel speed 9
when the REEL SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH
is in AUTOMATIC. Fully counterclockwise is
zero (0) reel speed.
RD97G033
63
10 11 12
13 14
RD07G026
10. AUTO GUIDANCE MASTER SWITCH (If Equipped) - See Auto Guidance Operator’s Manual.
11. UPPER SIEVE POSITION CONTROL SWITCH (If Equipped) - Depress front half of the switch to
increase upper sieve opening. Depress rear half of the switch to decrease upper sieve opening.
(The sieve adjustment switches at the left rear of the Combine may also be used).
12. LOWER SIEVE POSITION CONTROL SWITCH (If Equipped) - Depress front half of the switch to
increase lower sieve opening. Depress rear half of the switch to decrease lower sieve opening.
(The sieve adjustment switches at the left rear of the Combine may also be used).
NOTE: If upper or lower sieve position switch is depressed in either direction, the sieve setting screen will be
displayed on the RCD. The sieve setting screen will be displayed for 2.5 seconds after the switch is released. If the
sieves are 1-1/8, a relative number from 0 to 20 for the sieve opening will be displayed. If the sieves are 1-5/8, a
relative number from 0 to 30 for the sieve opening will be displayed. The relative number is the approximate
opening in millimeters.
13. CONCAVE POSITION CONTROL SWITCH - If depressed in either direction the concave setting
screen will be displayed on the RCD. The concave setting screen will be displayed for 2.5
seconds after the switch is released. A relative number from 0 to 50 for the concave opening will
be displayed. The relative number is the approximate opening in millimeters.
Depress front of the switch to increase concave clearance.
Depress rear of the switch to decrease concave clearance.
14. CLEANING FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH - This is a rocker switch which operates as
follows:
Fast Position - Depressing front half of the switch will increase the speed of the cleaning fan.
Slow Position - Depressing rear half of the switch will decrease the speed of the cleaning fan.
Depressing the switch in either direction will cause the fan speed and rotor speed to be displayed in place of the
current tachometer display. Fan and rotor speeds will be displayed for 4 seconds after the switch is released, then
the display will return to what was previously displayed.
64
19
15
20
16
18 17
RD07G026
15. ROTOR SPEED CONTROL SWITCH - This is a rocker switch which operates as follows:
Fast Position - Depress front half of the switch to increase the rotor speed.
Slow Position - Depress rear half of the switch to decrease the rotor speed.
Depressing the switch in either direction will cause the fan speed and rotor speed to be displayed
in place of the current display. Fan and rotor speeds will be displayed for 4 seconds after the switch
is released, then the display will return to what was previously displayed.
16. VARIABLE PROPULSION MOTOR SWITCH (If Equipped) - Depress front half of the switch for
high range and fast speeds. Depress rear half of the switch for low range and slow speeds.
17. POWER GUIDE AXLE SWITCH (If Equipped) - Depress front half of the switch to ENGAGE the
Power Guide Axle. Depress rear half of the switch to DISENGAGE the Power Guide Axle.
NOTE: The Power Guide Axle will not engage when the gear shift lever is moved into third gear.
18. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH - To engage the Parking Brake depress front half of the switch. To
disengage the Parking Brake depress rear half of the switch.
19. SPREADER DIRECTION CONTROL SWITCH - If changed in either direction, the spreader
direction setting screen will be displayed on the RCD. The spreader direction setting screen will be
displayed for 2.5 seconds after no change is detected. A relative number from 0 to approximately
15 and an arrow for the direction will be displayed. The relative number is the approximate degrees
left or right of center. Depress front of the switch to adjust spread direction to the left. Depress rear
of the switch to adjust spread direction to the right.
20. THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER - Used to control the speed of the engine. To increase engine
speed move the lever forward. To decrease engine speed, move the lever to the rear.
65
21
22
23
RD97G033
21. HEADER RAISE RATE CONTROL - Sets the rate at which the Header raises in Manual
control and in RTC.
22. HEADER LOWER RATE CONTROL - Sets the rate at which the Header lowers in Manual
control and in RTC.
23. ACCUMULATOR SWITCH (If Equipped) - The operator can enable or disable the
accumulator system at any time.
NOTE: The minimum reel speed control is located under the right hand arm rest also.
66
Right Console Adjustment

The Right console moves with the seat and can be
adjusted forward and back and/or up and down.
UP/DOWN ADJUSTMENT - There are four (4)

positions to which the Right console can be adjusted.
To adjust the console up or down do the following:
1. Loosen the adjusting knob at the rear of the

Right console.
2. Move the Right console into the desired position.
3. Tighten the adjusting knob.
A24305
FORWARD/BACK ADJUSTMENT - To adjust the
Right console forward or back do the following:
1. Loosen the two adjusting knobs located beneath

the Right console.
2. Move the Right console to the desired position.
3. Tighten the adjusting knobs.
A24315
67
Floor Controls
RD01E353
1. STEERING COLUMN TILT PEDAL - To move the steering column to another position, push the tilt pedal and
move the column. To lock the steering column in the selected position, release the tilt pedal.
2. BRAKE PEDALS - The Left pedal stops the Left drive wheel and the Right pedal stops the Right drive wheel.
For Left or Right turning, use the pedals separately. For safe operation on roads the Brake latch (4) MUST be
engaged.
3. BRAKE LATCH - The brake latch can be used to lock both brake pedals together so both pedals can be
actuated easily at the same time. Make certain the latch is fully engaged in the slot provided when it is latched.
WARNING: The Brake Latch is used to lock both Brake Pedals together. Brake Pedals must be locked
! together for road travel. This will ensure uniform brake application and maximum stopping ability. M112B
68
Steering Column
1
RD05D057
2 2
445L96
1. TURN INDICATOR CONTROL - Move control FORWARD to indicate RIGHT turn. Move control
REARWARD to indicate LEFT turn. If road lights on, move control upward to toggle between Head Lamp
High Beam and Low Beam.
If the Field/Road Mode switch is in the Field mode, and the lights are ON and the Hazards are OFF, when
the turn indicator control is momentarily moved in either direction for less than 1 second, the side flood
lamps will illuminate. With the side flood lamps ON, actuating the turn indicator control in either direction will
turn the side flood lamps OFF.
2. TURN INDICATOR LAMPS - The turn indicator lamps behind the steering wheel (see illustration) will
flash to indicate the direction of the turn. The turn indicator lamps also flash with the hazard
flashers. If there is a problem detected with the flashing warning lamps, the turn indicators along with
the flashing warning lamps will be flashed at a faster rate.
69
3
3
RD05D057 / RD05D056
5
445L96
3. HORN BUTTON - The horn button is located at the end of the TURN INDICATOR CONTROL. Push the
button to sound the horn.
4. STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER - Allows tilt adjustment of steering wheel to most comfortable
position. To tilt the steering wheel to another position, loosen the lever. When the steering wheel is in
the desired position, tighten the lever.
5. HEAD LAMP HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (Europe only) - Lamp will illuminate when head lamp high
beam is ON.
NOTE: The HAZARD WARNING LAMPS SWITCH is located on the front headliner. See Front Headliner in this
manual.
70
6. KEY SWITCH - This switch has four positions:
A. OFF POSITION - The key is in the vertical D

position. The Combine cannot be started
witho ut th e key. The key c an only b e
removed in the OFF position. C
B. ACCESSORY POSITION -
A
Counterclockwise from the OFF position.
Use this position to operate the radio,
optional AFS system, etc. without engaging B
the instruments or starting the engine.
C. ON POSITION - First position clockwise 448L96
from OFF. All warning lamp indicators will

illuminate for approximately two (2) seconds
and the fuel level, voltmeter and coolant
temperature gauges will indicate their
present conditions. This position is also 6
u s e d fo r c a l i b r a t i o n o f C o m b i n e
instrumentation (See Combine Calibration
in this manual).
D. START POSITION - Second position

clockwise from OFF. The starter motor will
crank if the propulsion control lever is in the
NEUTRAL position. Release the key switch
when the engine starts to run. After the
RD05D057
engine has started, the indicator lamps will
KEY SWITCH POSITIONS
go OFF.
NOTE: To prevent operation by persons not

authorized to operate and to prevent excessive
discharge of the batteries, remove the key when you
leave the Combine.
71
Front Headliner
5 4 3
1 2
RD05D107R
1. HAZARD WARNING LAMPS/PARK BRAKE DISABLE SWITCH - Press top part of switch to
activate the amber warning lamps (4 lamps on the front platform facing forward, 2 facing to the
side, and two lamps on the rear of the Combine). If the field lamp switch is on, this also turns off
the six cab roof lamps, unloader tube lamp, grain tank lamp, rear deck flood lamps and after cut
lamps. The indicator lamp in this switch flashes to indicate the hazard lamps are flashing. Press
bottom part of switch to turn OFF the hazard lamps. To activate Tow (Disable) circuit, lift detent
lock and press switch into third position, See Disabled Machine in this manual.
2. FIELD LAMP SWITCH - (Hazard and beacon switches OFF) Press this switch to activate the field
lamps: all six cab roof lamps, tail lamps, unloader tube lamp, grain tank lamp, rear flood lamps (if
equipped) and after cut lamps (if equipped) are activated. While in this lighting mode:
FIELD WORK LIGHTING MODE (Light switch ON, hazard switch OFF): All four cab flood lamps,
both cab distance lamps, tail lamps, unloader tube lamp, grain tank lamp, rear deck flood lamp (if
equipped) and after cut lamps (if equipped) are activated. While in this lighting mode:
A. If Field/Road Mode switch is in Field, moving the turn signal switch momentarily in either
direction will activate the side flood lamps located on both mirror brackets.
B. If Field/Road Mode switch is in Field, raising the feeder housing above the headlands position
will activate the side flood lamps and deactivate them upon lowering the Header.
EXIT LIGHTING MODE The side flood lights will be activated when:
A. Turning the light switch ON while the key switch is OFF.
B. Turning the key switch OFF in less than 45 seconds after the light switch has been turned OFF.
The side flood lamps for exiting will remain on for 90 seconds after the light switch or key switch
has been turned OFF.
3. WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH - To activate the windshield wiper, press the switch to
the center position. To deactivate the windshield wiper, press the switch to the rear. To activate
washer, press switch to the FORWARD position and hold. to deactivate the washer, let go of the
switch.
4. ROTATING BEACON LAMP SWITCH - Press this switch to the center position to turn on the
marker position and tail lamps. If field lamp switch on, this also turns off the six cab roof lamps,
unloader tube lamp, grain tank lamp, rear deck flood lamps an after cut lamps. Press this switch to
the forward position to activate the rotating beacons and the platform lamps.
NOTE: The lower grain tank level switch will also activate the rotating beacon when the tank is about 3/4 full.
72
5. GRAIN TANK COVERS CONTROL SWITCH (If equipped) - Depress and hold the top of the
switch until the covers are fully open. Depress and hold the bottom of the switch until the covers
are fully closed.
WARNING: Sound horn to alert others to stay clear of area before

! depressing grain tank covers control switch. Failure to comply could result
in death or serious injury. M1292
6. RADIO - Radio equipment to fit the

front headliner is available. If a
radio is ordered as a
m a n u fa c t u r e r o p t i o n , a n
Operator’s Manual will be located
in the cab Operator’s Manual
compartment.
RD05D108
Procedure For Changing The Radio Operating Frequencies For a Desired Country
When the radio is being used in a country other than 2. Press and release the BAND switch until the
the USA, the radio tuning frequencies can be desired country or region is displayed.
changed to match the country it is being used in. The
3. After about 5 seconds the radio will display the
countries or regions that are available are USA,
time.
Europe/Australia, Japan, Argentina, China and Saudi
Arabia (See Note). Use the following procedure to 4. The radio frequencies are now set to the
select the country: frequencies for the country or region selected.
1. With the ignition ON and the radio OFF, press
NOTE: If the Saudi Arabia frequencies are selected,
and hold the DSPL/Tm Set button until the
the radio can NOT be reset to any other country.
HOURS digits flashes.
73
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
3 2 1
RD05D054
1. TEMPERATURE CONTROL - Turn the dial clockwise to increase cabin temperature. Turn the dial
counterclockwise to decrease cabin temperature. Automatic temperature control is achieved with the
solid blue or red bands. When the control is turned fully clockwise or counterclockwise into the area with
the bands of red or blue, the HVAC system will be in maximum mode and will provide maximum capacity
regardless of the cab inside air temperature.
2. CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH - Press the switch to turn ON the automatic

function of the climate control. Press the switch again to turn OFF the climate
control. DEFOG CONTROL SWITCH - Press the switch to turn ON the window
defog operation. Press the switch again to turn OFF the defog operation.
3. BLOWER CONTROL - To select the blower

speed, turn the control clockwise from low to
high. The blower speed is infinitely adjustable
throughout its control range. In the automatic
mode, the system will determine and adjust
blower speed. If the blower speed is adjusted
while in automatic mode, the blower speed will no
longer be automatically controlled. The HVAC
system will still attempt to control temperature,
but may not be able to do so if the blower speed 4
is set too low. To reset automatic blower speed,
cycle the climate control switch (6) from auto to 3
off and back to auto again.
RD05D054
4. DISPLAY - Refer to next page for additional

information.
74
Automatic Climate Control Operation

The display provides the operator with information
about the system’s performance.
B
A
● It provides the desired cab temperature reading
selected by the operator. The display reading
may be in Fahrenheit or Celsius. To make the
change between reading there is an in-line
connection in the cab main harness under the
instructional seat. Completing this connection C
D
provides for Celsius readings. This connection is
set at the manufacturer for the appropriate 20030143
country or region. A. DIGITAL TEMPERATURE C. AUTOMATIC MODE

SETTING INDICATOR
● It illuminates an icon “A” when the system is B. DEFOG MODE INDICATOR D. SERVICE INDICATOR
operating in the automatic climate mode.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
● When the “A” is not illuminated the blower motor
speed MUST be manually controlled and “Auto”
mode will only control the water valve and
compressor, while trying to maintain the set
temperature.
● It illuminates the windshield icon when the

system is in the Defog Mode.
● It illuminates the book icon when the system is

not operating correctly. Along with the book icon
a fault code will also be displayed to assist the
technician making the correct repairs.
The range for the Automatic Temperature Control is

from a set point of 16 to 30° C (61 to 89° F). The set
point of 16 to 32° C (60 to 90° F) will be displayed and
the “A” icon on the display will be an ODD number
when the system is in maximum mode.
75
Automatic Temperature Control Error Codes

Code Description Fault (Error)
1 High Pressure Switch - wiring or cycling (2 in 1 minute) Heat Mode -
Compressor clutch disabled
2 Low Pressure Switch - wiring or open for 1 minute Heat Mode -
3 Blower speed select potentiometer open / shorted to power Auto blower speed
4 Temperature select potentiometer open / shorted to power 72° F Setpoint
5 Recirculation potentiometer open / shorted to power Not currently used for
this application
6 Mode select potentiometer open / shorted to power Not currently used for
this application
7 Cab temperature sensor wiring - open, short, ground, power Manual mode -
compressor clutch disabled
8 Evaporator temperature sensor wiring - open, short, ground, power Heat Mode -
9 Outlet temperature sensor wiring - open, short, ground, power Does not limit blower speed
on startup
10 Outside temperature sensor wiring - open, short, ground, power Not currently used for
this application
11 Not currently used for this application
12 Cab pressure sensor wiring Not currently used for
this application
14 Clutch output fault (overcurrent, short to ground) Not currently used for
this application
15 Defog light output fault (overcurrent, short to ground) Not currently used for
this application
19 No data from control module No communication with
control module
76
Do not block the cab recirculation air filter.
NOTE: The area behind the seat must NOT be used

for storage. If the recirculation air filter is blocked it
will degrade HVAC performance.
371078A1
RH08A019
77
Right Panel
1. TRANSMISSION GEAR SHIFT LEVER - Use
th i s l eve r ( A ) t o s h i f t th e g e a rs i n t h e
transmission. The engine must be running to A
move the gear shift lever.
NEUTRAL - The NEUTRAL (N) position is

the center position. The GEAR SHIFT
HANDLE (B) can only be lifted when the gear
shift lever is in NEUTRAL.
B
To shift the Combine transmission into First
Gear (1) put the gear shift lever in the
NEUTRAL position and pull up on the GEAR
SHIFT HANDLE (B). Move the gear shift lever A24299
fully forward.
To shift the Combine transmission into

Second Gear (2) return the shift lever to the
NEUTRAL position, pull the gear shift lever
to the rear.
To shift the Combine transmission into Third 660L94

Gear (3) move the shift lever fully forward
from the NEUTRAL or the Second Gear
position.
NOTE: If the gear shift lever is moved into third gear,

the engine RPM may be reduced to limit the
Combine ground speed to 32.2 km/h (20 mph) or
40.2 km/h (25 mph) depending on country.
2. GEAR SHIFT HANDLE - used ONLY to shift into First Gear.
3. BEVERAGE HOLDER
6
4. DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR - This connector is
used by the dealer for troubleshooting or for
updating software in the electronic control
modules.
4
5. AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL OUTLET - This
cigar type outlet provides unswitched B+
for connection of a CB radio, FM radio, etc. 3
6. CAB AIR RECIRCULATION FILTER 5
RH08A018
78
Cab Right Window and Emergency Exit

The Right cab window can be opened to provide
ventilation and access to the Right service area
without dismounting from the Combine.
RP95J001
To open the window, pull the lever down and push
the window open. The lever can be placed over the
latch to provide additional ventilation or the window
can be opened completely for emergency exit and
to allow access to the Right service area.
RP95J002
79
Dome Lamps and Console Lamp

Dome Lamps
The dome lamps (1) are located in the right rear and 3
left rear of the cab headliner. Each lamp is controlled
by a three position switch (2). The three position
switch operates as follows:
● UP POSITION - The lamp will operate with the

door switch. The lamp will be ON when the cab
door is open and will be OFF when the cab door 2
is closed. 1
● CENTER POSITION - The lamp will be OFF.
A24361
● D OW N P O S I T IO N - T he l am p wi l l b e O N
continuously until the switch is moved to the
center (OFF) position or to the UP POSITION so
that it functions with the door.
NOTE: To prevent discharging the batteries put the

lamp switches in the up or center position when
leaving the cab.
Console Lamp
The console lamp (3) provides illumination of the

Right operator’s console. The lamp is activated with
the HEADLAMP and FLOODLAMP SWITCH.
Center Console
NOTE: The ash tray (1) and lighter (2) accessory 2
kit 434227A* is available from your dealer.
RD01F168
80
Cab Rear Window

The cab rear window can be opened for easy
cleaning and removal of debris.
1
To open the rear cab window turn the two quarter 1
turn latches (1) and pivot the window down. It is 2
recommended to open the window no more than 45
degrees (2) and hold window in that position until the
dust can be cleaned from the exterior surface of the
window. This position also helps keep material from
front of grain tank window falling into cab when
cleaning grain tank window.
It is also recommended that the rear window be

opened only with cab doors closed to prevent a RP96G002
cross draft from blowing dust into cab.
Air Flow Control Louvers
RH08A005
The cab air is discharged through eleven (11) vents located throughout the cab. The vents are adjustable up or
down, to the left or right, and can be closed to permit the operator to control the air flow in the direction desired.
81
Operator’s Seat
Your operator’s seat is equipped with controls to adjust the seat for your personal comfort. All controls are listed
here. Select the ones that apply to your specific seat.
A
1
6 3
5 4
RD07M086
1. LUMBAR ADJUSTER - Adjust the lumbar support for personal back comfort. Turn the knob
clockwise to increase support. Turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease support.
2. LEFT ARMREST - The armrest can be tilted up for easier access to the operator’s seat. The angle of the
armrest is also adjustable 23 degrees upward or 12 degrees downward from horizontal by turning the
adjustment knob (A).
3. BACKREST - To adjust the backrest, lift the control and tilt the backrest to the desired position.
Release the control to hold the backrest in the selected position.
4. FORE/AFT ISOLATOR - The seat can float a short distance forward or rearward when the isolator
lever is DOWN. With the isolator lever in the UP position, the seat does not float. The float
position absorb shocks and reduces operator fatigue when traveling over rough terrain.
5. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT KNOB - The seat can be raised or lowered by increasing or decreasing the
air pressure in the seat. Push the knob IN to increase air pressure and raise the seat. Pull the knob
OUT to decrease the air pressure and lower the seat. The key switch must be in the ON position to
raise the seat.
6. FORE/AFT - The operator’s seat can be adjusted forward or rearward. Pull UP on the lever and slide
the seat to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
82
7. SEAT HEATER CONTROL - This

i ll um i na te d mo m en ta r y swi tc h ,
located in the left armrest (2), has 7
three heating levels - high, medium
and low. Press the top of the switch
once to turn the heat on high. To
lower the heat level, depress the
switch a second or third time for
medium and low settings. To turn the
heat off, depress the switch a fourth 2
time and the lamp will go out.
A
RD00F055
Instructional Seat
WARNING: A frequent cause of death or serious injury is persons falling off machinery and being run over.
! Keep cab door closed. Instructional seat is used only for instructing or service diagnosing. DO NOT permit
others to ride, especially children. Seat belt must be worn at all times. M857
The instructional seat with seat belt provides seating

for an experienced operator when a new operator is
being trained on the operation of the machine. Refer
to Instructional Seat Safety in the Safety Section of
this manual for additional information.
NOTE: This seat is NOT intended as a passenger

seat or for use by children.
RD02E135
83
COMBINE ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

T h e fo l l o w i n g s h o w s t h e s t e p s fo r m a k i n g
adjustments and calibration using the Combine 1 2 3
Instrumentation. In each case use touch switches “5”
to increase and “8” to decrease the numerical values
or to cycle the options as needed. When making
adjustments always press the enter key (4) to save
the new settings.
4 5 6
The following touch switches are used in the
adjustment and calibration of the Combine:
1. Toggle tachometer between engine and cleaning
fan speed. 7 9
8
2. Alarm Off/Hours - Cancel alarms, display engine
and separator hours, adjust alarm volume and
display backlighting.
3. Toggle tachometer between ground and rotor 10 11 12
speed.
4. Enter - Select highlighted menu and save
changes.
5. Up Arrow - Increase highlighted item.
6. Cancel - Exits screen. Does not save changes. RD07G053
G e n e r a l n o t e s fo r n a v i g a t i n g t h e C o m b i n e
7. Service - Service hours. When pressed less than
instrumentation screens:
5 seconds after start up, it will access:
1. There are 2 types of highlighting.
● Combine setup
● Combine calibration ● Directly changeable items will be reverse
● Error history video when changeable.
● Troubleshooting
● Menu items for selection will be highlighted
8. Down Arrow - Decreases highlighted items. by a rectangle around the perimeter of the
physical section.
9. Grain Scan - Rotor loss sensitivity, sieve loss
sensitivity and seed size setting. 2. The key used to select a screen is also the key
used to scroll through the selectable items on a
10. Area Settings - Zero area counter, set Header
screen.
width, set area counter stop height (if no yield
monitor). 3. Data not present will be displayed as blank.
11. Combine Information - Concave, upper and lower
sieve position settings, total area, electrical
power and shaft speeds.
12. Header Settings - Height sensitivity, tilt sensitivity
and Header type setup.
NOTE: The Concave Setting, Sieve Setting and

Road Mode screens are displayed with switches on
the right hand console.
84
Monitor Screens
Harvest 1 Harvest 2 Road Mode
A E
B F
C G
D H
1 2 3
Concave Setting Screen Sieve Setting Screen Flex Pressure Setting Screen
I J
RD07G044/RH08A010/011/RH08A002
A. % ENGINE POWER E. % ENGINE POWER I. CONCAVE OPENING (IN MM)
B. ROTOR GRAIN LOSS F. TOTAL GRAIN LOSS J. UPPER SIEVE OPENING
C. SIEVE GRAIN LOSS G. HEADER LATERAL TILT K. LOWER SIEVE OPENING
D. TAILINGS VOLUME H. SPREADER DIRECTION (EUR ONLY)
1. Use the enter (1), Up/Down (2) or Cancel (3) to toggle between Harvest 1 and Harvest 2 screen.
2. The Road Mode screen is activated by the Road Mode switch on the Right Hand console.
3. The Spreader Position Setting Screen (H) will appear on the RCD anytime the Spreader Position Control
Switch is depressed. The screen will be displayed for 2.5 seconds after the switch is released. The direction
can be set from 0 to 15 to the left or to the right.
4. The Concave Setting Screen will appear on the RCD anytime the Concave Control Switch is depressed. The
screen will be displayed for 2.5 seconds after the switch is released.
5. The Upper (J) or Lower (K) Sieve Setting Screen will appear on the RCD anytime the Upper or Lower Sieve
Position Control Switch is depressed. The screen will be displayed for 2.5 seconds after the switch is released.
6. When a hydraulic Flex Header (North America Only) is attached and the Shift + Reel Raise or Reel Lower
button is pressed, the Flex Pressure Setting Screen will be displayed on the RDC for 2.5 seconds after the
button is released. Flex head pressure can be set from 0 to 250 bar (0 to 3625 psi).
85
Hours Screen
Hours Screen
B D
C E
1 2 3
RD07G046
A. ENGINE HOURS D. SPEAKER VOLUME

B. SEPARATOR HOURS E. BACKLIGHTING BRIGHTNESS
C. SEPARATOR TRIP HOURS
1. Use the Alarm Off/Hours key (1) to display the Hours screen.
2. Use the Up or Down keys (2) to adjust the highlighted item.
(C) The Separator Trip Hours is toggled between the current value and zero.
(D) The speaker volume setting range is 50 (quietest) to 100 (loudest) in increments of 5.
(E) The backlighting brightness (for the A-Post) setting range is 10 (least bright) t0 100 (brightest) in increments of 10.
3. Use the Alarm Off/Hours key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
4. Use the Enter key (3) to save changes and return to the monitor screen.
5. If there are no changes, the screen will return the monitor screen in 5 seconds.
NOTE: The display will toggle between screen sections C and D when the lamp switch is OFF. When the lamp
switch is ON, the display will toggle between screen sections C, D and E.
NOTE: To display Engine and Separator hours with the key switch in the OFF position, turn the Work Lamp switch
to the ON position.
86
Area Change Screen
Area Change Screen
1 2 3
RD07G047
A. ZERO AREA
B. HEADER WIDTH
C. AREA COUNTER OFF HEIGHT
1. Use the Area Settings key (1) to display the Area Change screen.
2. Use the Up or Down key (2) to adjust the highlighted item.
A. The area is toggled between current value and zero.
B. The Header width setting range is 12.0 to 50.0 feet (3.6 to 15.2 meters) in increments of 0.1.
C. The horizontal line is toggled between the current area counter off height and the current feeder position.
Raise or lower the feeder/Header to the height to turn off the area accumulation. Actuate the Up or Down
key to toggle the horizontal line to the feeder position.
3. Use the Area Setting key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
5. If there are no changes the screen will return to the monitor screen in 5 seconds.
87
Grain Scan Change Screen

Grain Scan Tailings Sensitivity
Change Screen Change Screen
A D
1 2 3
RD07G048
A. ROTOR LOSS SENSITIVITY C. SEED SIZE
B. SIEVE LOSS SENSITIVITY D. TAILINGS SENSITIVITY
1. Use the Grain Scan key (1) to display the Grain Scan Change screen.
2. Use the Up or Down key to adjust the highlighted item.
(A and B) The loss sensitivity setting range is 10 (least sensitive) to 99 (most sensitive) in increments of 1. After
adjusting other Combine settings and checking behind the Combine for acceptable losses, adjust the sensitivity to
indicate a loss up to the vertical line.
(C) The seed size setting range is from 1 (smallest) to 24 (largest) in increments of 1. Increase the seed size for
larger seeds to reduce the counting of weed seeds or immature seeds or dirt from downed crops.
(D) The tailings sensitivity range is from “0” to “4”. If “0” is selected, the alarm is disabled.
NOTE: Any adjustments take effect immediately. If the cancel key is used, any adjustments will be returned to the
original settings.
3. Use the GRAIN SCAN key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
88
Header Sensitivity Change Screen
Header Sensitivity Change Screen
1 2 3
RD07G049
A. HEIGHT SENSITIVITY C. TILT BALANCE (1000 AND 2200

SERIES HEADERS ONLY)
B. TILT SENSITIVITY D. HEADER TYPE MENU
1. Use the Header Settings key (1) to display the Header Sensitivity Change screen.
2. Use the Up or Down keys (2) to adjust the highlighted item.
(A and B) The height and tilt sensitivity setting range is 0 (least sensitive) to 250 (most sensitive) in
increments of 10.
(C) The tilt setting is only shown if a 1000 or 2200 Series Header is detected. The tilt balance setting range
is -95 to 95 in increments of 5. Decrease the value to lower the left end of the Header. Increase the value to
lower the right end of the Header.
NOTE: Any adjustments take effect immediately. If the cancel key is used, any adjustments will be returned to the
original settings.
3. Use the Header Settings key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
6. When the Header Type Menu (D) is highlighted, press the Enter key (#) to go to the Header Type screen. There
are four Header type screens, Auger Grain, Corn, Draper Grain and Pick Up. All Case IH Headers have a
Header type sensor and the screen associated with the Header connected will be displayed. The Header type
screen displayed cannot be changed.
7. If no Header is connected or a third party Header is connected, the Header type will be highlighted. Use the up
or down keys to select the Header type connected. This will be the default Header type whenever this condition
is present.
89
Header Type Screens

Grain Header Screen
Grain Header Screen
B B1 B2 B3
C C1 C2
D
C3
1 2 3
C4
RD07G052
A. HEADER TYPE A= AUGER, D=DRAPER C. REEL POSITION SENSOR
B. HEADER PLATFORM D. REEL DRIVE TYPE
1. Use the up and down keys (2) to adjust the highlighted item.
(B) The Grain Header platform type is flex (B1), rigid (B2) or hydraulic flex (B3).
(C) The reel position sensor configurations are sensors not installed (C1), vertical sensor installed (C2),
horizontal sensor installed (C3), and both sensors installed (C4).
(D) The reel drive type setting range for the Draper Grain Header is 4 to 7 and for the Auger Grain Header is
7 to 8. See the table for details.
HEADER TYPE DRIVE TYPE HEADER DESCRIPTION
DRAPER 4 2100 SERIES 19 TOOTH DRIVE SPROCKET
GRAIN 5 2100 SERIES 14 TOOTH DRIVE DPROCKET
6 17 TOOTH DRIVE SPROCKET OR 2042 (10 TOOTH SPROCKET)
7 11 TOOTH DRIVE SPROCKET
AUGER 7 ALL AUGER GRAIN HEADERS EXCEPT DRIVE TYPE 8
GRAIN 8 2030, 2040, 2050
NOTE: Selecting the right reel drive type optimizes the auto reel to ground speed control.
2. Use the Header Setting key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
3. Press the Enter key (3) to save settings and return to the Header sensitivity change screen.
90
Corn Header Screen
Corn Header Screen
B B1 B2
C
1 2 3
4
RD07G054
A. CORN HEADER C. HYDRAULIC STRIPPER PLATES
B. HEADER PLATFORM D. REEL DRIVE TYPE
1. Use the Up and Down key (2) to adjust the highlighted item.
(B) The corn Header platform type is folding (B1) or rigid (B2).
(C) Hydraulic stripper plates: O = not installed, 1 = installed.
(D) The reel drive type setting range for the corn Header is 0 to 3. See the table for details.
DRIVE TYPE HEADER DESCRIPTION
0 NOT INSTALLED OPTION
1 MEDIUM FLOW RATE REQUIRED PER MPH
2 HIGH FLOW RATE REQUIRED PER MPH
3 LOW FLOW RATE REQUIRED PER MPH
NOTE: Case IH does not sell a corn reel. To use auto reel to ground speed control and to optimize, start with drive
type 2. If the reel is to slow, reduce the flow requirement to drive type 1 then to drive type 3.
2. Press the Header Setting key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
91
Pick Up Head Screen
Pick Up Head Screen
1 2 3
4
RD07G054
A. PICK UP HEADER B. BELT DRIVE TYPE
1. Use the Up and Down key (2) to scroll to adjust the highlighted items.
(B) The belt drive type setting range for the pick up Header is 1 to 3. See the table for details.
DRIVE TYPE HEADER DESCRIPTION
1 ALL PICKUP HEADERS EXCEPT DRIVE TYPES 2 AND 3
2 16 FT RAKEUP
3 SWATHMASTER PRIOR TO S/N CAB010350 WITH 2.8 IN REEL DRIVE MOTOR
NOTE: Selecting the right belt drive type optimizes the auto belt to ground speed control.
2. Press the Header Setting key (1) to highlight the next changeable item.
92
Combine Info Screen

Combine Info Screen 1 Combine Info Screen 2
B E
C F
Combine Info Screen 3 Combine Info Screen 4

Shaft Speeds 1 Shaft Speeds 2
G K
H L
I M
4
RD07G056/092/092
A. CONCAVE POSITION H. BEATER/CHOPPER SPEED
B. UPPER SIEVE OPENING I. SIEVE SHAKER SPEED
C. LOWER SIEVE OPENING J. SPREADER SPEED
D. TOTAL AREA K. CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR SPEED
E. ELECTRICAL POWER L. TAILINGS ELEVATOR SPEED
F. FLEX PRESSURE M. CHAFF SPREADER SPEED
G. FEEDER SPEED (OPTIONAL)
1. Press the Combine Info key (1) to enter the Combine Info screen.
2. Use the Combine Info key (1) to scroll between screens.
3. If there is no activity for 5 seconds for Info Screen 1 and 2, the screen will return to the monitor screen.
4. The Cancel or Enter key must be pressed for Info Screen 3 and 4 in order to return to the monitor screen.
NOTE: Items (B) and (C) are only displayed if installed. Item (F) is only displayed if an Auger Grain Header is
detected and the platform type is hydraulic flex.
NOTE: If the feeder has a rock trap, the feeder speed (G) shown is the rock trap beater shaft speed. Divide feeder
speed (G) shown by 1.3 to determine the conveyer shaft speed. If a beater speed up kit has been installed, divide
feeder speed shown by 1.94 to determine the conveyer shaft speed.
93
Service Reminder Screen
Service Reminder Screens
A
D
B
C E G
B F H
1 2 3
4
RD07G057/RD07M094
A. COOLANT FILTER CHANGE INTERVAL HOURS E. GEAR CASE FLUID CHANGE INTERVAL HOURS
B. HOURS TO NEXT SERVICE F. ENGINE FUEL FILTER INTERVAL HOURS
C. ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CHANGE G. HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTER CHANGE INTERVAL HOURS
D. PTO FLUID CHANGE INTERVAL HOURS H. COOLANT AND CONDITIONER CHANGE INTERVAL HOURS
1. Press the Service key (1) to enter the first Service screen.
2. Use the Up or Down key (2) to reset the Hours To Next Service to match the Interval Hours.
3. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the following Hours To Next Service and the following Service screens.
5. If there are no changes for 5 seconds, the screen will return to the monitor screen.
94
Enter/Cancel Screen
The Enter/Cancel Screen is displayed when the
current screen displayed has data that has been
changed and a keypad button has been pressed
(other than Enter or Cancel) that would display a new A
screen.
This screen asks the operator if he wants to keep or
cancel the change made in the last screen.
Depress the Enter key to save changes made to any B
values on the previous screen. The Enter/Cancel
screen will then be replaced with the pending screen.
If the Cancel key is depressed, the changes made to
any values on the previous screen WILL NOT be C
saved and the Enter/Cancel screen will be replaced
with the pending screen.
There is no time out for this screen. The operator
must select Enter or Cancel to exit.
RD07J007
A. ENTER ICON C. CANCEL ICON

B. FLASHING QUESTION
MARK ICON
95
Selection Menu Screen

The Selection Menu Screen is used to access the
Set Up Menu (A), Calibration Menu (B), Diagnostic
Menu (C) and Revision Level Menu (D).
A
To access the Selection Menu Screen, press the
Service key (1) within 5 seconds after start up. Use
the Service key (1) to scroll through the screen
sections. When your desired section is hightlighted,
press the Enter key (2) to go to the selected screen. B
1 2
RD07G058
96
Set Up Menu Screens

Set Up Alarm Screen
Selection Menu Screen Set Up Menu Screen Set Up Alarm Screen
A B C
1 2 3
RD07G058/059/060/061
✔
A. SET UP MENU D. LOW ENGINE SPEED ALARM

B. SET UP ALARM MENU E. ROTOR SPEED ALARM SENSITIVITY
C. GRAIN TANK FULL ALARM F. LOW FUEL ALARM
1. With the Set Up Menu highlighted, press the Enter key (2) to go to the Set Up Menu screen.
2. With the Set Up Alarm Menu (B) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) again to go to the Set Up Alarm screen.
3. Use the Service key (1) to scroll through the screen sections.
4. When the desired screen section is highlighted, use the Up or Down keys to adjust the highlighted items.
Alarm Screen Settings:
C. Grain Tank Full Alarm - Setting options are 0x, 1x or 30s. 1x is the default setting. If 0x is selected, the 3/4 and
full audible alarms are disabled. If 1x is selected, the chime will sound when the grain tank is 3/4 full and the
high tone will sound when full. If 30s is selected, the high tone will sound every 30 seconds when the grain tank
is full and the feeder is engaged..
D. Low Engine Speed Alarm - The setting range is from 2100 to 2340 RPM in steps of 10.
E. Rotor Speed Alarm Sensitivity - The range is from 75 to 100 in steps of 5.
F. Low Fuel - The selectable percentages are shown in the table below. If 0% is selected, the alarm is disabled.
Reference Number and %
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0% 6% 13% 19% 25% 31% 38%
5. Use the Enter key (3) to save changes and return to the Selection Menu screen.
97
Set Up Type Screen (1)
Selection Menu Screen Set Up Menu Screen Set Up Type Screen 1
C
A
B D
1 2 3
Set Up Type Screen 2 & 3
RD07G058/059/060/062
✔
A. SET UP MENU D. TIRE RADIUS

B. SET UP TYPE MENU E. UPPER SIEVE SIZE
C. GROUND SPEED UNITS F. LOWER SIEVE SIZE
1. With the Set Up Menu (A) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) to go to the Set Up Menu screen.
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight to the Set Up Type menu (B).
3. Press the Enter key (2) to go to the Set Up Type screen.
4. Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the sections and to scroll to Set Up Type screen 2 and 3.
Set Up Type Settings:
C. Ground Speed - If AFS is not connected, the options for ground speed units are mph or km/h. If AFS is PRO 600
display is connected, the ground speed units are not selectable. The units come from the AFS display.
D. Tire Size - If the ground speed units are in mph, the tire size range is 11.1 to 40.0 by 0.1 inch increments.
If the ground speed units are in km/h, the tire size range is 28.2 to 101.6 by 0.1 cm increments.
NOTE: See Tire Radius Chart at the end of this section for tire size information.
NOTE: If the ground speed units are changed, the tire size will change automatically. If AFS PRO 600 display is
connected, tire size is not selectable. Tire size comes from the AFS display using the distance calibration.
E. Upper Sieve Size - The setting options are “0”, “1 1/8” and “1 5/8” inch.
F. Lower Sieve Size - The setting options are “0”, “1 1/8” and “1 5/8” inch.
98
Set Up Type Screen (2 and 3)
Set Up Type Screen 2 Set Up Type Screen 3
G K*
H* L*
I*
M*
J*
1 2 3
Set Up Type Screen 3
RD07G063/064
✔
G. HEADER LIFT CYLINDER SIZE K. *FUEL TANK SIZE

H. *COMBINE MODEL YEAR L. *GROUND SPEED LIMIT
I. *LIGHTING M. *TRANSMISSION TYPE
J. *ENGINE RATING
NOTE: Items with an asterisk (*) are factory settings and not changeable by the operator.
1. Press the Service key (1) to scroll to the desired section.
2. When the desired screen section is highlighted, use the Up/Down keys to adjust the highlighted items.
Set Up Type Settings:
G. Header Lift Cylinder Size - The setting options are 63 or 75 mm (2 1/2 or 3 inch).
99
Service Set Up Screen (1)
NOTE: These screens are used if the operator wishes to perform service more frequently (decrease hours) than
the maximum (factory set) service hours.
Selection Menu Screen Set Up Menu Screen Service Set Up Screen 1
B
E
1 2 3
Service Set Up Screen 2
RD07G058/059/060/065
✔
A. SET UP MENU D. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

B. SET UP SERVICE MENU E. PTO FLUID
C. COOLANT FILTER F. GEAR CASE OIL
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight to the Set Up Service menu (B).
3. Press the Enter key (2) to go to the Set Up Service screen 1.
4. Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the sections and to scroll to Set Up Service screen 2.
Set Up Service Settings:
C. Coolant Filter, (D) Engine Oil and Oil Filter - Hours can be changed in increments of 50, from a minimum of 50 to
a maximum of 300 hours.
E. PTO Fluid, (F) Gear Case Oil - Hours can be changed in increments of 50, from a minimum of 50 to a maximum
of 600 hours.
100
Service Set Up Screen (2)
Service Set Up Screen 2
1 2 3
RD07G066
✔
G. FUEL FILTER I. COOLANT AND CONDITIONER

H. HYDRAULIC OIL AND FILTER
1. Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the sections and to scroll to Set Up Service screen 2.
Set Up Service Settings:
(G) Fuel Filter - Hours can be changed in increments of 50, from a minimum of 50 to a maximum of 600 hours.
(H) Hydraulic Oil and Oil Filter - Hours can be changed in increments of 50, from a minimum of 50 to a maximum of
1200 hours.
(I) Coolant and Coolant Conditioner - Hours can be changed in increments of 50, from a minimum of 50 to a
maximum of 1800 hours.
101
Set Up Configuration Screens
Selection Menu Screen Set Up Menu Screen Set Up Configuration Screen 1
C
A
B F
1 2 3
Service Set Up Screen 2 & 3
RD07G058/059/060/067
✔
A. SET UP MENU D. AUTO FEEDER CUTOFF CONTROL

B. SET UP CONFIGURATION MENU E. AUTO SEPARATOR CUTOFF CONTROL
C. SPREADER ALARM F. HEADER FLOAT INSTALL
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the Set Up Configuration menu (B).
3. Press the Enter key (2) to go to the Set Up Configuration screen (1).
4. Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the sections and to scroll to Set Up Configuration Screen 2 and 3.
5. When the desired screen section is highlighted, use the Up or Down keys (3) to adjust the highlighted items.
O = Disabled, I = Enabled sections (C), (D) and (E).
O = Not Installed, I = Installed for section (F).
102
Set Up Configuration Screens (2 and 3)
Set Up Configuration Screen 2 Set Up Configuration Screen 3
G J*
H K*
1 2 3
RD07G068/069
✔
G. HEADER TILT INSTALL J. *OLD ENGINE HOURS

H. ELECTRIC SIEVE INSTALL K. *OLD SEPARATOR HOURS
I. SPREADER CONTROL INSTALL
NOTE: Items with an asterisk (*) are not changeable.

6. When the desired screen section is highlighted, use the Up or Down keys (3) to adjust the highlighted items.
O = Not Installed, I = Installed for section (G), (H) and (I).
7. (J) and (K): Old hours are used when the A-Post needs to be replaced to maintain the actual hours for the
Combine.
103
Calibration Menu Screen 1
Concave Cal Screen
Selection Menu Screen Concave Cal Screen

Cal Menu Screen 1
A C
1 2
RD07G058/070/071/RH08A012
✔
A. CAL MENU C. ZERO CONCAVE

B. CONCAVE CAL MENU D. ENTER
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) and then press the Enter key (2) to go Cal Menu Screen
1.
2. With the Concave Cal Menu (B) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) again to go to the Concave Cal Screen.
3. Step 1 (C), zero the concave by using the concave switch on the right hand console to fully close the concave.
NOTE: If the right arrow momentarily flashes for about 4 seconds, the concave is in a range that can be calibrated,
but this does not mean the concave is closed. If the concave is calibrated with the concave not closed, the
displayed value will be wrong. If the right arrow is continuously flashing, the concave is not within range and if
calibration is attempted, the cal abort screen A205 will be displayed.
4. Step 2 (D), press the Enter key (2) to calibrate. When the calibration is complete, the display will return to the
Cal Menu Screen.
104
Tailings Volume Cal Screen
Selection Menu Screen Cal Menu Screen 1 Tailings Volume Cal Screen
A B
C
1 2
RD07G058/070/072/RH08A012
✔
A. CAL MENU C. ZERO TAILINGS VOLUME

B. TAILINGS VOLUME CAL MENU D. ENTER
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) and then press the Enter key (2) to go to Cal Menu
Screen 1.
2. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Tailings Volume Cal Menu (B) and then press the Enter key (2) to go to
the Tailings Cal Screen.
3. Step 1 (C), before starting calibration, be sure that the tailings auger where it feeds the tailings elevator is
empty of grain and material other than grain (MOG).
NOTE: If the tailings auger is not cleared of all grain and MOG and the calibration is attempted, the cal abort
screen A026 will be displayed.
4. Step 2 (D), press the Enter key (2) to start calibration. When the calibration is complete, the display will return
to Cal Menu Screen 1.
105
Header Cal Screens
Selection Menu Screen Cal Menu Screen 1 Press Header Up Screen
A C
1 2 3
RD07G058/070/072/RH08A012
✔
A. CAL MENU D. STEP 1 WORKING

B. HEADER HEIGHT CAL MENU E. PRESS HEADER UP
C. PRESS HEADER UP F. STEP 2 WORKING
NOTE: It is recommended that Header calibration be done without a Header installed as the full range of feeder
travel needs to be measured. Since the feeder range goes below ground level, the Combine must be positioned
over a depression at least 300 mm (11.8 in) lower than the tire ground level.
NOTE: To perform calibration, the feeder drive must be OFF and the Combine must not be moving.
NOTE: The feeder will automatically move during this procedure.

1. Use the Service key (1) to go highlight the Cal Menu (A) and then press the Enter key (2) to go to Cal Menu
Screen1.
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the Header Height Cal Menu (B).
3. Press the Enter key (2) to go to the Press Header Up screen (C).
4. Press the Raise button on the propulsion lever for 2 seconds to start the calibration process.
106
Header Cal Screens (continued)
Step 1 Working Screen Press Header Up Screen Step 2 Working Screen
D E F
RD07G075/074/077
5. The Step 1 Working screen (D) will be displayed. The feeder will automatically lower (slow controlled lower if
not already fully down) to the full down position. The feeder position sensor value will be saved and the feeder
will then raise slightly to calculate the raise current threshold. This value will also be saved.
6. The Press Header Up screen (E) will be displayed. Press the Header Raise button on the propulsion lever for 2
seconds.
7. The Step 2 Working screen (F) will now be displayed. The feeder will automatically raise (slow controlled raise)
to the full up position. The feeder position sensor value will be saved and the feeder will be lowered slightly to
calculate the lower current threshold. This value will also be saved. This completes the calibration. The screen
will return to the Cal Menu Screen 1.
NOTE: If the Raise, Lower, Left or Right Tilt button is pressed during any time the height system is automatically
raising or lowering the feeder, or the Cancel key (3) is pressed, the height system stops any feeder movement and
exits the calibration. The operator stop abort screen A000 will be displayed.
107
Header Tilt Cal Screens
Selection Menu Screen Cal Menu Screen 1 Header Tilt Cal Screen
C
A
1 2
RD07G058/070/073/RD07M099
✔
A. CAL MENU C. LEVEL HEADER

B. HEADER TILT CAL MENU D. ENTER
NOTE: It is recommended that calibration be done without a Header installed. It may be easier to check the level
with a Header attached, AND then remove the Header before starting calibration.
NOTE: The Combine must be parked on near level ground. A level may be required. If a Header is attached, the
feeder must be raised high enough so that the full tilt range of the feeder faceplate can be measured.
NOTE: To perform calibration, the feeder drive must be OFF and the Combine must not be moving.
NOTE: The feeder faceplate and Header (if attached) will automatically move during this procedure.
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu, and then press the Enter key (2) to go to the Cal Menu
Screen 1.
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the Header Tilt Cal Menu (B).
3. Press the Enter key (2) to go to the Header Tilt Cal screen.
4. Step 1 (C), before starting the calibration, level the feeder face plate (or header if attached).
5. Step 2 (D), press the Enter key (2) to confirm the feeder face plate is level and to display the Press Header Up
screen (E).
108
Header Tilt Cal Screens (continued)
Press Header Up Step 1 Working Screen
E F
Step 2 Working Screen Press Header Up
H G
3
RD07G075/074/077/RD07M098
✔
E. PRESS HEADER UP G. PRESS HEADER UP

F. STEP 1 WORKING H. STEP 2 WORKING
6. When the Press Header Up screen (E) is displayed, press the Raise button on the propulsion lever for 2
seconds to start the calibration process.
7. The Step 1 Working screen (F) will be displayed. The tilt system will measure and save the feeder faceplate
centered position. Next, the feeder faceplate will tilt to the left to the full tilted position and save this feeder
faceplate sensor position value. Then the feeder will be tilted right slightly to calculate the tilt right current
threshold and save this value.
8. The Press Header Up screen (G) will be displayed. Press the Header Raise button on the propulsion lever for 2
seconds.
9. The Step 2 Working screen (H) will now be displayed. The feeder will tilt to the right to the full tilted position and
save this feeder faceplate sensor position value. The feeder will then be tilted left slightly to calculate the tilt left
current threshold and save this value. This completes the calibration. The screen will return to the Cal Menu
Screen 1.
NOTE: If the Raise, Lower, Left or Right Tilt button is pressed during any time the height system is automatically
tilting the feeder or the Cancel key (3) is pressed, the tilt system stops any feeder face plate movement and exits
the calibration. The operator stop abort screen A000 will be displayed.
109
Calibration Menu Screen 2

Upper Sieve Cal Screen
Selection Menu Screen Cal Menu Screen 1

Cal Menu Screen 2
B
Step 1 Working Screen Upper Sieve Cal Screen
C
1 2 3 F
E
RD07G058/070/078/079/080/061/RD07M098/099
✔
A. CAL MENU D. OPEN UPPER SIEVE 1/4 IN (6MM)

B. UPPER SIEVE CAL MENU E. ENTER
C. CLOSE UPPER SIEVE F. STEP 1 WORKING
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) on the Selection Menu screen and then press the Enter
key (2) to go to Cal Menu Screen 1. Use the Service key (1) and scroll through Cal Menu Screen 1 to Cal Menu
Screen 2.
2. With the Upper Sieve Cal Menu (B) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) to go to the Upper Sieve Cal Screen.
3. Outside the Combine, turn on the sieve lamp and open the access doors below the remote sieve switches at
the left rear of the Combine.
4. Step 1 (C), use the rear switches for the upper sieve to fully close the upper sieve.
5. Step 2 (D), use the rear switches to open the upper sieve to 6 mm (1/4 inch). If opened beyond 6 mm, do not
close to 6 mm. Go back to Step 1 (C).
NOTE: An easy way to determine when the sieves are open the correct amount is to use a 1/4 inch bolt and open
the sieve until the bolt slides between the fingers.
6. Step 3 (E), press the Enter key (2) to start the calibration process. The Step 1 Working Screen will be displayed
during calibration. The 6 mm, the fully closed and the fully open position sensor values will be determined and
saved. The sieves will then be opened to 10 mm and the calibration will be completed and the screen will return
7. If the Cancel key (3) is pressed at any time, the calibration will stop and the calibration will be exited. The
operator stop abort screen A000 will be displayed.
110
Lower Sieve Cal Screen
Selection Menu Screen Cal Menu Screen 1 Cal Menu Screen 2
A B
Step 1 Working Screen Lower Sieve Cal Screen
C
F
1 2 3
D
E
RD07G058/070/078/081/080/RD07M098/099
✔
A. CAL MENU D. OPEN LOWER SIEVE 1/4 IN (6MM)

B. LOWER SIEVE CAL MENU E. ENTER
C. CLOSE LOWER SIEVE F. STEP 1 WORKING
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) on the Selection Menu screen and then press the Enter
key (2) to go to Cal Menu Screen 1. Use the Service key (1) and scroll through Cal Menu Screen 1 to Cal Menu
Screen 2.
2. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Lower Sieve Cal Menu (B) and then press the Enter key (2) to go to the
Lower Sieve Cal Screen.
3. Outside the Combine, turn on the sieve lamp and open the access doors below the remote sieve switches at
the left rear of the Combine.
4. Step 1 (C), use the rear switches for the lower sieve to fully close the lower sieve.
5. Step 2 (D), use the rear switches to open the lower sieve to 6 mm (1/4 inch). If opened beyond 6 mm, do not
close to 6 mm. Go back to Step 1 (C).
NOTE: An easy way to determine when the sieves are open the correct amount is to use a 1/4 inch bolt and open
the sieve until the bolt slides between the fingers.
6. Step 3 (E), press the Enter key (2) to start the calibration process. The Step 1 Working Screen will be displayed
during calibration. The 6 mm, the fully closed and the fully open position sensor values will be determined and
saved. The sieves will then be opened to 10 mm and the calibration will be completed and the screen will return
7. If the Cancel key (3) is pressed at any time, the calibration will stop and the calibration will be exited. The
operator stop abort screen A000 will be displayed.
111
Spreader Position Cal Screen
Spreader Position
Cal Screen
C
1 2 3 4
D
RD07G058R/070/RD08D315/316/RD07M099/RH08A001/RD07M098
✔
A. CAL MENU C. SPREADER POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE E. ENTER

B. SPREADER POSITION CAL MENU D. CENTER SPREADER POSITION
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) on Selection Menu screen and then press the Enter key
(2) to go to Cal Menu Screen 1. Use the Service key (1) and scroll through Cal Menu 1 to Cal Menu 2.
2. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Spreader Position Cal Menu (B) and then press Enter key (2) to go to
the Spreader Position Cal Screen.
3. Use the Spreader Direction Control switch to move the spreader to the full right position. Note the Spreader
Position Sensor voltage (C).
NOTE: There is thermal protection in the spreader actuator. If the actuator is powered when it is at its limits (or
obstructed) for about 3 seconds or more, the thermal protection will activate. It will be several seconds before the
thermal protection resets and the actuator can be adjusted.
4. Use the Spreader Direction Control switch to move the spreader to the full left position. Note the Spreader
Position Sensor voltage (C).
5. Use the Spreader Direction Control switch to adjust the spreaders until the voltage (C) is midway between the
voltages noted in 3 and 4 (D).
NOTE: This may not exactly center the spreaders. Physically look at the spreaders to determine if the adjustment
is adequate. If not, adjust as required.
6. Press the Enter key (2) as shown in (E). This completes the calibration. The screen will return to Cal Menu
Screen 1.
112
Reel Drive Cal Screen
Reel Drive Cal Screen
C
1 2 3 4 D
RD07G058R/070/078/082/RD07M099/RH08A001/RD07M098
✔
A. CAL MENU C. REEL DRIVE CAL VALUE SETTINGS E. REEL TURNING - ENTER
B. REEL DRIVE CAL MENU D. REEL NOT TURNING - UP
NOTE: Reel Drive calibration can be performed only if 1. the engine is running, 2. the feeder drive is OFF, 3. the
Combine is not moving. A Header with a reel needs to be connected to the Combine to perform the calibration
effectively
NOTE: Reel drive cal is only required once. The reel drive valve is part of the Combine, not the Header, therefore
changing the Header type does not require a new reel drive calibration.
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Cal Menu (A) on Selection Menu screen and then press the Enter key
(2) to go to Cal Menu Screen 1. Use the Service key (1) and scroll through Cal Menu 1 to Cal Menu 2.
2. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Reel Drive Cal Menu (B) and then press Enter key (2) to go to the Reel
Drive Cal Screen.
3. Reel Drive Calibration Value (C) initially shows the previous cal. The range is 0 to 4. If the reel drive has not
been calibrated, the default is 2.
NOTE: The reel will automatically rotate during calibration.
4. To start the calibration, press the Up key (3) as shown in (D). The Reel Drive Calibration Value (C) will change
from the previous cal default value to “0”.
NOTE: The Enter key will be ignored until the Up key (3) has been actuated at least once.
5. If the reel is not turning, or turning intermittently, press the Up key (3) to increment the Reel Drive Calibration
Value (C).
6. When the reel is turning steadily, press the Enter key (2) as shown in (E). This completes the calibration and
the screen will return to Cal Menu Screen 1.
7. If the Cancel key (4) is pressed at any time, the reel drive system stops any reel movement and exits
calibration. The operator stop abort screen A000 will be displayed. If the Up key (3) is pressed when the Reel
Drive Calibration Value (C) is 4, the operator stop abort screen A000 will also be displayed.
113
Diagnostic Menu Screens

Diagnostic Menu Screen/Error History Menu Screen
Selection Menu Screen Diagnostic Menu Screen
1 2 3
No Error History Screen Error History Menu Screen Error History Screen
C F
D G
K
L H I
E
RD07G058R/083/084/085/086/RD07M098/099
✔
A. DIAGNOSTIC MENU E. ENGINE HISTORY MENU I. ERROR IS: 1=ACTIVE, 0=INACTIVE

B. ERROR HISTORY MENU F. ERROR NUMBER J. TROUBLESHOOTING SCREEN LINK
C. A- POST HISTORY MENU G. ENGINE HOURS OF LAST OCCURRENCE K. SOURCE SELECTED
D. CXCM ERROR HISTORY MENU H. NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES L. NO ERROR HISTORY
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Diagnostic Menu (A) on the Selection Menu screen and then press the
Enter key (2) to go to the Diagnostic Menu Screen.
2. With the Error History Menu (B) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) to go to the Error History Menu Screen.
3. With the A-Post Error History Menu (C) highlighted or use the Service key (1) to highlight the CXCM Error
History Menu (D) or the Engine Error History Menu (E) and then press the Enter key (2) to view the Error
History Screen for the highlighted menu.
4. The Error History screen shows various information (F) for each error that has occurred. Use the Service key
(1) to view the next error and subsequent errors that have occurred.
5. If troubleshooting exists for the displayed error history, a Troubleshooting Screen Link (J) will be displayed and
highlighted. Press the Enter key (2) to view the troubleshooting screen.Pressing the Enter key (2) again or the
Cancel key (3) will return to the error history screen.
6. Using the Cancel key (3) while the error history screen is displayed will return the display to the Diagnostic
menu screen.
7. If no errors are present for the menu item on the Error History screen, the No Error History screen will be
displayed with the selection (C-E) displayed at location (K). Using the Enter key (2) or Cancel key (3) will return
the display to the Diagnostic menu screen.
114
Erase Error History Screen
Error History Menu Screen Erase Error History Screen
E
A
1 2 3
RD07G084/087/RD07M098/099
✔
A. ERASE ERROR HISTORY D. ERASE ENGINE ERROR HISTORY

B. ERASE A-POST ERROR HISTORY E. ABOVE SELECTED ITEM REPEATED
C. ERASE CXCM ERROR HISTORY HERE AND FLASHING TO CONFIRM
1. While in the Error History Menu Screen, use the Service key (1) to highlight the Erase Error History Menu (A)
and press the Enter key (2).
2. The Erase Error History Screen will be displayed. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the item to erase error
history from.
3. Press the Enter key (2). The selected item will be displayed flashing in screen section (E).
4. Press the Enter key (2) again to confirm deletion.
5. Section (E) will return to blank and section (B) will be hightlighted. Another section may be chosen to erase or
the Cancel key (3) can be pressed to return to the Diagnostic Menu Screen.
115
Troubleshooting Menu Screen
Selection Menu Screen Diagnostic Menu Screen Troubleshooting Menu Screen
B D
A
E
1 2
RD07G058/083/088/061
✔
A. DIAGNOSTIC MENU D. HEADER AND REEL TROUBLESHOOTING MENU

B. TROUBLESHOOTING MENU E. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING MENU
C. COMBINE TROUBLESHOOTING MENU
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Diagnostic Menu (A) on the Selection Menu screen and then press the
Enter key (2) to go to the Diagnostic Menu Screen.
2. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the Troubleshoot Menu (B) and then press the Enter key (2) to go to the
Troubleshooting Menu Screen.
116
Troubleshoot Combine Menu Screen
Troubleshoot Combine Troubleshoot Submenu Screen

Troubleshooting Menu Screen Menu Screen (1 of up to 5)
A B
F
G
C
H
D
I
E
Troubleshooting Screen (Example)
1 2 3 K
RD07G088/089/093/098/RD07M099/098
✔
A. COMBINE TROUBLESHOOTING MENU E. VOLTAGE MENU I. SUB MENU ITEM 4

B. COMBINE MENU F. SUB MENU ITEM 1 J. ITEM TO TROUBLESHOOT (SHOWN:
CONCAVE POSITION SENSOR)
C. SIEVE AND UNLOADER MENU G. SUB MENU ITEM 2 K. ERROR NUMBER
D. LIGHTING MENU H. SUB MENU ITEM 3 L. UNIT OF MEASURE
1. With Combine Troubleshooting Menu (A) highlighted, press the Enter key (2) to go to the Troubleshooting
Combine Menu Screen.
2. When in the Troubleshooting Combine Menu Screen, press the Service key (1) to highlight the menu item (B,
C, D, E) of the area to troubleshoot and then press the Enter key (2).
3. When any of the menus in the Troubleshoot Combine Menu screen (B, C, D, E) are chosen, the Troubleshoot
Submenu Screen 1 will be displayed with 4 troubleshooting icons. Each icon associated with an error code
number (reference the Error Code Table for associations). Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the
Submenu Screens. There are up to 5 submenu screens of icons. When all the screens have been scrolled
through the loop will start over again.
4. When the icon of interest is found, press the Enter key (2) and the Troubleshooting Screen for that icon code
will be displayed.
5. Pressing the Cancel key (3) returns to the Troubleshooting Menu Screen.
117
Troubleshoot Header Menu Screen
Troubleshoot Header Troubleshoot Submenu Screen

Troubleshooting Menu Screen Menu Screen (1 of up to 5)
B
E
A C F
D G
Troubleshooting Screen (Example)
1 2 3 J
RD07G088/096/093/094/RD07M099/098
✔
A. HEADER TROUBLESHOOTING MENU E. SUB MENU ITEM 1 I. ITEM TO TROUBLESHOOT (SHOWN: REEL
DRIVE)
B. HEADER HEIGHT MENU F. SUB MENU ITEM 2 J. ERROR NUMBER
C. HEADER TILT MENU G. SUB MENU ITEM 3 K. UNIT OF MEASURE*
D. REEL MENU H. SUB MENU ITEM 4
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Header Troubleshooting Menu (A) and then press the Enter key (2) to
go to the Troubleshoot Header Menu Screen.
2. When in the Troubleshoot Header Menu Screen, press the Service key (1) to highlight the menu item (B, C, D)
of the area to troubleshoot and then press the Enter key (2).
3. When any of the menus in the Troubleshoot Header Menu (B, C, D) are chosen, the Troubleshoot Submenu
Screen 1 will be displayed with 4 troubleshooting icons. Each icon associated with an error code number
(reference the Error Code Table for associations). Press the Service key (1) to scroll through the Submenu
Screens. There are up to 5 submenu screens of icons. When all the screens and icons have been scrolled
through the loop will start over again.
4. When the icon of interest is found, press the Enter key (2) and the Troubleshooting Screen for that icon code
will be displayed.
118
Troubleshoot Engine Items Screen
Troubleshooting Menu Screen Troubleshoot Submenu Screen Troubleshooting Screen (Example)

(1 of 2)
B F
C G
A
D H
1 2 3
RD07G088/096/093/097/RD07M099/098
✔
A. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING MENU E. SUB MENU ITEM 4

B. SUB MENU ITEM 1 F. ITEM TO TROUBLESHOOT (SHOWN:ENGINE THROTTLE)
C. SUB MENU ITEM 2 G. ERROR NUMBER
D. SUB MENU ITEM 3 H. UNIT OF MEASURE
1. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the Engine Troubleshooting Menu (A) and then press the Enter key (2) to
go to Troubleshoot Submenu Screen 1.
2. Troubleshoot Submenu Screen 1 will be displayed with 4 troubleshooting icons. Each icon is associated with an
error code number (reference the Error Code Table for associations). Press the Service key (1) to scroll
through the Submenu Screens. There are 2 submenu screens of icons. When all the screens and icons have
been scrolled through the loop will start over again.
3. When the icon of interest is found, press the Enter key (2) and the Troubleshooting Screen for that icon will be
displayed.
119
Revision Level Menu Screen
Selection Menu Screen Revision Level Menu Screen A-Post SW Rev Level Screen
B E
F
C
D G
Engine Cal Rev Level Screen CXCM SW Rev Level Screen
E E
F F
1 2
G G
3
H
RD07G058R/099/100/0061
✔
A. REVISION LEVEL MENU E. DEVICE SELECTED

B. A-POST MONITOR REVISION MENU F. REVISION NUMBER
C. CXCM CONTROLLER REVISION MENU G. REVISION NUMBER
D. ENGINE CONTROLLER REVISION MENU H. REVISION NUMBER
1. Press the Service key (1) to highlight the Revision Level Menu (A) in the Selection Menu Screen and then
press the Enter key (2) to go to the Revision Level Menu Screen.
2. Use the Service key (1) to highlight the section of interest and then press the Enter key (2)
3. The Software or Calibration Revision Level Screen will now be displayed.
4. Press the Enter key (2) or Cancel key (3) to return to the Selection Menu Screen.
120
Alarm/Abort Screens
The Alarm Screen is displayed and the chime will
sound during nor mal operation when a system
become disabled or the set parameters change, and
the operator tries to use that system. A
The Abort Screen will only display during calibration
if something prevents the calibration from initiating
(conditions for calibration are not met) or completing
(sensor value not valid or operator canceled). B
Alarm Screens have priority over abort screens.
Press the Alarm Off/Hours key (1) to remove the
alarm from the screen.
Press the Alarm Off/Hours key (1) to remove an C
Abort Screen and return to the Cal Menu 1 screen.
RD07J004
A. ALARM INDICATOR C. ALARM DESCRIPTION

CONTINUED (SHOWN:
CALIBRATE GROUND
HEIGHT-RAISE HEADER)
B. ALARM DESCRIPTION D. ALARM NUMBER
(SHOWN: CALIBRATE
GROUND HEIGHT-
LOWER HEADER AND
HOLD FOR 2 SECONDS)
121
Error Screen
The Error Screen can be displayed when no other
high priority screen is being displayed and the A-post
controller determines an error exists or a CAN
message is received containing error data. The
chime will also sound except for error E 55,E 56, E
A
72 and E 73.
Section (C) is the error code. The error code contains
the Suspect Parameter Number (SPN) in the NNNN
portion of the number, and the Failure Mode Indicator
B
(FMI) in the .NN portion.
If troubleshooting is available for the specific SPN
part of the error code displayed, section (D) will
display the highlighted link. If troubleshooting is not C
available, section (D) will be blank.
Press the Enter key (2) to go to the troubleshooting
screen for the displayed error code.
To remove the error screen, press the Alarm Off/Hour
key (1). If multiple error screens are present, the D
Alarm Off/Hours key (1) must be depressed for each
screen to be removed. When all the screens are
removed, the display will return to the Monitor Screen
or to the screen that was being displayed before the
Error Screen was displayed. 1 2
FMI DESCRIPTION
0 Valid above normal-most severe level
1 Valid below normal-most severe level RD07G095
2 Data incorrect A. ERROR INDICATOR C. ERROR CODE
3 Voltage above normal or shorted to high B. ERROR DESCRIPTION D. TROUBLESHOOT ERROR
source (SHOWN: LEFT GROUND
HEIGHT/TILT SENSOR)
4 Voltage below normal or shorted to low
source
5 Current below normal or open circuit
6 Current above normal or grounded circuit
7 Mechanical out of range
8 Abnormal pulse rate
9 Abnormal update rate
10 Abnormal rate of change
11 Root cause not known
12 Bad intelligent device
13 Needs calibration
14 Special instructions
15 Valid above normal-least sever level
16 Valid above normal-moderately sever level
17 Valid below normal-least sever level
18 Valid below normal-moderately sever level
19 Received data in error
20-30 Not used
31 Not available or condition exists
122
ERROR, ALARM AND ABORT CODE TABLES
CXCM Error Codes

Error No. Description Indicator/ Display Icon
Troubleshoot Menu
E1 Feeder Position Angle Header/Header
Sensor
E2 Header Lift Press. Sensor Header/Header
E3 Right Header/Tilt Sensor Header/Header
E4 Right Center Height Header/Header

Sensor
E5 Left Center Height Sensor Header/Header
E7 Left Height/Tilt Sensor Header/Header
E8 Rear Ladder Down Sensor Combine/Combine
E 17 Flex Pressure Sensor Header/Header
E 19 Raise Rate Pot (HI) Header/Header
E 20 Raise Rate Pot Header/Header
E 21 Raise Rate Pot (LO Header/Header
E 22 Lower Rate Pot Header/Header
E 23 Lower Rate Pot (LO) Header/Header
E 24 Reel Speed Pot Header/Reel
E 25 Reel Speed Pot (LO) Header/Reel
E 26 Min. Reel Pot Header/Reel
123

Troubleshoot Menu
E 27 Min. Reel Pot (LO) Header/Reel
E 28 Header Tilt Angle Sensor Header/Tilt
E 31 Vertical Reel Position Header/Reel

Sensor
E 32 Lower Rate Pot (HI) Header/Header
E 33 Reel Speed Pot (HI) Header/Reel
E 34 Header Sensor Type Header/Header
E 35 Upper Sieve Position Combine/Sieve &

Sensor Unloader
E 36 Lower Sieve Position Combine/Sieve &

Sensor Unloader
E 38 Unloader Tube Sensor NA/Sieve & Unloader
E 40 Min. Reel Pot (HI) Header/Reel
E 42 12VF High Side Supply Combine/Voltage
E 43 12VD High Side Supply Combine/Voltage
E 44 12VH High Side Supply Combine/Voltage
E 45 12VT High Side Supply Combine/Voltage
E 46 5V Reference Supply Combine/Voltage
E 47 Moisture Sensor (+) Combine/NA

(If fault, error sent to SPN 47
PRO 600)
E 48 Moisture Sensor (-) Combine/NA
PRO 600)
124

Troubleshoot Menu
E 49 Reel Drive Solenoid Header/Reel
E 50 Sieve Select Relay Combine/Sieve &

Unloader
E 51 Unloader Swing Out Combine/Sieve &

Solenoid Unloader
E 52 Unloader Swing In Combine/Sieve &

Solenoid Unloader
E 53 Header Raise Solenoid Header/Header
E 54 Header Lower Solenoid Header/Header
E 55 Right Group Lights 1 Combine/Lighting

(Turn/Warning)
E 56 Left Group Lights 1 Combine/Lighting

(Turn/Warning)
E 57 Reel Down Solenoid Header/Reel
E 58 Reel Fore Solenoid Header/Reel
E 59 Moistener Bypass Relay Combine/NA

PRO 600)
E 60 Header Tilt CW Solenoid Header/Tilt
E 61 Header Tilt CWW Solenoid Header/Tilt

(Trailer/Header Turn/
Warning)
E 63 Feeder Reverse Solenoid Combine/Combine
E 64 Unloader Auger Solenoid Combine/Sieve &

Unloader

(Trailer/Header Turn/
Warning)
125

Troubleshoot Menu
E 66 Reel Aft Solenoid Header/Reel
E 67 Reel Up Solenoid Header/Reel
E 68 Header Tilt Current Sense Header/Tilt
E 70 Moisture Temperature Combine/NA

Sensor (If fault, error sent to SPN 70
PRO 600)
(Turn/Warning) Current
Sense
(Turn/Warning) Current
Sense
E 76 Header Height Current Header/Header
Sense
E 81 Reel Drive Current Sense Header/Reel
E 82 Signal Valve Current Combine/Combine

Sense
E 83 Sieve Open Relay Combine/Sieve &

Unloader
E 84 Sieve Close Relay Combine/Sieve &

Unloader
E 85 A-Post Communications Combine/Combine
E 86 Multi-Function Handle Header/NA

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Input 4

Input 5
126

Troubleshoot Menu
Input 6

Input 7
E93 Horizontal Reel Position Header/Reel

Sensor
127
A-Post Error Codes

Troubleshoot Menu
E 129 Fuel Level Sensor Engine/Engine
E 132 Tailings Volume Sensor Combine/Combine
E 133 Concave Position Sensor Combine/Combine
E 134 Spreader Position Sensor Combine/Combine
E 144 Alternator Combine/Voltage
E 145 Ignition Combine/Voltage
E 146 +5V Sensor Out Combine/Voltage
E 147 Display Temperature Combine/Combine
E 148 +12V Sensor Out Combine/Voltage
E 151 Feeder Drive Combine/Combine
E 152 Separator Drive Combine/Combine
E 154 Fan Decrease Relay Combine/Combine
E 155 Concave Decrease Relay Combine/Combine
E 156 Concave Increase Relay Combine/Combine
E 157 Fan Increase Relay Header/Reel
E 158 Rotor Decrease Relay Combine/Combine
128

Troubleshoot Menu
E 159 North America/Australia/ Combine/Lighting
New Zealand Lights Relay
E 160 Rotor Increase Relay Combine/Combine
E 163 Engine Running Relay Engine/Engine
E 164 Exit Lighting Relay Combine/Lighting
E 165 CXCM Communication Combine/Combine
E 166 ECM Communication Engine/Engine

(electronic engines only)
E 167 Relay Group A Supply Combine/Voltage
E 168 Relay Group B Supply Combine/Voltage
E 169 Park Brake Pressure Combine/NA

Switch
129
Electronic Engine Error Codes

Error No. Description Display Icon
E 184 Crankcase Blowby Pressure
E 185 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve
Position
E 186 Coolant Temperature #2
E 187 Wheel-Based Vehicle Speed
E 188 Engine Throttle
E 189 Auxiliary Alternate Torque Validation

Switch
E 190 Fuel Filter Restriction
E 191 Water in Fuel
E 192 Engine Oil Pressure
E 193 Manifold Pressure

E 194 Turbocharger 1 Speed
E 195 Intake Manifold Temperature
E 196 Barometric Pressure

E 197 Coolant Pressure
E 198 Coolant Temperature
E 199 Coolant Level

E 200 Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure
E 201 Battery 1 Voltage
E 202 Ambient Air Temperature
E 203 Engine Fuel Temperature
E 204 Oil Temperature
E 205 Engine Crankshaft Speed/Position
E 206 Real Time Clock Power
E 207 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve Delta
Pressure
E 208 Recirculated Exhaust Gas Temperature
E 209 Auxiliary Temperature Input 1
E 210 Accelerator Pedal or Lever Idle
Validation
130

E 211 Auxiliary Intermediate (PTO) Speed
Switch Validation
E 212 Engine Magnetic Crankshaft Speed/
Position Lost
E 213 OEM Data Link Cannot Transmit
E 214 Power Supply Lost With Ignition On
E 215 Engine Control Module Critical Internal
Failure
E 216 Electronic Calibration Code
Incompatibility
E 217 Electronic Fuel Injection Control Valve
E 218 SAE J1939 Multiplexing PNG Time-out
Error
E 219 Auxiliary Commanded Dual Output
Shutdown
E 220 VGT Actuator
E 221 External Speed Command Input
E 222 Fan Control
E 223 Injector Solenoid Cylinder 1
E 229 Starter Relay
E 230 Auxiliary PWM Driver 1
E 231 Auxiliary Input/Output 2
E 232 Auxiliary Input/Output 3
E 233 Engine Camshaft Speed/Position
E 234 Intake Air Heater 1
E 235 Intake Air Heater 2
E 236 Remote Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position
E 237 Electric Lift Pump for Engine Fuel Supply
E 238 ECM Internal Air Temperature
E 239 Turbocharger 1 Compressor Inlet
Temperature
E 240 Exhaust Pressure
E 241 Idle Shutdown Vehicle Accessories
Relay
E 242 Fuel Pump Pressurizing Assembly 1
E 243 Multiple Unit Synchronization Switch
E 244 Auxiliary Pressure Input 1
131

E 245 Additional OEM/Vehicle Diagnostic
Codes Logged
E 246 Control Module Identification Input State
Error
E 247 Turbocharger Turbine Inlet Temperature
(Calculated)
E 248 Turbocharger Turbine Outlet
Temperature (Calculated)
E 249 EGR Valve Control
E 250 ECM Data Lost
E 251 Coolant Pressure #2
E 252 Sensor Supply 1
132
Alarm Screens
A-Post Alarms
Alarm Description Display Icon
No.
A 100 Decrease Engine Speed
A 103 Power Boos Disabled
CXCM Alarms
No.
A 200 Calibrate Ground Height Sensors
Step 1 - Lower Header to the ground and
hold for 2 seconds.
Step 2 - Raise Header.
A 201 Auto Height Disabled
A 202 Auto Tilt Disabled
A 204 Rear Ladder Down
A 206 Upper Sieve Position <> Setting
A 207 Lower Sieve Position <> Setting
133
Abort Screens
A-Post Aborts
No.
A 025 Concave Sensor Value is Invalid
A 026 Tailings Sensor Value is Invalid
A0 27 Spreader Sensor Value is Invalid
CXCM Aborts
No.
A 000 Operator Stop
A 001 Feeder Angle Sensor Value is Invalid or

Not Changing
A 002 Engine is Not Running
A 003 Feeder is Engaged
A 004 Header Tilt Sensor Value is Invalid or

Not Changing
A 005 Ground Speed is Not Zero
A 006 Upper Sieve Sensor Value is Invalid
A 007 Lower Sieve Sensor Value is Invalid
A 009 Reel Not Moving
134
TIRE RADIUS CHART

Use this chart to determine the correct tire radius to use for Tire Size in Set Up Type Screen 1.
GOODYEAR MICHELIN
Tire Size (inch) (cm) (inch) (cm)
650/75R32 R1W DT820 34.0 86.3 NA NA
800/65R32 R1W STR 34.0 86.3 NA NA
900/60R-32 R1W DT830 36.0 91.5 35.2 89.3
135
AUTOMATIC CROP SETTINGS (ACS) (If Equipped)

Automatic Crop Setting is controlled through the AFS
Pro 600. The AFS Pro 600 commands the A post and
CXCM controller how to set the Combine’s:
● Cleaning Fan Speed
● Rotor Speed
● Concave Position
● Upper Sieve Opening
● Lower Sieve opening
The Combine must have the in cab sieve adjustment
option.
RD07G027
When making settings, the machine must be running
and the separator must be ON.
STEP 1
ACS must be enabled the first time it is used. There
is no ACS selection icon on the main menu. Navigate
to the ACS enable screen - Main/Combine Setup/
Combine/ACS Enable.
NOTE: ACS disable is the default setting from the

factory. This is to prevent error messages from being
generated if the ACS option is not installed.
NOTE: Machine settings are not available if ACS is

not enabled.
RH08D299
STEP 2
Click on the ACS Enable icon to open the selection
icon.
RH08D300
136
STEP 3
Click ACS Enable “ON”.
RH08D301
STEP 4
Create a NEW layout. Navigate to MAIN/TOOLBOX/
LAYOUT. Here you will select:
● Crop Type
● Work Condition
● Machine Settings
These can be put in the left area or on any or all run
screens.
NOTE: If put in the left area, these will not appear on

run screen.
RH08D303
STEP 5
Make your crop type selection
RH08D304
137
STEP 6
Select your work condition.
NOTE: Up to 60 different work conditions can be

made.
RH08D306
● Selecting None is equivalent to turning ACS OFF.
● Selecting Default are the factory settings for the

selected Crop Type.
NOTE: It is recommended to start with the Default

Setting first and fine tune the setting from there.
● User created work conditions can be made also.
RH08D305
STEP 7
Use the EDIT screen to input text for user created
Work and Current Conditions.
RH08D309
138
STEP 8
The three buttons in the AFS Pro 600 Machine
Setting window control the complete system.
1. Work Condition Save - Saves the current
machine settings to the current Work Condition.
This is not active if the work condition is Default
and will be grayed out. It is also not active if
machine settings are not different than the work
condition.
1 2 3
It can also be used to Save machine settings to a
user created Work Condition that will be used
again in the future. RH08D307l
Example: Save settings for wet condition then

recall when in that crop condition again.
2. Work Condition Set/Recall - Applies the
m a c h i n e s e t t i n g s f r o m t h e c u r r e n t Wo r k
Condition. This must be selected to apply
machine settings. It will not be active if Machine
Settings match the Work Conditions.
It is used to set the machine initially and to reset/
recall previous machine settings if incorrect
adjustments were made.
3. Work Condition Show Info - Shows a snap shot
of the current machine settings compared to the
current Work Conditions.
NOTE: Current settings are adjusted to High Idle no

load regardless of current engine RPM, so the values
may not match the A Post.
RH08D308
139
STEP 9
There are three flashing warning icons that can
appear in the Status/Warning area at the upper left of
the screen.
1. Cannot Reach Machine Setting - This indicates
that the machine cannot meet the setting
request. This will most likely be an incorrect rotor
gear but can be other settings. 1 2 3
2. and 3.Shift Rotor Gear down and Shift Rotor
Gear Up - These icons indicate that the machine
has reached minimum or maximum rotor speed
in its current rotor gear and still can not match RH08D310/311/312
the requested machine settings.

This requires the operator to turn the rotor OFF
and stop the machine. Exit the cab and move the
rotor gearshift on the right side of the machine in
the direction indicated by the icon.
NOTE: Change the rotor gear up or down one gear

at a time.
ACS Operation
When applying matching settings with the Work The A - Post Display will display the sieve or concave
Condition Set/Recall, the separator must be ON. position as they are moving and will return to the
WAIT for the settings to apply. Mechanical settings Harvest screen when done.
apply in real time (normal speed).
All settings are RPM adjusted to High Idle Threshing
Fan and rotor settings can be monitored on the digital Speed (2410 RPM)
display while ACS is being applied. Once the settings
are applied, the display will return to the screen When the requested settings and actual machine
selected before ACS was applied. settings all match, the Save and Set/Recall buttons
will gray out.
NOTE: Changing the Crop Type and/or Work

Condition will not apply the new machine settings.
The Recall button must be used to apply new
machine settings.
140
5 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting the Combine for the first time and 5. Check the fuel system, cooling system and
before each operating period after that, make these engine oil pan for leaks.
checks:
6. Check the tension on all belts and chains.
1. Make sure all persons who operate or perform
maintenance understand that clean fuel is 7. Remove any water or sediment from the water
important. separator filter.
2. Check all lubrication points as shown in the 8. Check the air pressure of the tires.
Lubrication Charts.
9. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir.
3. Check the oil level in the engine crankcase. Add water and Ethylene Glycol coolant as
Check the fluid level in the hydraulic reservoir. needed.
4. Check that the fuel tank is filled with clean fuel 10. Check to make sure the audible alarm and
that meets the specifications given in this indicator lamps operate correctly.
manual.
11. Check to see that all shields are correctly
NOTE: Clean around the fuel tank cap before you installed and latched.
remove the cap.
12. Remove all accumulated crop material from the
machine.
WARNING: Before starting engine study Operator’s Manual safety messages. Read all safety signs on
machine. Clear the area of other persons. Learn and practice safe use of controls before operating. It is your
! responsibility to understand and follow manufacturers instructions on machine operation, service, and to
observe pertinent laws and regulations. Operator and Repair Manuals may be obtained from your
equipment dealer. M103A
141
INDICATOR LAMP AND ALARM TEST

The indicator lamps and alarm are used to alert the NOTE: If the alarm sounds and/or an indicator lamp
operator when attention is required at some unit of illuminates during operation, immediate corrective
the Combine. action must be taken. Stop the Combine engine and
check the malfunction area.
Upon start-up, the instrumentation will go through a
self-test mode. This consists of lighting all warning
indicators (Figure A) and all the LCD display
segments of the Shaft Speed Monitor, tachometer
and the Header Height Display (Figure B). The
Chime alarm will also sound during the self-test
mode.
RD07G037
FIGURE B
RH07G116
FIGURE A
142
RUN-IN PROCEDURE
If the run-in procedure for a new engine is not followed, you can cause damage to piston rings and cylinder sleeves.
Engine Warm Up No Load

Before operating in the field, warm up the engine by When operating the engine without a load, you can
running the engine for 10 to 15 minutes at 1/2 keep the correct engine operating temperature if you
throttle. run the engine at approximately 1600 RPM.
IMPORTANT: It is important that enough lubricant

reaches the turbocharger bearings before operating
Engine Oil
the engine at rated speed.
New Combines have SAE 15W-40 oil in the engine.
This oil can be used in temperatures below 43° C
Load ( 1 1 0 ° F ) . A d d m a k e u p o i l fo l l o w i n g t h e
recommendations in the LUBRICATION/FILTERS/
During the first eight (8) hours of operating in the FLUIDS section in this manual. DO NOT add
field, operate in one gear lower than normal. During kerosene for cold weather starting. If temperatures
the next twelve (12) operating hours, do not “lug” the are not in the specified range, drain the oil and
engine. A new engine must not be “lugged” below replace the oil with the correct viscosity.
2325 RPM.
143
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE
STEP 1
1
P u t t h e p r o p u l s i o n c o n t r o l l ev e r ( 1 ) i n t h e
NEUTRAL position and engage the PARKING
BRAKE switch (2).
RD07G028
RD07G026
STEP 2
The separator drive switch (4) must be in the OFF
position.
4
RD07G032
144
STEP 3
The throttle should be in the low idle position.
RD07J009
STEP 4
Turn the key switch to the ON position to check the
indicator lamps.
A24284
STEP 5
WAIT for pre-heat lamp on the Warning Indicator
panel to go out.
RD07G116
STEP 6 1 3
Turn the key switch to the START position until the

engine starts, but no more than 30 seconds, then
release the key.
A24284
145
WARNING: DO NOT use ether starting fluid. Serious engine damage and death or serious personal injury
! may occur. M1068
STEP 7
As soon as the engine starts, set the throttle hand 5
lever at low idle position (1000 to 1200 RPM) to
make sure oil reaches all areas in the engine.
Check the oil pressure indicator (5). If there is low
oil pressure STOP the engine and check for the
cause.
IMPORTANT
1. If the engine starts and then stops, wait for the

starting motor to stop turning before you turn the
key switch to the START position again.
RH07G115
2. DO NOT use the starting motor for more than 30

seconds. Wait one minute between starts so the
starting motor can cool.
3. If the engine stops when operating with a load,

immediately start the engine again to prevent
excessive heat buildup caused by stopping the
flow of oil for cooling and lubrication.
146
STOPPING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT: When stopping the engine after operating under a heavy load, run the engine at low idle speed
(1000 to 1200 RPM) for 3 to 5 minutes. This will permit the engine and turbocharger temperature to decrease
gradually.
WARNING: Before leaving the machine, lower attachments, place all controls in neutral, set the parking
! brake, stop the engine, and remove the key from the switch. M224C
STEP 1
Stop the Combine and engage the PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH (1).
RD07G026
STEP 2
Turn the key switch to the OFF position. Remove
the key.
A24284
147
COLD TEMPERATURE OPERATION

IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures 4. TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC FLUID - Use
never run the engine at low idle speed for long Case IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA.
periods of time. Never run the engine for long periods
of time when the coolant temperature is below 5. COOLING SYSTEM - Must have a minimum of
normal. 5 0 p e r c e n t E t hy l e n e G l y c o l s o l u t i o n fo r
protection.
To star t and operate your Combine during cold
ambient temperatures: 6. CONDENSATION IN FUEL TANK - To prevent
condensation in the fuel tank and water entering
1. BATTERIES - Must have a full charge. the fuel system, fill the fuel tank after each
operating day. Drain any water from the fuel tank
2. FUEL - Must be clean and with no water. See by opening the valve on the bottom of the tank.
Fuel Specifications in this manual.
7. FUEL FILTER WATER SEPERATOR - During
3. ENGINE OIL - Must have the correct viscosity for cold ambient temperatures, make sure to remove
the ambient temperature range. water from the water separator each day or
damage will occur.
WARNING: DO NOT use ether starting fluid. Serious engine damage and death or serious personal injury
! may occur. M1068
During cold ambient temperatures, the engine will not heat to or keep the rated operating temperature at slow
engine speeds. Slow engine speeds in cold temperatures can cause damage to the engine. Use the following
procedures to warm the engine and hydraulic fluid and to keep the correct operating temperatures.
1. WARMING THE ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC 2. KEEP ENGINE AT CORRECT OPERATING

FLUID TEMPERATURE - When the engine is operating
in cold ambient temperatures without a load,
A. Start the engine using the procedure shown keep the engine warm by running the engine at
in this manual. intermediate speed range.
B. Warm the hydraulic fluid to operating 3. STOPPING THE ENGINE - Run the engine at
temperature, run the engine at intermediate slow speed for 3 to 5 minutes. This will permit the
speed range for approximately five (5) engine temperature to decrease gradually before
minutes. stopping the engine.
IMPORTANT: Operating the Combine with cold

hydraulic fluid can cause rough operation with
possible injury to the operator.
148
Coolant Heater
An Engine Block Coolant Heater is available from
your dealer.
RD02E206
149
TRANSPORTING PREPARATIONS
1. Empty the grain tank.
2. Move the unloader tube into the transport 1

position. If transporting long distances, 16 km (10
miles) or more, install the hairpin clip (1) to hold
the unloader tube in place
3. Raise the Header high enough for good ground

clearance.
A1013S45
4. The incline auger must be lowered to the

transpor t position for road transpor ting and
overhead clearance.
To lower the tube, move the release handle (2)

up to release the tube.
NOTE: The tube is counter balanced with a spring to 2

ease moving the tube.
10034688
Lower the tube to the transport position cradle

(3).
3
RD07J014
1 3
150
With the tube in the transport cradle, move the

release handle over center (4) to lock the tube in
position.
RD07J013
1 3
5. Remove the two tank extension support rods

from the open position (5) and place them in the 5
storage position (6).
RD07J011/012
6. Close the rear, then the front tank extension.
RD07J015
151
7. Close both side extensions.
RD07J016
8. Be sure all side panel transport locks (7) and
panel latch locks (8) are in the locked position.
RD08D245
RI08E152
If needed, the forward handrail (9) on the operator’s
ladder can be repositioned on the ladder to allow the
ladder to be swung far ther towards the cab for
narrower shipping width. 11
9
To reposition the handrail, remove the top mounting
bolts. Loosen the lower mounting bolts. Pivot the
handrail back to the transport position. Install the
upper handrail lower bolt (10) in the transport bolt
hole. Tighten the three handrail bolts. Install the 10
four th bolt in the original hole (11) and tighten.
Release the operator’s ladder latch and move the
ladder to the innermost position.
Reverse the procedure for normal operation.
NOTE: Do Not leave the handrail in the transport

RH08F012
position during normal operation.
152
Tie Down T-Hooks

When Combine is to be hauled on a truck, trailer or
flat car, it is recommended that T-hooks be used to
chain the Combine down.
RD97G045
Tie Down Locations
RH08F003 rh08f006
BOTTOM OF REAR AXLE CENTER SECTION (2) AXLE FRONT SIDE ABOVE STEERING CYLINDER
(2)
rh08f004
BOTTOM OF OPTIONAL REAR HITCH (2)
RH08F007
REAR SIDE OF REAR AXLE CLEVIS (2)
RH08F005
SIDES OF OPTIONAL REAR HITCH (2)
153
TOWING
I M P O RTA N T: To p r e v e n t d a m a g e t o t h e
Combine the towing speed must not exceed 20
MPH (32 km/h).
The transmission gear shift lever (1) must be in the 1

NEUTRAL position. Damage to the hydraulic system
can be caused by not following this instruction.
AT T E N T I ON : W he n towi ng Co mb in es w it h a
turbocharged engine, make sure to cover the exhaust
opening to prevent air from entering. Without proper
lubrication, air entering the exhaust opening can turn
the turbine and cause damage to the turbocharger
bearings. RD07J017
NOTE: If the Combine is equipped with power guide

axle, put the Power Guide Axle switch (2) in the OFF
position.
NOTE: Before towing machine with dead engine, the

Park Brake MUST be released by turning the key
switch to the ON position, park brake released and
activating the Hazard/Park Brake Disable Switch to
the DISABLE position. See Disabled Machine in this 2
section of the manual.
A24293
WARNING: Do not use nylon rope or wire cable to pull this machine. Failure of the hook, the nylon rope or
! wire cable will release tremendous energy and the recoil can cause bodily injury to anyone in the area. Use
caution when pulling the machine from the mud. M319D
RH08f001 RH08f002
WITH CHAFF SPREADER WITHOUT CHAFF SPREADER
154
Disabled Machine
In the event that the engine stops running and
cannot be restarted, the Combine park brake will
lock the wheels. To free the wheels so that the
Combine can be towed, do the following:
1. Turn the key switch to the ON position.
2. Make sure Park Brake is in the OFF Position.
3. Press the Hazard/Park Brake Disable Switch to

the hazard Position. Lift detent lock latch (1) and 1
press top par t of switch to the Park Brake
DISABLE Position.
RD05D107R
4. Vigorously pump the Left service brake pedal

through its full stroke until the Park Bake Light
goes out
(It is suggested that you stand over the brake pedal

when doing this procedure), while actuating the
pedal approximately 12 to 15 times.
NOTE: If the Combine is to be towed for a period of

time exceeding 30 minutes, the drive shaft couplings
should be removed. Combine will have NO Brake
Function with coupling removed.
IMPORTANT: The Hazard/Park Brake Disable

Switch MUST be in the Park Brake Disable
Po s i t i o n w h i l e C o m b i n e i s b e i n g t o w e d .
Disengaging the switch will reengage the Park Brake
and stop the machine.
NOTE: After towing is completed, move the Hazard/

Park Brake Disable Switch to the OFF position.
WARNING: If machine is on a slope and the above procedure is performed, the machine will roll. Perform
! the above procedure only when machine is on a flat surface or completely restrained by blocking the wheels.
M575
155
MAIN HYDRAULIC VALVE STACK
Solenoid Locations and Manual Overrides

The Main Hydraulic Valve Stack is located in the service compartment on the operator’s platform and controls the
various hydraulic functions of the Combine. It is comprised of solenoid valves, some of which have manual
overrides. Below is the location of the solenoid valves and if equipped, the override operation.
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
RIGHT END VIEW

RI08F131
156
VALVE MANUAL OVERIDE DUAL COIL LOGIC

1. SIGNAL
2. STEER RELIEF
3. MANUAL FEEDER RAISE PULL TO ACTIVATE
4. FEEDER RAISE COMPENSATOR
5. FEEDER LOWER PULL TO ACTIVATE
6. REEL RAISE
7. REEL FORE/AFT PULL -FORE/PUSH AFT TOP COIL-FORE/BASE COIL-AFT
8. UNLOAD SWING PULL -IN/PUSH OUT TOP COIL-IN/BASE COIL-OUT
9. REEL DRIVE RELIEF
10. AUX PUMP PRIORITY
11. REEL FORE/AFT P.O. CHECK
12. REEL LOWER
13. FEEDER RAISE
14. RIDE CONTROL (OPTION)
15. LATERAL TILT COUNTERBALANCE PISTON
16. LATERAL TILT COUNTERBALANCE ROD
17. LATERAL TILT PULL FOR CW/PUSH FOR CCW TOP COIL CW/BASE COIL CCW
18. PRESSURE CHECK - STEERING
19. STEER SIGNAL CHECK
20. PRESSURE CHECK - PFC PUMP
21 LATERAL TILT SIGNAL CHECK PISTON
22. LATERAL TILT SIGNAL CHECK ROD
23. PRESSURE CHECK - LOAD SENSE
24. REEL BLEED ORFICE
25. FEEDER LIFT LOAD SENSE CHECK
26. STEER PRIORITY
27. LOAD SENSE DRAIN ORFICE
28. FLOAT SENSOR (OPTION)
29. FEEDER LIFT LOAD CHECK/THERMAL RELIEF
30. REEL DRIVE REVERSE FLOW CHECK
31. REEL DRIVE CW TO INCREASE/CCW TO
DECREASE
157
TAIL LAMPS, TURN INDICATOR LAMPS, STOP LAMPS,

ROTATING BEACONS
4 4
2
3 3
2 2
5 5
RD06D149
1. FRONT ROTATING BEACON 3. FRONT MARKER LAMP 5. FRONT HEAD LAMPS
2. TURN INDICATOR LAMP 4. OPTIONAL WORK LAMP FOR FOLDING CORD HEAD
FRONT VIEW - ITALIAN COMBINE SHOWN
Your Combine is equipped with head lamps, tail lamps, marker lamps, turn indicator lamps and flashing hazard
lamps. Make sure to use these items correctly when operating the Combine on the road for the safety and
protection of the operator and other vehicle operators. Use the marker lamps for day operation and the head lamps
for night operation according to local law. Use the flashing hazard lamps when the Combine is stopped on the side
of the road.
WARNING: Stop, look and listen before entering a highway, stay on your side of the road and pull over to
! let faster traffic pass. Slow down and signal before turning. M111C
The Combine is equipped with a front and rear rotating beacon. Use the rotating beacons while operating the
Combine on the road as required by local law.
158
2 2
3 3
1 1
4 4
RH08A020
REAR VIEW - EUROPEAN COMBINE EXCEPT GERMANY
2 2
3 3
1 1
4 4
RH08A016
1. TURN INDICATOR LAMP 3. TAIL LAMP
2. STOP LAMP 4. REFLECTOR
REAR VIEW - GERMAN COMBINE
159
COMBINE OPERATION
Ground Travel Speed

Power is transferred from the engine to the three
speed transmission by the hydrostatic drive unit.
Different grounds speeds are available in each
transmission gear range. The ground travel speeds
are shown under “Approximate Travel Speeds,” 3
See Travel Speed Chart in Specifications Section
of this manual. Press the ground speed key (1) and
use the digital tachometer to check the ground
travel speed (2).
The correct ground speed is important. A ground 2

speed which is too fast will cause an overload
condition. A ground speed which is too slow will not
give efficient operation. A ground speed that is too
fast over rough terrain will cause early wear and 1
possible damage to the Combine.
NOTE: The hydrostatic pump on the Combine is

equipped with a pressure override valve. This valve is
to prevent an overload of the hydrostatic system. The
valve is part of the pump assembly and is not
adjustable. During normal operation the pressure
override valve will cause the Combine to slow down
or stop completely according to conditions. When this
occurs put the propulsion control lever in the
NEUTRAL position, shift the transmission to a lower
gear and continue operation. RD07G039/053
WARNING: Travel speed should be such that complete control and machine stability is maintained at all
! times. Where possible, avoid operating near ditches, embankments and holes. Reduce speed when turning,
crossing slopes, and on rough, slick, or muddy surfaces. M109B
High Idle Speed

At normal operating temperature engine high idle is If the engine RPM falls below the engine alarm
2410 RPM on the engine tachometer (3). threshold set point and the Feeder or Rotor or Fan
are ON, the audible chime alarm will sound and the
High Idle with separator engaged - 2410 RPM.
ENGINE SPEED will flash. If the FEEDER ENABLE
High Idle with separator disengaged: switch is OFF the Engine Speed Alarm function is
5088 and 6088 - 2250 RPM in first and second gear. disabled.
In third gear or road mode, RPM may be limited
further to comply with country specific ground speed
limits.
7088 - 2100 RPM in first and second gear. In third
gear or road mode, RPM may be limited further to
comply with country specific ground speed limits.
160
Starting Ground Travel

1. With the propulsion control lever in the neutral
position, start the engine.
RD07G028
2. Move the transmission control lever (1) to the
proper gear.
A24299
3. Release the PARK BRAKE SWITCH (2). 1 3
RD07G026
161
4. Moving the propulsion control lever (1) forward

will c ause the Combine to move forward.
Moving the lever farther forward will increase
1
travel speed in that transmission gear.
RD07G029
5. To reverse the direction of the Combine, move
the propulsion control lever (1) to NEUTRAL then 1
push the lever to the right and pull rearward.
Reverse will have the same travel speeds as
forward.
RD07G030
162
Stopping Ground Travel

1. The Combine can be stopped by moving the
propuls ion c ontrol lever to the NEUTRAL
position.
RD07G028
2. Engage the Park Brake switch (2).
RD07G026
WARNING: When going downhill, do not rapidly move the propulsion control to neutral position. The engine
! and transmission will help control the machine speed. M1218
163
HEADER AND COMBINE CONNECTIONS
Connecting The Header

Connect the Header to the Combine according to the
following procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the stripper extensions are

installed in the correct location for the Combine
model being used. See Stripper Extension Location
in the Header Operator’s Manual for more
information.
1. Make sure the work area is clear from all

persons, tools, pets, etc. Push the top of the
Header Control Switch and lower the feeder.
Slowly move the Combine to the Header.
RD07G033
2. Move the Combine into the Header opening until

the feeder saddle (2) is aligned with the Header
beam (1). Slowly lift the Header off the ground or 1
cart. Make sure the Header beam is seated in
the feeder saddle.
RD07J019
1. HEADER BEAM
2. FEEDER SADDLE
death. M184D
3. Raise the Header completely. Turn OFF the

Combine engine and remove key. Engage the
safety lock on the feeder lift cylinder.
RD07J029
164
4. Engage the lower Header locking latches (1)

onto the Header. Secure the lever handle in the
in the lock (2).
2
RD07J020
5. Remove the electrical harness connector from
the storage position. Open the connector cap
and connect the electrical harness to the Header.
NOTE: Terrain Tracker® connections (If equipped)

are also in this connector.
IMPORTANT: When installing the harness, make

sure the connectors are properly aligned. Do not
force connectors together or damage to the pins may
occur.
RD07J022
6. Open the cap on the hydraulic quick coupler.
Move the locking handle up so that the claws will
not interfere with the connection of the hydraulic
lines.
IMPO RTANT: Use a clean cloth to clean the

mounting surface of the quick coupler of any
accumulated dust.
RD07J030
165
7. Connect the hydraulic lines. Move the handle

down to lock the hydraulic lines in place.
RD07J028
RD07J024
8. Open the left feeder jackshaft cover. Remove the

driveshaft from the storage position and install
the driveshaft onto the feeder jackshaft. Close
the jackshaft cover. Repeat for the right side.
RD07J027
9. If necessary, reposition the hook and loop 1 3

fastener as shown. This will hold the hose and
wire harness assembly in a complete package,
and help prevent them from becoming entangled
or rubbing on any components.
10. When Header is installed during road transport,

connect Safety Lighting to Combine as specified
to satisfy individual country road regulations.
RR04F005
166
11. Raise the safety lock on the feeder lift cylinder

and secure the safety lock in the storage
position. Lower the Header to the ground.
IMPORTANT: Do not park the Combine with the

Header in raised position for extended periods of
time. This puts a load on the hydraulic system and
could cause damage to the Header lift cylinders.
RD07J031
WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection
or other injury.
To Prevent Personal Injury:
Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines.
! Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and components are in good condition.
Never use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose.
If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately. M149B
167
Disconnecting the Header

To disconnect the Header from the Combine, reverse the connection procedure. Also do the following:
death. M184D
Filler Adapter Adjustment

NOTE: An adapter kit must be installed in order to use the 1000 Series Corn Head on this feeder housing.
Adapter Setting for 1000 Series Corn Heads ........................................................................ 1080 mm (42-1/2 Inch)
A5236.55
Filler adapters are used to adjust the 1000 Series

Corn Head feeder opening width for the Combine
being used. The opening can be set for 846 mm
(33-5/16 Inch) or 1080 mm (42-1/2 Inch). To adjust
the width remove the mounting bolts and move the
filler adapters in or out to get the desired width.
NOTE: Set the adapter setting to 1080 mm (42-

1/2 Inch) for this Combine application.
A5238
168
Starting Combine Operation

1. With the engine running and the throttle lever
at the mid-idle position, engage the separator
(1) and feeder clutch drive (2).
NOTE: The separator will not engage if the

engine speed is below 1000 RPM or above
1800 RPM.
1 2
RD07G032
2. Run the engine at mid-idle for 15 to 30
seconds until the separator and feeder drive
are up to speed. Then move the throttle hand
lever to the full throttle position (3). 3
NOTE: Set the Fan and Rotor speeds at High

Idle.
RD07J032
1 3
169
3. Use the digital tachometer to check the engine

(4), rotor (5) and fan (6) speeds. Adjust the
speeds as necessar y (Refer to Initial Crop
Settings in this manual).
6
4
RD07G037
4
6 5
RD07G053
4. When harvesting with a Grain Header, adjust
the Header controls (7). (Refer to Header
Controls in this manual).
RD07G053
1 3
170
Stopping Combine Operation

1. Move the propulsion control lever to the
NEUTRAL position to stop the Combine
ground travel.
RD07G028
2. Raise the Header using the Header control
switch (1).
RD07G033
3. When the Combine has been cleared of all

material, move the feeder clutch switch (2) to
OFF. Move the separator drive switch (3) to
OFF.
2
3
RD07G032
4. Move the throttle hand lever (4) rearward to the
low idle speed position. Run the engine at low
idle speed for 3 to 5 minutes to per mit the
e n gi n e a n d t u r b o c h a r g e r t e m p e ra t u r e t o
decrease gradually before stopping the engine. 4
RD07J009
1 3
171
Threshing Speed
The throttle lever must be in the full throttle position
(1) when threshing.
Do not use the throttle lever to slow the Combine

through bad field conditions. This will slow the 1
entire Combine and cause a reduction in threshing
performance.
RD07J032
To slow the Combine travel speed move the
propulsion control lever back or shift to the next
lowest transmission gear.
RD07G029
A24299
172
HEADER HEIGHT AND TILT OPERATION
General Operation
The CXCM receives commands from the operator through the controls on the right hand console (RHC),
propulsion handle and the A-Post. Commands and other information from the A-Post are transmitted on the CAN
bus to CXCM. The CXCM also transmits information for display on the A-Post. The CXCM analyzes these
commands and signals to control raising and lowering of the Header and lateral tilt of the Header.
RD07j033/034
HEADER HEIGHT/TILT DIAGRAMS
Header Height Operation

There are two states to controlling the Header height: Manual and Auto. In the Auto, there are three modes of
control: Return to Cut (RTC), Auto Height and Pressure Float.
Manual Control
In manual, when the operator actuates the LOWER

portion of the position switch (1), the Header lower
solenoid is energized until the switch is released.
Likewise, when the operator actuates the RAISE
portion of the switch (1), the Header raise solenoid
is energized until the switch is released.
RD07G033
173
The speed the Header lowers is limited with the

Lower Rate Control (2). The Lower Rate setting is
adjustable from about 3.5 to 10 seconds for a full
up to full down travel. The speed the Header raises
is limited with the Raise Rate Control (3). The raise
2
rate setting range is adjustable from about 4 to 10
seconds for a full down to full up travel. When the
feeder gets close to the top, the speed the Header
raises is slowed down. The actual position of the
fe ede r i s s hown o n the d is pl ay as a num ber
relative to the zeroed feeder position.
3
To increase the rate at which the Header raises or
lowers, turn the RAISE RATE CONTROL and/or RD97G033
t h e L O W E R R AT E C O N T R O L t o t h e r i g h t
(clockwise). To decrease the rate at which the
Header raises or lowers, turn the RAISE RATE
CONTROL and/or the LOWER RATE CONTROL to
the left (counterclockwise).
Ground Calibration
If the Combine is stopped and the feeder drive is not If ground height sensors are on the Header and if the
on, the operator can zero the feeder position display operator zeroed the feeder position display, the
relative to the Header type. If the operator continues Header needs to be raised to complete the ground
to actuate the LOWER switch for 2 seconds after the calibration. Actuate the RAISE switch until the
Header reaches the ground, the feeder position for Header is momentarily stopped partway from the top
zeroing the display will be measured. If ground height for 1.5 seconds. The ground height sensors off the
sensors are on the Header, the ground height ground limits will be measured and saved relative to
sensors fully on the ground limits will be measured. the Header type.
The feeder position and ground height sensors fully
on the ground limits are saved relative to the Header If a new Header type is detected or a new Header is
type. defined, the operator will get an A200 warning alarm
to calibrate the ground height sensors.
Pressure Float Calibration
If configured for pressure float and a Grain Header is

attached and if the lift pressure of the Header has not
been measured, the Header will be stopped near the
top of travel for 1 second. The lift pressure will be
measured and saved.
Auto
The height system will only run in Auto state if the ● RTC maintains the Header at a feeder position
feeder drive is ON and the operator actuates the specified by the working setting.
RESUME or SET #1 or SET #2 switch.As mentioned
above, there are three modes in the Auto state: RTC,
● Auto Height maintains the Header at a ground
height specified by the working setting.
Auto Height and Pressure Float.
● Pressure Float maintains the Header on the
ground at a ground pressure specified by the
working setting.
174
Setting the Mode and Working Setting
Set the working setting and operating mode by doing If the Header does not have ground height sensors,
the following: the mode will be RTC, unless the Header is on the
ground, then the mode will be Pressure Float. If the
With the feeder running manually raise or lower the Header does not have ground height sensor and the
Header to the required cutting height. Once at the height system does not have a pressure sensor, then
cutting height, actuate the SET #1 switch. The the mode will be RTC.
system will determine the mode by the position of the
Header. If the ground height sensors are off the The mode, the feeder position and the working
ground, the mode will be RTC and the working setting will be saved to Settings #1 relative to the
setting will be the feeder position. If the ground height Header type. If the operator has selected the SET #2
sensors are in contact with the ground but the switch instead of the SET #1 switch, then the mode,
Header is still off the ground, the mode will be Auto the feeder position and the working setting will be
Height and the working setting will be the ground saved to Settings #2 relative to the Header type. Set
height. If the Header is on the ground and the Header #2 switch otherwise operates the same as the SET
is a grain head, the mode will be Pressure Float and #1 switch. Each Header type can have 2 different
the working setting will be the ground pressure. The settings (SET #1 and SET #2). Six different Header
mode, the feeder position and the working setting will types are accommodated.
be saved relative to the Header type.
If the Header is near or at the top of travel and one of
NOTE: If the grain head is a Flex Header, the auto the SET switches is actuated, the mode saved to the
height and pressure float modes occupy the same setting will be Manual. This effectively disables this
effective range on the Header. Therefore, to set settings and toggle capability of the RESUME switch
pressure float, the Header needs to be fully to the (see RESUME below). If both SET switches are
ground, then actuate the SET #1 or SET #2 switch. actuated when the Header is at or near the top of
See pressure float for adjusting the working setting. travel, this effectively disables the RESUME switch
functionality in the AUTO state.
Resume
While the height system is in the Manual state and If auto tilt is present but is in the manual mode,
the RESUME button is momentarily actuated, the momentary actuation of the RESUME button will
height system will lower or raise the Header to the enable auto tilt if auto height is running. An additional
feeder position, then transition to the working setting momentary actuation of the RESUME button will
and mode specified in SET #1 or SET #2 for the then toggle between the settings.
appropriate Header type. The settings selected is the
last one operated in. If there was no prior settings
used, the default is SET #1. While in the Auto state,
momentarily actuating the RESUME button will
toggle between the settings and the Header will be
raised or lowered to the feeder position then
transition to the working setting and mode specified
in the new setting.
Headlands Mode
If the RESUME button is actuated while holding the

SHIFT button, the Header will raise to the feeder
position that turns OFF the area counter.
175
Return to Cut Mode
If the settings call for RTC mode, RTC mode will be If the Header has ground height sensors, they will go
enabled when the RESUME or SET #1 or SET #2 into Auto Height mode when they contact the ground
switch is momentarily actuated. The height system and are raised 75%. If a corn Header is connected,
raises or lowers the feeder to maintain the feeder the ground height sensors go into Auto Height mode
position at the working setting. The speed the when they contact the ground and are raised 50%.
Header raises or lowers is limited to approximately The height system will raise or lower the Header to
t h e R A I S E R AT E a n d L OW E R R ATE s e t t i n g maintain the setting as long as the height sensors
respectively. are at 75% (50% for corn) up or more. Once the
height sensors are less than 75% (50% for corn), the
The operator can make fine adjustments to the height system will return to RTC mode and the feeder
working setting with the INCREASE and DECREASE position to the working setting. The feeder will not
switches. When the INCREASE switch is actuated, lower below the RTC working setting while in Auto
the feeder is raised. The feeder position becomes the Height override. See Auto Height mode for more
new working setting. The new working setting is information.
saved to the setting being used, Setting #1 or Setting
#2 with the appropriate Header type. When the If the Combine has a float pressure sensor with a
DECREASE switch is actuated, the feeder is Grain Header that does not have ground height
lowered. The feeder position becomes the new sensors and the Header comes in contact with the
working setting. The new working setting is saved to ground and the ground supports more than 30% of
the setting being used, Setting #1 or Setting #2 with the Header (70% of lift pressure), the height system
the appropriate Header type. will go into Pressure Float override. The height
system will raise or lower the Header to maintain the
The working setting can be adjusted throughout the 30% setting as long as the Header is in contact with
feeder’s travel up to near the top; however, if Height the ground. Once the Header is no longer in contact
or Pressure Float modes are available, the lower with the ground, the height system will return to RTC
range will be limited by the override feature when mode and the feeder position to the wor king
Height mode or Pressure Float mode takes over. setting.The feeder will not lower below the RTC
working setting while in Pressure Float override. See
Pressure Float mode for more information.
The actual position of the feeder is shown on the

display as a number relative to the zeroed feeder
position.If the RAISE or LOWER switch is actuated,
the system will go into Manual mode. To return to
RTC mode, momentarily press the RESUME button.
176
Auto Height Mode
NOTE: Before Auto Height can be enabled, the The SENSITIVITY control sets the gain of the raise
correct Header type identified via the display and a and lower signals. For a given error between the
ground calibration must have been performed for that ground height sensors and the working setting, the
Header. See Ground Calibration in this section and higher the sensitivity setting, the quicker the raise or
Combine Adjustments and Calibration in this manual. lower speed will reach maximum.
When the RESUME button is momentarily pressed, The actual ground height position is shown on the
the Header is lowered to the feeder position setting. If display as a number relative to the zeroed feeder
the settings call for AUTO HEIGHT mode, AUTO position (Header fully on the ground).
HEIGHT mode will be enabled when the actual
feeder position matches or is less than the feeder If the RAISE or LOWER switch is pushed, the system
position setting. The height system raises or lowers will go into Manual mode. To return the Auto Height
the feeder to maintain the Header ground height at mode, momentarily press the RESUME button.
the working setting. If the ground height decreases,
the feeder is raised to lift the Header to increase the If both left and right ground height sensors are
ground height back to the working setting. If the detected on the Header, and one or both of these
ground height increases, the feeder is lowered to sensors are not detected, a momentary alarm will
lower the Header to decrease the ground height back sound and Auto Height Disabled alarm warning A210
to the working setting. will be displayed on the A-Post display.
The operator can make fine adjustments to the

wor king settings with the INCREASE and
DECREASE switches on the RH console. When the
INCREASE switch is pressed, the working setting is
increased and the feeder is raised until the Header
reaches the new working setting. The new working
setting is saved to the setting being used, SET #1 or
SET #2 with the appropriate Header type. When the
DECREASE switch is pressed, the working setting is
decreased and the feeder is lowered until the Header
SET #2 with the appropriate Header type. The
working setting can be set between 93%, the highest,
to 13%, the lowest, of the ground height sensor
range.
177
Pressure Float Mode
When the RESUME button is momentarily pressed, The working setting can be set between 78% of lift
the Header is raised or lowered to the feeder position pressure as measured near the feeder upper limit to
setting. If the Header is a grain head and if the 61% of this measured value. The lift pressure when
settings call for Pressure Float mode, Pressure Float measured near the top only occurs once after start
mode will be enabled when the actual feeder position up and if the Header is a grain head. Until a
matches the feeder position setting. The height measurement is taken, the last reading from the last
system raises or lowers the feeder to maintain the operation will be used.
Header lift pressure at the working setting. If the lift
pressure decreases, the feeder is raised to lift the The SENSITIVITY control sets the gain of the raise
Header to support more of the weight of the Header and lower signals. For a given error between the float
to increase the pressure back to the working setting. pressure sensor and the working setting, the higher
If the lift pressure increases, the feeder is lowered to sensitivity setting, the quicker the raise or lower
lower the Header to support less of the weight of the speed will reach maximum.
Header to decrease the pressure back to the working
setting. A percent ground pressure is shown on the display.
The percent ground pressure range is 0% to 100%.
The operator can make fine adjustments to the 0% represents the minimum load the Header exerts
working setting with the INCREASE and DECREASE on the ground. 100% represents the maximum load
switches on the right hand console. When the the Header exerts on the ground.
INCREASE switch is pressed, the working setting is
increased and the feeder is raised until the Header If the RAISE or LOWER button is pressed, the
reaches the new working setting. The new working system will go into Manual mode. To retur n to
setting is saved to the setting being used, SET #1 or Pressure Float mode, momentar ily press the
SET #2 with the appropriate Header type. When the RESUME button.
DECREASE switch is pressed, the working setting is
decreased and the feeder is lowered until the Header
SET #2 with the appropriate Header type.
178
Header Tilt Operation

There are three modes for controlling the Header tilt
function:
● Manual
● Auto
● Level
Header tilt control is only possible if the engine is
running. A graphic (1) showing how much lateral tilt
the Header is from level will be displayed on the 2nd 1
Monitor Harvest screen on the A-post display.
RD07J035
Manual Mode
In Manual Mode, when the Left Tilt or Right Tilt
switch (2) is pressed, the Header tilt left or right
solenoid is energized until the switch is released. The
speed the Header tilts is 3 to 4 degrees per second.
RD07G033
179
Auto Tilt Mode (Terrain Tracker®)
The tilt system will only run in the Auto Tilt mode if The TILT SENSITIVITY control sets the gain of the tilt
the feeder drive is ON, the height system is in RTC, left and tilt right signals. For a given error between
Auto Height or Pressure Float mode, and there are the left and right ground height sensor, the higher the
left and right ground height sensors. sensitivity setting, the quicker the tilt speed will reach
maximum.
The tilt system tilts the Header to maintain the
Header parallel to the ground. If the ground get If the left or right tilt switch is pressed, the system will
closer on the left side of the Header or the ground go i nto M anua l mo de. To r etur n to Auto Til t,
falls away from the right side of the Header the tilt momentarily press the RESUME switch.
system will tilt the Header to the right to maintain the
Header parallel to the ground.If the ground get closer If both left and right height tilt sensors are detected
on the right side of the Header or the ground falls on the Header and then one or both of these sensors
away from the left side of the Header the tilt system are not detected, a momentary warning alarm will
will tilt the Header to the left to maintain the Header sound and A202, Auto Tilt Disabled will display on
parallel to the ground. the A-post display when auto height is enabled.
Level Mode
The tilt system will only r un in Level mode if

previously in Auto Tilt and the height system is in
manual or headlands mode and the feeder is above
the position that turns off the area counter. The
Header is tilted in the appropriate direction to level
the Header relative to the Combine.
180
REEL CONTROL OPERATION
General Operation
The CXCM receives commands from the operator through the controls on the right hand console (RHC),
propulsion handle and the A-Post. Information from the A-Post are transmitted on the CAN bus to CXCM. The
CXCM analyzes these commands and signals to control raising and lowering, moving forward and backward the
position of the reel and controlling the speed of the reel.
RD07J036
REEL CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
Reel Drive Control

Reel drive control is only available if the ROADING switch is OFF and the feeder is engaged.
Manual
If the REEL AUTO switch (1) is OFF, the REEL
SPEED control (2) sets the speed of the reel. Turn
the control clockwise to increase the speed. Turn the
control counter clockwise to decrease the speed. If
the control is fully counter clockwise, reel speed will
be OFF. 1
2
Auto
If the REEL AUTO switch is ON, the reel speed
follows the ground speed. The REEL SPEED control
(2) adjusts the offset speed of the reel relative to
ground speed. Turn the control clockwise to increase
the offset up to 4 mph (6.5 km/h) greater than ground
speed. Tur n the control counter clockwise to RD07G032
decrease the offset down to 1.6 mph (2.5 km/h) less

than ground speed.
The MIN REEL SPEED control (3) is used to set the
minimum reel speed the reel will turn. Turn the
control clockwise to increase the speed up to 6.2
mph (10 km/h). Turn the control counter clockwise to
decrease the speed down to “0”. If the control is fully
counter clockwise, the reel speed will be OFF.
3
RD97G033
181
Reel Position Control

Reel Position Control is only available if the roading
switch is OFF.
Manual Control
CORN HEADER
If the Corn Header platform is rigid and hydraulic If the Corn Header platform is rigid and hydraulic
stripper plates are not installed, the REEL FORE, stripper plates are installed, the REEL FORE and
AFT, UP and DOWN have no functionality. REEL AFT adjusts the stripper (deck) plates.
If the cor n Header platfor m is folding and the If the Corn Header platform is folding and hydraulic
hydraulic stripper plates are not installed, the REEL stripper plated are installed, the REEL FORE and
UP and DOWN will fold and unfold the corn Header if REEL AFT adjusts the stripper (deck) plates. The
the feeder is not engaged. REEL UP and DOWN will fold and unfold the corn
Header if the feeder is not engaged.
IMPORTANT: The Header dr ivelines must be
disconnected before the Header is folded. There is IMPORTANT: The Header dr ivelines must be
no means to detect the drive lines connected for the disconnected before the Header is folded. There is
Combine to provide a warning or prevent folding. no means to detect the drive lines connected for the
Combine to provide a warning or prevent folding.
OTHER THAN CORN HEADER
The REEL UP and DOWN will raise and lower the The SHIFT/REEL FORE and SHIFT/REEL AFT will
reel. adjust a Draper Header tilt forward and rearward or
adjust the Varifeed Header cutter bar forward and
The REEL FORE and REEL AFT will adjust the reel
rearward.
forward and rearward.
Automatic Control
If an Auger or Draper Grain Header is connected and When the RESUME button of SHIFT/RESUME
the horizontal, vertical or both Reel Position sensors buttons are pressed, the reel position(s) will be
are installed, automatic control is available. automatically moved to the settings associated with
SET #1, SET #2 or Headlands. If the reel position is
adjusted while the Header is in Auto Height, RTC,
Pressure Float or Headlands mode, the new reel
position(s) will be saved automatically.
182
SHAFT SPEED MONITOR
Monitor Operation
The Shaft Speed Monitor (1) is enabled when the
SEPARATOR switch is engaged for at least 4
seconds and the engine speed is 1800 RPM or
above. The Shaft Speed Monitor is disabled when
the SEPARATOR is disengaged or the engine 1
speed is below 1800 RPM.
The FEEDER speed will only be monitored if the

FEEDER is engaged and the CHAFF SPREADER
speed will only be monitored if the status of the Chaff
Spreader is ACTIVE.
NOTE: The chaff spreader monitoring will not be

affected if the straw spreader alarm is disabled.
When the Shaft Speed Monitor is engaged any active

monitored speed which is below the alarm set point
will be indicated by flashing the appropriate icon and
s ou n di n g th e k l a x on al a r m c o nt i nu o us l y. A ll
deactivated icons will remain off.
The icons(s) and klaxon alarm can be turned off by

depressing the ALARM OFF/HOURS button. This
temporarily deactivates all of the alarming functions.
Pressing the ALARM OFF/HOURS switch with no
alar ms will display all inactive functions. The
appropriate indicator will remain on as long as the
ALARM OFF/HOURS switch is depressed and will
remain on continuously for 4 seconds after the switch
is released. If the speed of a deactivated function C D
increases above the alarm set point, the function will
be reset. The reset function will then be monitored
B
normally.
A E
If any alarming shaft speed increases above its set
point, the appropriate icon will turn off after an 8 H
second delay. There will be no delay on the klaxon F
alarm. G
RD07G037/038
The monitored speeds are:
● A - Feeder
● B - Rotor
● C - Grain Elevator
● D - Beater/Chopper
● E - Sieve Shaker
● F - Spreader
● G - Tailings Elevator
● H - Fan
183
MONITOR HARVEST SCREENS
Harvest Screen Operation

The Monitor Harvest Screens consist of two Harvest
Screens and a Road Mode Screen. Harvest Screen 1 1
is the default screen on startup unless the Road
Mode switch is ON. When the Road Mode switch is A
on, the Road Mode Screen is the default screen.
Harvest Screen 1 consists of Engine Power (A),
Rotor Grain Loss (B), Sieve Grain Loss (C) and B
Tailings Volume (D).
The grain loss bars (B and C) are divided into 24
sections. The sections are turned ON to show the
amount of grain loss for the rotor (B) and the sieve C
(C).
The Tailings Volume bar (D) is divided into 8 sections
that are tur ned ON to represent the volume of
D
material in the tailings elevator. The first five sections
are squares. The next three are triangles pointing to
the left. When the first triangle is lit up, the shaft
speed monitor is enabled and the chime alarm will
sound continuously and the tailings icon will flash.
The chime alarm and flashing icon will continue until 2
either the segment goes off, the ALARM/HOURS
button is pressed or the shaft speed monitor is E
disabled.
Harvest Screen 2 consists of Engine Power (E), Total
Grain Loss (F), Header Tilt (G) Spreader Direction F
(H).
The Total Grain Loss bar (F) is divided into 24
sections. The sections are turned ON to show the
TOTAL amount of grain loss for the rotor and the G
sieve.
Header Tilt (G) shows the amount and direction of tilt.
● No arrows = Tilt angle less than 0.3 degrees.
● One arrow = Tilt angle is more than 0.3. H
● The tilt angle value is displayed at the right of the
display section. The range is from 0 to 5. 0 is
displayed when no arrows are displayed. RD07J037
If Header Tilt is not installed, this section will be

blank.
Spreader Direction Control shows the direction and

angle of the spreader. If spreader direction control is
not installed, this section will be blank. This is
currently only a European option.
184
Checking Sensor Operation

ATTENTION: When performing this sensor test,
make sure engine is OFF and the key is ON.
1. Select the Grain Scan Change Screen (1) with

the Grain Scan keypad button (2). Use the up/
down keypad button (3) to adjust the sensitivity
to 70 or more for both the chaffer and rotor loss 1
sensors. Adjust the seed size to 12 or less.
2
3
RD07G048
2. Have another person moderately and rapidly

tap the left chaffer loss sensor sounding board
(4) with a pencil. The bar graph for the chaffer
loss should display up full. If the bar graph
does not display, the sensor needs to be
replaced or the wiring needs to be repaired.
4
3. Repeat the procedure for the right chaffer loss
sensor.
4. Repeat the procedure for the left rotor loss

sensor.
5. Repeat the procedure for the right rotor loss A1789
sensor.
NOTE: The rotor loss sensors (5) are located near

5
the grain bed augers (6).
A1782
185
FEEDER OPERATION
Feeder Reverser
The Combine is equipped with a feeder reverser
which is operable when the engine is running. The
operator can move the feeder conveyor in a reverse
direction from the inside of the cab. The feeder
reverser operates as follows:
1. Raise the reel all the way up to lift the Header

auger off the auger bottom to provide clearance
for the reverse crop flow.
2. Lift and pull the feeder clutch switch (1) rearward

to the REVERSE position.
1
3. When the feeder or Header is clear of material, RD07G032
retur n the feeder clutch switch to the OFF

position.
4. Lower the Header to the ground. Engage the

PARKING BRAKE and stop the engine and
remove the key. Remove any obstructions from
the feeder or Header.
Automatic Feeder Cutoff (AFC)

If the AFC control is programmed “ON” in the Set Up Stop the Combine. Turn the feeder switch to OFF and
Configuration Screens, and the feeder drive is use the feeder reverser procedure to clear the feeder
running, the instrumentation will monitor the feeder of obstruction.
speed and turn off the feeder drive if the feeder
speed drops below the following speeds: If the AFC is programmed “OFF”, at start-up, after the
self-test, the FEEDER ICON in the shaft speed
Non rock trap feeder 165 RPM monitor will flash for 5 seconds. The shaft speed
monitoring of the feeder will remain unaffected.
Rock Trap (30/23 gears) 144 RPM
Rock trap with speed up kit (35/18 183 RPM

Gears)
186
Rock Trap (If Equipped)

The rock trap uses a beater with three blades.
Each blade has an adjustable blade extension. As
the beater turns the blades and extensions drive
the rocks into the trap, forcing out any material that
has filled the trap. Empty the rock trap once a day.
When threshing in areas with a large quantity of
rocks, empty the rock trap more frequently.
IMPORTANT: If the rock trap is allowed to fill with

1
rocks, other rocks will pass into the Combine
resulting in possible damage to the rock trap and/or
the Combine.
NOTE: A 23-tooth driven sprocket is assembled with RH08D242

1. ROCK TRAP BEATER DRIVEN SPROCKET
the machine. (23-TOOTH) - STANDARD EQUIPMENT -
USED IN WRAPPING CONITIONS OR TO
The 23-tooth driven sprocket results in 612 RPM of REDUCE EXCESSIVE CROP DAMAGE
the rock trap beater at 2410 engine RPM. Used to
prevent wrapping green, weedy crops or to reduce
excessive crop damage and to assist with feeding
problems.
A dealer installed kit is available that replaces both

drive and driven sprockets with a 35 /18 set, resulting
in 913 RPM of rock trap beater at 2410 engine RPM.
This is used to provide maximum rock protection and
feeding capacity.
187
Emptying the Rock Trap

To empty the rock trap, do the following:
1. Raise the Header fully. Set the parking brake and 3

stop the engine.
2. Release the feeder safety lock from the storage

position. 4
3. Rotate the rock trap door latch (3) handle
COUNTERCLOCKWISE to open the rock trap
door (4). Empty the rock trap.
4. To close the rock trap door, rotate the handle

CLOCKWISE. RD07J038
ROCK TRAP DOOR CLOSED

5. Raise the feeder safety lock to the storage
position.
3
4
RD00E074
ROCK TRAP DOOR OPEN
188
Operating Recommendations
1. The blade extensions (5) have slotted holes for

adjustment. Operate with blade extensions out
for the best rock protection. Operate with the
bla de ex t ens i on s in fo r i n cr e as ed fee der
capacity.
RD01H211
2. Operate with the finger grate (if equipped) (6)
installed in short green crop conditions to get a
smooth flow of material from feeder to rotor.
R e m o ve t h e f i n g e r g r a t e fo r b e t t e r r o c k
protection. See your dealer for the finger grate.
A2417
A2426
189
Feeder Cradle Adjustment for Tire Size

Your feeder cradle was adjusted at the factory for
tire size. The angle of the feeder cradle can be
adjusted to maintain proper Header angle for
different tire sizes. 1
To adjust the feeder adapter to the tire size do the
following:
1. Remove the Header from the feeder. 1

2. Loosen the seven nuts (1) on each side of the
feeder housing.
RD07J046
3. Rotate the cradle around the pin (2) until the
desired angle is obtained according to the below
table.
NOTE: Changing cradle angle may require feeder

chain adjustments. See Feeder Chain information in
this section for maximum clearance of feeder chain
slat to feeder face.
2
RD07J047
190
4. The initial cradle angle should be adjusted as

follows:
A
TIRE SIZE CRADLE ANGLE
650/75R32 90
800/65R32 R1W 90
900/60R32 R1W 88
RD07M085
NOTE: Fine tune your adjustments as required by
field conditions.
5. Tighten the seven nuts (1) on each side of the

feeder to a torque of 555 to 620 Nm (408 to 460
lb. ft).
1
RD07J046
1 3
191
UNLOADER OPERATION
UNLOADER T UBE SWING SWITCH ( 1). The
unloader tube is controlled from the cab. The
unloader tube swing switch is located on the 1
p r o p u l s i o n c o n t r o l l eve r. T h i s i s a t w o way
momentary switch:
● LEFT - OUT
● RIGHT - IN
RD07G033
The switch operates in two modes dependent on

unloading auger status.
When the auger is engaged, the switch must be
depressed for any unloader tube movement in either
direction. When the switch is released, movement will
stop. This allows control while topping off a truck.
When the auger is not engaged, the switch operates
as a latching switch. When the switch is depressed in 2
either direction and released, the unloader tube will
continue to move to the end of travel, or stop when
the switch is depressed a second time.
If the operator engages the auger while in the
RH07G116
extending latch mode, the tube will continue to swing 1 3
out.
If the operator attempts to engage the auger while in
the retracting latch mode, the auger will not engage
and the tube will continue to move until it reaches the
cradle or one of the tube switches is pressed.
192
NOTE: The unloading auger will not operate if the

rear engine deck ladder is DOWN. Make sure ladder
is in the UP storage position. 3
UNLOADER AUGER ON/OFF SWITCH (3). The
unloader auger ON/OFF switch is also located on
the propulsion control lever. To start the unloader,
press and release the switch. To stop the unloader,
pres s a nd rel ea se th e swi tc h aga in . Th e
UNLOADER AUGER ON indicator lamp (4) (on the
instrument panel) will light when the unloader is
turned ON.
RD07G033
NOTE: If the switch is held and not released the
auger will not start.
NOTE: The unloading auger will not function if the

unloader tube is in the saddle.
RD07G116
WARNING: DO NOT enter the grain tank when the Combine is running. The rotating augers in the bottom
! of the grain tank can cause severe injury including possible loss of limbs. M192A
193
OPERATOR’S LADDER
The operator’s ladder can be adjusted to different
positions depending upon harvesting conditions or
transport requirements.
Full Forward or Transport Position

To pivot the ladder to the full forward or transport
position do the following:
Using Lower Control Lever
Push UP on the lower lever.

RD98G095
Pivot the ladder to the forward or transport position

in front of the Left tire.
IMPORTANT: Always make sure ladder safety

chains are properly connected.
RD07J040
RD07J042
194
Using Upper Control Lever
Pull UP on the upper lever.
Pivot the ladder to the forward or transport position in

front of the Left tire.
IMPORTANT: Always make sure ladder safety

chains are properly connected.
WARNING: Do Not operate in the field with

! the ladder in the forward position. Damage to
the ladder and/or deck can occur. M505
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the ladder locks into

the forward position before resuming Combine RD98G094
operations, ground travel or transporting.
RD07J041
195
Full Side Position

To pivot the ladder to the full side position, do the
following.
Using Lower Control Lever
Push UP on the lower lever and pivot the ladder to

the side position.
NOTE: There is a second side position that put the

ladder at approximately a 3/4 position when
additional side clearance is needed.
NOTE: To prevent ladder damage, the bottom step

RD98G095
can be removed for increased clearance when
operating in muddy or soft conditions.

the forward position before resuming Combine
RH07G005E
196
Using Upper Control Lever
Pull UP on the upper lever and pivot the ladder to

the side position.
NOTE: To prevent ladder damage, the bottom step

can be removed for increased clearance when
operating in muddy or soft conditions.

the forward position before resuming Combine
RD98G094
RD07J043
197
SIDE PANEL OPERATION

Side panels are located at the left front and rear and
right front and rear of the machine. The left front and
rear and right front panels open upward. The right
rear panel opens out from the rear. The side panels
are held open by hydraulic cylinders. The panel
latches are located under the “V” (1) in each side 1
panel.
● To open a panel, reach under the “V” and pull the
latch lever towards you.
● To close the panel, push down on the outside of
the panel until the latch is engaged.
WARNING: When closing side panels on

machine, ALWAYS close by placing your
hands on the outside of the panel and RH08D249
! pushing shut. DO NOT close panel by

grabbing latch release lever. Failure to
comply may result in moderate to serious
injury. M1280
Panel Locks
Latch Locks
The side panels can be locked in the closed position.

With the panel closed, move the lock from the open
position (2) to the locked position (3). Return the lock
to the open position (2) to open the panel again.
2 3
RI08E152
198
Transport Locks
There are transport locks on all side panels. These should be used when roading the machine or transporting by
truck
IMPORTANT: Transport locks must be in the locked position when roading the machine or transporting by truck or
machine damage can occur.
Front Panel
Open the left or right side front access door on the

side of the cab to access the locks..
RH08A005
From the locked position (4), push the transport lock
handle in.
4
RH08D245
Rotate the handle to the unlocked position (5) and
pull the handle back out. Reverse the procedure to
lock the panel.
RH08D246
199
Rear Panel
From the locked position (6), pull the transport lock

handle down.
RH08D297
Rotate the handle to the unlocked position and push

the handle up. Reverse the procedure to lock the
panel.
7
RH08D298
200
Side Panel Open Height Adjustment

The open height of the side panels can be adjusted
to suit operator requirements by moving the panel
end of the cylinder to a different adjustment hole.
Left and Right Front Panels
The left and right front side panel brackets are mirror
images and adjustment is the same. The illustration
shows the factory setting for the gas cylinder. The 8
rear bracket (8) and front bracket (9) adjustment limit
is 2 holes up, and 3 holes down from the factory
setting. Both cylinders must be moved an equal
number of holes. To move the cylinder, do the
following:
1. Use suitable equipment to support the side panel
in the open position.
2. Remove the cylinder retaining nut from the end
of the cylinder.
3. Move the cylinder end to the desired bracket 9
hole.
4. Install and tighten the cylinder retaining nut. Ri08e245
1 3
Left Rear Panel
The left rear side panel illustration shows the factory

setting for the gas cylinder. The rear bracket (10) and
front bracket (11) adjustment limit is 1 hole up or
down. Both cylinders must be moved an equal
number of holes. To move the cylinder, do the
following:
1. Use suitable equipment to support the side panel
in the open position. 10 11
2. Remove the cylinder retaining nut from the end
of the cylinder.
3. Move the cylinder end to the desired bracket
hole.
4. Install and tighten the cylinder retaining nut.
Ri08e246
1 3
201
Service Lamps
Your Combine is equipped with a portable service
lamp located under the left hand rear side panel. The
lamp has an on and off switch and a magnetic base.
The lamp can be plugged in to different connectors
around the Combine. Always return the lamp to the
storage base when not in use.
RD07M081
Front left portable lamp connector.
RD07M082
Front right portable lamp connector.
RD07M083
1 3
202
Engine compartment portable lamp connector.
RD07M084
There are permanent service lamps under the left

and right hand access panels (if equipped). The ON/
OFF switch for these lamps is under the left rear
access panel.
RD07M096
1 3
There are two permanent service lamp in the engine

compartment (if equipped). The ON/OFF switch for
these lamps is located to the left of the rear ladder.
RD07M097
203
204
6 - FIELD OPERATION
IDENTITY PRESERVED (IP) CROPS

Identity preserved (IP) grains are frequently referred ATTENTION: SPECIAL CAUTION - If the Combine is
to as specialty, high value, premium or sensitive to be first used in a specialty seed or edible seed
market grains. crop, it is suggested that the Combine be operated in
a non-sensitive crop to remove paint and other
Make sure your Combine and Grain Header are contaminates from various grain contact areas. This
thoroughly cleaned out and free of any debris before same precaution should be used when the Combine
harvesting specialty sensitive crops. has been in operation, then sits idle long enough for
rust to form on the grain contact areas. Also, if a non-
ATTENTION: Always wear protective devices, such sensitive crop has been used to remove paint and or
as safety goggles, respirator, etc. when cleaning your rust, the Combine will have to be sanitized of those
Combine. Make sure Combine engine is OFF, all seeds before being used in the specialty seed or
motion stopped and key removed. edible seed harvest.
205
6 - FIELD OPERATION
FIELD OPERATION
● Initial Crop Settings
● Troubleshooting
● Cutting and Feeding Components
● Threshing and Separating Components
● Grain Cleaning Components
● Grain Handling and Material Distribution Components
RH08C208
1. CUTTING AND FEEDING COMPONENTS 3. GRAIN CLEANING COMPONENTS
2. THRESHING AND SEPARATING 4. GRAIN HANDLING AND MATERIAL
COMPONENTS DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS
206
6 - FIELD OPERATION
AFX ROTOR - INITIAL CROP SETTINGS

The threshing, separating and cleaning settings in the table are furnished only as a guide and all settings shown
are for average crop conditions. Different crop and field conditions may require deviations from shown settings. Use
good threshing procedure and past experience to produce desired separation and cleaning results.
Chaffer Setting Shoe Setting

Rotor Concave Fan Grate
Inch (mm) (7) Inch (mm)
Speed Type
Speed Gear Type Type (RPM)
Crop (RPM) Range Indicator (4)Type (Inch) Front Middle Rear (Inch)
Alfalfa 650 Second 5 SW 1-1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1-1/8 Round 500 Slot
Gear (6.4) (9.5) (9.5) Hole
Barley 700 Third Gear 10 SW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 1-1/8 3/8 1000 Slot
(12.7) (12.7) (15.9) (9.5)
Beans - Lentil 300 First Gear 10 LW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 1-1/8 1/8 550 Slot
(12.7) (12.7) (15.9) (3.2)
Pinto 300 First Gear 15 LW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 3/8 850 Slot
(12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (9.5)
Sunflower 300 First Gear 25 LW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 1-1/8 5/16 770 Bar
(9.5) 12.7 15.9 (7.9)
Grass (5) 550 Second 10-20 SW 1-1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1-1/8 1/4 450 Slot /
Gear (6.4) (9.5) (9.5) (6.4) Solid
Bent (5) 900 Third Gear 0 SW 1-1/8 1/4 3/8 3/8 1-1/8 1/16 450 Slot
(6.4) (9.5) (9.5) (1.6)
Blue (5) 400 First Gear 7-8 SW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 1/16 500 Slot
(9.5) (12.7) (12.7) (1.6)
Brome (5) 500 Second 15 SW 1-1/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 1-1/8 5/16 650 Slot
Gear (15.9) (19.1) (19.1) (7.9)
Rye (5) 650 Second 20-25 SW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 1/4 450 Slot
Gear (9.5) (12.7) (12.7) (6.4)
Crested 700 Third Gear 10 SW 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/16 650(1) Slot
Wheat (5)
White 900 Third Gear 0 SW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 1/16 500 Slot
Clover (5) (9.5) (12.7) (12.7) (1.6)
Corn 400 Second 15-25 LW 1-5/8 CLOZ 1/2 1/2 5/8 1-5/8 CLOZ 3/8 1000 Bar
500 Gear (12.7) (12.7) (15.9) (9.5) 1200
1-5/8 CORN 1/4 1/2 1/2 5/16
(6.4) (12.7) (12.7) (7.9)
Corn (with 300 First or 15-25 LW 1-5/8 CLOZ 1/2 1/2 5/8 1-5/8 CLOZ 9/16 1000 Bar
straight 450 Second (12.7) (12.7) (15.9) (14.3) 1200
separator bars) Gear 1-5/8 CORN 1/4 1/2 1/2 1/2
(1)(2) (6.4) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7)
Edible Beans 300 First Gear 15-25 LW/SL 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 3/8 900 Bar
(Navy, Pinto.) 400 (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) 1-5/8 CLOZ (9.5) 1100
1-5/8 CLOZ 1/8 3/8 3/8 5/16
(3.2) (9.5) (9.5) (7.9)
Flax 850 Third Gear 5 SW 1-1/8 1/4 1/4 1/2 1-1/8 1/8 500 Slot
(6.4) (6.4) (12.7) (3.2)
Maize/Milo 450 Second 15 LW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 5/16 1100 Bar
Gear (9.5) (12.7) (12.7) 1-5/8 CLOZ (7.9)
1-5/8 CLOZ 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/8
(3.2) (6.4) (6.4) (3.2)
207
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Chaffer Setting Shoe Setting

Rotor Concave Fan Grate
Inch (mm) (7) Inch (mm)
Speed Type
Speed Gear Type Type (RPM)
Crop (RPM) Range Indicator (4)Type (Inch) Front Middle Rear (Inch)
Mustard 300 First Gear 20 SW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 1/16 800 Slot
(12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (1.6)
Oats 600 Second 15 LW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 5/8 1-1/8 3/8 780 Slot
Gear (12.7) (12.7) (15.9) (9.5)
Popcorn 400 First Gear 5-15 LW 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/4 970 Bar
Peas - Black 300 First Gear 10 LW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 3/8 700 Bar
Eye (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (9.5)
Rape 400 First Gear 20 SW 1-1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 1-1/8 1/16 600 Slot
(6.4) (9.5) (12.7) (1.6)
Rice (3)(2) 850 Third Gear 10 LW 1-1/8 3/8 3/8 1/2 1-1/8 5/16 880 Bar
(9.5) (9.5) (12.7) (7.9)
Wild Rice 600 Second 5 LW 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 1/2 1-1/8 9/16 850 Bar
Gear (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (14.29)
Safflower 300 First Gear 20 LW 1-1/8 3/8 1/2 5/8 1-1/8 5/16 800 Bar
(9.5) (12.7) (15.9) (7.9)
(1) Straight separator bars may be needed for harvesting corn yielding more than 150 bushels per acre (9400
kilograms per hectare) and in other crops during dry conditions. Increase fan speed to 1250 RPM in wet corn.
(2) Once installed, straight separator bars need to be removed only for harvesting rice and edible beans and similar
viney crops.
(3) Tough rice requires the use of spiked rasp bar over the concave area and the grate area. Set concave indicator
at Number 20 when spiked rasp bars are used in the concave area.
IMPORTANT: Concave zero must be re calibrated after installation of the spiked rasp bars or the rasp bars could
make contact with the concave.
(4) LW - Large Wire [6.4 mm (1/4 Inch) Diameter]; SW - Small Wire [4.76 mm (3/16 Inch) Diameter]
(5) Use of non-spiked rasp bars in all positions is recommended for most grass seed harvest conditions. Spiked
bars may be helpful in extremely damp crops. Rotate cleaning fan cutoff rearward to the vertical position to reduce
air volume.
(6) Some soybeans may require rotor speeds up to 700 RPM or more.
(7) The front portion of the chaffer sieve is by design, to be set slightly more closed than the rest of the sieve.
208
6 - FIELD OPERATION
TROUBLESHOOTING THRESHING AND SEPARATING SYSTEM

To correct the specific harvesting problems listed below, follow and complete only the adjustments described. The
number indicates the sequence in which each adjustment should be made.
IMPORTANT: The single most common misadjustment is setting rotor speed too slow. High moisture crops will
require higher rotor speeds.
A. Damaged Grain or Corn in Sample G. Grain Blowing Over Chaffer

1. Decrease Rotor Speed 1. Reduce Air Blast
2. Open Shoe Sieve 2. Open Chaffer Sieve
3. Inspect Concaves for Plugging 3. Inspect Concaves for Plugging
(unplug and set concave closer (unplug and set concave closer)
4. Open Concave
5. Remove Fillers from Right of First Concave H. Shoe Sieve Overloading
(if installed)
1. Close Chaffer Sieve
6. Remove Some Wires from Concaves
2. Open Shoe Sieve
3. Increase Air Blast
B. Kernels Left on Cob
4. Decrease Rotor Speed
1. Increase Rotor Speed 5. Decrease Forward Travel speed
2. Close Concave
I. Heavy Stems in Sample
C. Excess Cob Breakage
1. Close Shoe Sieve
1. Decrease Rotor Speed 2. Close Chaffer Sieve
2. Open Concave 3. Increase Air Blast
3. Remove Channels from Inside of Rear Grates. 4. Decrease Rotor speed
5. Open Concave
D. Unthreshed Heads or Pods -
White Caps in Sample J. Fines in Sample
1. Increase Rotor Speed 1. Increase Air Blast
2. Close Concave 2. Close Shoe Sieve
3. Close Shoe Sieve 3. Close Chaffer Sieve
4. Add Remaining Fillers to First Concave 4. Decrease Rotor Speed
5. Add Filler to Right of First Concave 5. Open Concave
E. Loss of Kernels Out of Rotor K. Small Bits of Cob in Sample

1. Inspect Concaves for Plugging (unplug and set 1. Close Chaffer Sieve
concave closer) 2. Decrease Rotor Speed
2. Decrease Rotor Speed 3. Close Shoe Sieve
3. Position Grate Vanes to Rear or Slow Position 4. Increase Air Blast
4. Remove Fillers from Right of First Concave 5. Open Concave
(if installed)
5. Remove Some Wires from the Concave L. Excessive Power Consumption
6. Move Concave Vanes to Rear Position
1. Increase Rotor Speed
2. Open Concave
F. Grain Loss Over Chaffer
3. Decrease Forward Travel Speed
1. Increase Air Blast 4. Remove Channels from Inside of Rear Grates
2. Open Chaffer Sieve
3. Decrease Rotor Speed
4. Cover Slots in Rear Portion of Cage
209
6 - FIELD OPERATION
M. Distribution Heavy on Right Side N. Distribution Heavy on Left Side

1. Add Filler to Right of First Concave 1. Remove Fillers from Right of First Concave
2. Add, Remove or Adjust Auger Bed Paddle (if installed)
3. Decrease Rotor Speed 2. Open Concave
4. Close Concave 3. Decrease Rotor Speed
5. Decrease Forward Travel Speed 4. Increase Rotor Speed
5. Add, Remove or Adjust Auger Bed Paddle
6. Remove Some Wires from Concaves
8. Inspect Concave for “zero” at 12th Bar of the
Concave
210
6 - FIELD OPERATION
CUTTING AND FEEDING
Controls and Adjustments
3
9
8
4
5 6
7
RH08C209
1. FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN 6. *REEL LIFT CYLINDER

2. REEL 7. *REEL FORE/AFT ADJUSTMENT
3. *AUGER TO STRIPPER 8. FEEDER CONVEYOR DRUM
CLEARANCE 9. TWO SPEED HEADER DRIVE (IF EQUIPPED)
4. *AUGER FINGERS
5. *KNIFE SECTIONS
*SEE HEADER OPERATOR’S MANUAL
211
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Introduction
The function of the Header and feeder is to cut the Pickup Reel
crop, gather it and feed it to the rotor in the most
efficient manner. Crop loss and feeding performance A pickup reel is advantageous in down and lodged
are measurements of the Header’s performance. grain because it ensures a clean, shear cut by
actually lifting the crop and positioning it in front of
There are two basic types of reels: the bat reel, the cutterbar. Tine angle should be adjusted so tines
primarily used in standing grain, and the pickup reel enter the grain to lift the crop and help in moving the
which is beneficial in down and tangled crops. There crop to the Header auger. If tines are adjusted too far
are three main reel adjustments: (1) speed; (2) height rearward they will carry the crop around the reel.
and (3) fore and aft position. Pickup reels also When making pickup reel adjustments, check to
require an adjustment to properly set the pitch of the make sure the tines do not strike the cutterbar.
tines.
Fore and aft positioning of the pickup reel is
The reel’s function is to hold the crop to be cut and determined by whether the grain is standing or laying
assist in crop delivery to the Header auger. down. The reel is generally up and back for standing
crop and down and forward to lift crop which is laying
Bat Reel down below the cutter bar cutting height.
Reel speed RPM should normally be about 2 times Cutting Parts

the travel speed in MPH (slightly faster in down and
lodged crops). Reel speed should be adjusted to Proper maintenance and timely section replacement
divide the crop for gentle delivery to the cutterbar. It will increase cutter bar efficiency. See your Header
should not be so fast that it will shatter standing grain operator’s manual for detailed information.
or so slow that it will push the grain away from the
cutterbar.
Two Speed Header Drive Gearbox
Reel height should be just low enough to catch all the (If Equipped)
heads. If the reel is too low, heads will hang across it
and be carried around. If the reel is too high, reel The two speed Header drive gearbox is located on
bats will shatter grain from the heads. Multiple cuts the lower front of the right hand side of the feeder
on stalks indicate that the reel is too high or too slow. housing. It provides the option of operating the
Header drive jackshaft at normal speed of 575 rpm or
Fore and aft positioning of the reel is determined by with a 15% speed increase of 662 rpm.
ground speed and length of straw. As a general rule,
with bat-type reels the longer the straw or the faster When shifting from one position to the other, the
the ground speed, the further forward the reel should gearbox shift collar may not properly align with the
be positioned. spline teeth and it may be necessary to roll the
gearbox shafts to a different position in order to get
the shift lever to a fully engaged position. This can be
done by using the feeder reverser switch on the right
hand console and then engaging the lever.
IMPORTANT: Be sure the lever is fully engaged

before operating the Combine.
A spring latch plate on the shift lever is to provide

support for the lever in position 1 to prevent the
weight of the lever from trying to disengage the shift
collar.
212
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Feeder Chain
Feeder chain tension should be adjusted so the
washer (1) on the adjustment tension spring (2) is in
the middle of the indicator bracket window (3).
3
2
1
RH08A037
With the locknut loose, adjust both LH and RH
springs so the washer is with in the window. Tighten
the lock nut.
NOTE: After making the adjustment, make sure 1

there is no feeder chain creep. If there is, fine tune
the adjustment until the feeder chain creep stops.
3
RI08C167
CORRECT SETTING
The feeder chain slat tip should be running no
further rearward of the feeder face than 38.1 mm (1-
1/2 inches). In some cases it may be necessary to 1
add links to the feeder chain. Maintain a clearance
between the slat tip and the auger flights. 2
Three lower-drum stop positions may be utilized to
help achieve the desired feeding throughout.
Most crops utilize the mid position, although heavier 3

crops such as corn will require raising the drum to
the upper position. A rock trap is available for most
crops and offers maximum rock protection. See
Conveyor Drum Adjustment in this section of the A25920
manual. 1. MAXIMUM 38.1 mm (1-1/2 INCH) CLEARANCE

2. FEEDER CHAIN
3. CHAIN SLAT
Feeder chain slats are bolted to the feeder chain.
DO NOT reuse the mounting hardware. New
hardware provided with the slat must be installed
when the slat is replaced. Torque the feeder slat
retaining bolts to 27 to 34 Nm (20 to 25 lb. ft.). DO
NOT overtighten.
213
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Auger Adjustments
Header auger adjustments and optional auger RPM The retractable fingers should clear the Header
combinations are often overlooked when setting the bottom by 3.2 to 9.5 mm (1/8 to 3/8 inch). If straw
Header. Check for correct fore and aft auger position, feeds into the Header in a thick mass or windrow and
retractable finger position, auger speed and auger in heavy crop conditions, better feeding may result if
stripper adjustment. Proper stripper clearance will the fingers are adjusted away from the Header
reduce material feeding over the auger. bottom so the auger fingers are at a maximum
extension at the 10 o’clock position (as viewed from
The auger should clear the strippers at closest point the Left end of the Header) on the front auger face.
by not more than 3.2 mm (1/8 inch). The auger
should clear the Header bottom at closest point by Optional auger speed sprockets for 2000 Series grain
n o t m o r e t h a n 1 2 . 7 m m ( 1 / 2 i n c h ) fo r m o s t heads are available for various crop conditions. They
conditions. If combining coarse crops, heavy down include:
crops or windrows, a 25.4 mm (1 inch) or more
clearance might be required to prevent plugging the
● 152 RPM - 56 Tooth (Standard Sprocket)
auger. ● 170 RPM - 50 Tooth
Stripper extensions extend stripper length inward

● 189 RPM - 45 Tooth
toward the feeder house opening. These extensions ● 213 RPM - 40 Tooth
are used to fit different width feeder openings.
Use slower speeds when shatter losses are high or
wrapping occurs. Use higher speeds to match auger
speed to highest ground speed or to improve feeding
in heavy yielding crops.
Feeder Conveyor Adjustments
Chain Adjustments
Keep the feeder conveyor chain adjusted correctly at IMPORTANT: Be sure to adjust the chain evenly on
all times. Inspect the chain for correct tension after both sides to prevent excessive wear on both chains
the first 50 hours of operation and at regular intervals and sprockets.
thereafter (see Feeder Conveyor Chain Adjustment
in this manual). The conveyor chain tension is adjusted by adjusting
the spring load on the eyebolt.
214
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Conveyor Drum Fore/Aft Adjustment
The fore/aft position of the conveyor drum must be

adjusted correctly to obtain correct feeding of
material from the Header auger to the feeder. The
1
position of the drum must be adjusted for a
maximum clearance (1) of 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) from 2
the conveyor chain slat (3) to the feeder face (4).
NOTE: In short crops the 38 mm (1-1/2 inch)

maximum may need to be reduced.
4 3
A25920
1. 3/8 mm (1-1/2 INCH) CLEARANCE
2. FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN
3. CHAIN SLAT
4. FEEDER FACE
The drum is adjusted fore and aft with the conveyor

chain adjusting bolts (5) on each side of the feeder
and by adding or removing chain links in the
conveyor chain (2).
Before adding or removing chain links, check the

feeder conveyor chain for correct tension (see
Feeder Conveyor Chain Adjustment in this manual).
When the chain tension is correct, add or remove

links from the conveyor chain as necessary to obtain
the correct clearance. After adding or removing chain 5
links, the chain tension must be adjusted again.
RH08A037
1. CONVEYOR CHAIN ADJUSTING BOLT
215
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Conveyor Drum Lower Stop Adjustment
RH08A037 RH08A041
RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE

The lower stops for the conveyor drum can be
adjusted to keep the drum in a raised position. To
adjust the lower stops, loosen the nuts on the stop 1
bolts. Raise or lower the drum and slide the stop
bolts in the slots to the desired position and tighten 2
the nuts. The recommended settings are as follows:
For Heavy Crops (Corn) ..................... Upper Position 3

For Average Crops............................. Middle Position
For Crops Hard to Feed...................... Lower Position
181L7
NOTE: Always adjust the lower stops to the same 1. UPPER POSITION
position on both sides of the feeder. 2. MIDDLE POSITION
3. LOWER POSITION
216
6 - FIELD OPERATION
RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR (IF EQUIPPED)

The accumulator (1) has dry nitrogen gas on one
side of a diaphragm and hydraulic oil on the other
1
side. When hydraulic oil enters the accumulator, the
diaphragm is pushed toward the nitrogen gas side.
As the nitrogen gas is compressed the accumulator
acts as a shock absorber between the Combine and
the Header. The accumulator will cushion the
bouncing motion of the Header when driving the
Combine over rough ground.
The accumulator located behind the service access

door on the Left side Operator’s platform is turned
ON and OFF electrically by a rotar y switch (2)
located under the Operator’s Right arm rest. RH07G103
WARNING: The accumulator contains a

compressed gas. DO NOT drop the
! accumulator or expose the accumulator to
temperatures above 300°F (149°C). M183A
2
WARNING: The accumulator must be
serviced by qualified service personnel only.
DO NOT service the accumulator before
! referring to the Repair Manual. The
accumulator contains compressed gas and
must be discharged before servicing. M424
RD97G033
1. ACCUMULATOR
2. ACCUMULATOR SWITCH
For the accumulator to work correctly, the pressure of

the nitrogen gas must be lower than the normal
feeder lift cylinder pressure. The accumulator is
factory charged to 6895 kPa (1000 PSI) which should
accommodate most Header applications.
217
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Operational Check and Adjustments

To adjust the pressure, do the following:
2
1. Turn the Accumulator Switch to the ON position.
2. Lower the Corn Head, Grain or Pick-Up Header

to the ground and then hold the Header lift switch
in the DOWN position for 5 seconds. Turn the
Accumulator Switch to the OFF position.
3. Raise the Header until the cutter bar or stalk rolls

are 305 to 457 mm (12 to 18 inches) above the
ground.
4. Measure the height of the cutter bar or stalk rolls. RH07G103
5. Turn the Accumulator Switch to the ON position.

The Header must drop a distance of 25 to 76 mm
(1 to 3 inches). If the Header did not lower this
amount, remove the accumulator valve guard
cap (3) and release a small amount of nitrogen
gas until the Header drops the proper amount.
NOTE: 25 mm (1 inch) of drop is all that is

necessary to achieve good ride control.
6. If the Header drops too much, have the

accumulator serviced (recharged) by your dealer.
DO NOT recharge the accumulator with oxygen,
air or any other gas, except dry nitrogen gas. See
your dealer!
218
6 - FIELD OPERATION
THRESHING AND SEPARATING
Control and Adjustments
4 6
3 5
1 2
12
10
7 11
8
9
RH08C208
1. TRANSITION CONE 7. ROTOR

2. TRANSITION CONE DIRECTIONAL TRANSPORT VANES 8. ROTOR IMPELLER BLADES
3. ROTOR RASP BARS 9. CONCAVE
4. ROTOR CAGE 10. ROTOR CAGE DIRECTIONAL TRANSPORT VANES
5. ROTOR DISCHARGE HOUSING 11. SEPARATOR BARS
6. ROTOR BELT DRIVE 12. SEPARATOR GRATES
219
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Introduction
The threshing and separating functions of AXIAL- With the AXIAL-FLOW® concept kernel damage is
FLOW ® Combines are performed in the rotor cage greatly decreased, thanks to the broader acceptable
area. Material is fed from the feeder to the impeller range of settings for rotor speed and concave
blade area of the rotor and flows rearward through adjustment, compared with that of a conventional
the machine. The two most important components to Combine.
the threshing and separating processes are the rotor
and the concaves. Movement of material through the rotor cage area is
controlled by transport cage vanes. Relocating the
The rotor threshes the grain and assists in the vanes by pivoting them into a more vertical position
rearward travel of the material through the machine. (rearward position) results in additional spiraling of
The sooner the grain is threshed out of the heads, crop material for increased threshing and separation.
the more opportunity the grain has to separate from A more hor izontal position (forward position)
the material. increases crop material flow rearward.
The function of the three-section concave is twofold. Separation is completed in the rear half of the cage
First, the concaves must hold the material long area by using grates between the rotor and cleaning
enough to ensure complete threshing. Second, the system. See Grates in this manual for a description
concaves must have enough capacity to permit the of the available grates and their applications.
grain to separate into the cleaning system once the
grain has been threshed. Operators should not hesitate to make adjustments
w h e n n e c e s s a r y bu t s h o u l d m a k e o n l y o n e
Threshing area adjustments properly made will assist adjustment at a time. If no improvement is seen,
you in obtaining maximum machine performance. reset to the original position and proceed to another
Rotor speed and concave clearance are the two most adjustment.
important adjustments.
Rotor speed is important to the control of material

throughput in the rotor cage.
The two adjustments available to the concaves are

their clearance from the rotor rasp bars and/or the
removal or addition of wires, filler bars or interrupter
bars.
Concave clearance is determined by the threshing

difficulty of the crop. For harder threshing conditions
a close setting is preferred and for easier threshing
conditions, a wider setting is recommended. The
concave indicator setting should never exceed
setting Number 25. The wider selections should be
used only as clean-cut positions. In hard threshing
crops, the concave “0” adjustment should be
checked.
Rotor speeds and concave clearances must be

matched to crop and conditions for most efficient and
productive operation. One common mistake is
running the rotor too slow and setting the concave
too open for the crop. This results in slow movement
of the material, inefficient threshing and separation
and a loss in machine capacity.
220
6 - FIELD OPERATION
In the Field Separation
After operating a distance in the field (at least 100 Most of the separation of the crop from the straw or
yards) check the threshed straw behind the Combine. husks occurs in the concave area dur ing the
threshing cycle. Crop not separated in either the
If all the grain has been completely threshed out of concave area or the grate area will be lost out of the
the straw and the straw appears to be mangled or rear of the Combine. These losses are referred to as
overthreshed, do the following: rotor losses.
NOTE: In AXIAL-FLOW Combine threshing, the To Determine if Losses are from Rotor or
straw will be more chopped up, particularly if it is Cleaning System
drier.
1. Remove the straw spreaders.
1. Slow the rotor rpm.
2. With a shovel, catch a short sample at the rear of
2. Open the concaves. the hood. Check kernel loss from rotor.
3. A combination of 1 and 2. 3. With a shovel, catch a short sample at the rear of

the chaffer. Check kernel loss from the cleaning
In corn, if cobs are broken, follow the same steps. system.
If cobs still have kernels attached and threshing does 4. Compare samples to determine where losses
not appear to be complete, do the following: are occurring.
1. Speed up rotor.
2. Tighten concave.
3. A combination of 1 and 2.
In grain, if the crop still appears not to be threshed

and if not already installed, install a set of narrow
spaced wire concaves (7/16 inch between center of
wires).
Generally, high rotor speeds will complete the

th r es h i ng . C l os i ng th e c o nc ave wi l l i m pr ove
threshing. If the concave is closed, check the quality
of the sample in the grain tank. If skinning or cracking
has occurred, open the concave slightly and slow the
rotor rpm.
Separating and Cleaning Losses

Before making unnecessary adjustments to the
Combine, check for seed loss by using the method
described under Seed Loss Tables. If, after checking,
it is found that the loss is from the separator, then
proceed as follows to determine if it is from the rotor
or cleaning system:
221
6 - FIELD OPERATION
To Correct for Rotor Losses
1. Check to see if the concave is plugged. 6. In some peculiar conditions, moving the concave
vanes (6) to a less severe angle will help reduce
A. If plugged and packed with mud, this is rotor losses. Although moving the vanes to this
generally caused by running Header too less severe angle could cause increased use of
close to the ground. Clean the concaves horsepower and increase in cleaning system
and raise the Header height. loads.
B. If plugged with crop material check concave 7. In some edible bean or soybean crops it will be
to rotor clearance. Generally this type of necessary to increase the speed of the rotor. An
plugging is caused by excessive concave indication of poor material flow is rotor rumble
opening. and possible slugging in mor e adverse
conditions.
2. Check rotor speed to setting as indicated in table
for that particular crop. 8. In very heavy crops or high yielding corn crops
where large amounts of material other than grain
A. Extremely high speeds or extremely low are going through the machine it might be
speeds can add to rotor losses. necessary to slow the ground speed to reduce
the rotor losses.
3. In corn with slotted grates, channels should be
on the inside of the grates between the slotted Rotor losses should be kept as low as possible by
h o l e s . U s e o f k ey s t o c k g r a t e s i s h i g h l y doing what has been previously mentioned but you
recommended. must remember that opening the concave by
removing concave wires and excessive rotor speeds
4. In grain with slotted grates, the channels should and/or too tight concave settings can overload the
be on the outside of the grates across the holes. cleaning system. The incidence of cleaning overload
In some cases, in grain, it will be necessary to has been greatly reduced with extended sieves and
move the channels to a position outside the the Cross Flow® fan, so rotor loss reduction methods
grates and between the slotted holes. Use of can be more aggressive.
keystock grates in grains is recommended if
straw quality is not of great importance. NOTE: Concaves or grate varieties can be
intermixed to obtain required results.
5. All machines in corn should have the wide wire
spaced concaves (3/4 inch center distance of
wires). In some grain crops use of the wide wire
spaced concave will be beneficial in reducing
rotor losses. Priority of installing large wire
concaves should be 3rd, 2nd and 1st positions.
222
6 - FIELD OPERATION
ROTOR
Three Speed Gear Case

The three speed gear case is controlled by a lever
below the right rear trim panel. Push the lever to
the Left - Number 1 Position for LOW; Number 2
Position for MID-RANGE and Number 3 Position
for HIGH speed. “N” Position between the numbers
is the NEUTRAL Positions. Stop the engine
before shifting the gears.
NOTE: Be sure the gear case is fully engaged in the

detent before operating.
RH08A035
Rotor Speed Setting

The rotor speed can be changed from the inside
of the cab while the Combine is operating. Use
the rotor speed control switch on the Right
console to change the rotor speed. Push on the
rear half of the switch to decrease the rotor
speed. Push on the front half of the switch to
increase the rotor speed (see Initial Crop Settings
for the recommended starting speed). Adjust the
speed further according to crop conditions.
A24293
Automatic Separator Cutoff (ASC)

If the ASC control is programmed “ON” in the Set Up The cause of the shut down (crop plugging) must be
Configuration Screens, and the rotor is running, the corrected before normal operation can continue. See
instrumentation will monitor the rotor speed. If the C l e a r i n g t h e R o t o r i n t h i s s e c t i o n fo r m o r e
rotor speed drops to 30% of the rotor alarm set point information.
for one second, the separator and feeder will be shut
down. Example: If the ASC is programmed “OFF” at start up, after the
self test, the ROTOR ICON in the shaft speed
● 1000 RPM rotor speed
monitor will flash for 5 seconds. The shaft speed
● 85% alarm setting monitoring of the rotor will remain unaffected.
● 1000 x 85 = 850 RPM alarm ON setting
● 850 RPM x .30 = 255 RPM shut down speed
223
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Clearing the Rotor
WARNING: When clearing the rotor, Do Not allow anyone near the rotor drive belt or inside the engine
! compartment when the engine is running. Serious injury or death may occur. M507
If a large amount of crop cannot be cleared from

the rotor under nor mal operation, proceed as
follows:
1. Disengage the separator and feeder. Stop the
engine.
2. Lower the concave to the 50 position for clean
out (it may be necessary to do this manually).
1
3. Shift the rotor gear case to NEUTRAL using the
auxiliary shifter located between the rotor gear
case and the engine. It may be necessary to
remove pressure from gears inside gear case by
moving the rotor with the rocking wrench. Adjust
RD05D069
the rotor speed until the drive belt is in the mid
1. ROTOR ROCKING WRENCH LOCATION
range position on both the drive and driven
pulleys.
4. Shift the rotor gear case to LO.
5. Start the engine and move the throttle lever to
the half throttle position.
6. Engage the separator drive. If the rotor does not
clear, immediately disengage the separator
drive, stop the engine and remove the key from
the key switch.
IMPORTANT: If the rotor does not clear immediately,

failure to disengage the separator drive may damage
the drive belt.
7. Use the rotor rocking wrench (3) to move the
rotor back and forth.
8. If the rotor cannot be cleared, the concaves and
grates will have to be removed and some of the
straw must be removed by hand (see Concave
Removal and Grate Removal).
9. Use the rotor rocking wrench again to move the
rotor.
10. When the rotor is clear, install the concave and
grates.
11. Put the rotor rocking wrench in the storage
position.
NOTE: Be sure to adjust the concave to the correct

position after clearing the rotor. Change the rotor
gear ratio and rotor speed back to the original
setting.
224
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Cage Transport Vanes

The top of the rotor cage has transport vanes to help
move the crop from the front to the rear of the rotor. 1
The transport vanes are adjustable within slotted
holes in the rotor cage to advance or retard the crop
flow through the rotor cage. The initial factory setting
for the transport vanes over the concave and grate
areas is in the middle position for all Combines. To
reduce rotor losses in certain conditions, adjust the 2
transport vanes over the grate area, to the rear
(retard) position, first. If the rotor loss must still be
reduced, adjust the transport vanes over the concave
area to the retarded position. Adjusting the lower end
of the transpor t vanes rearward can increase
horsepower and fuel requirements. Adjusting the RD01H099R
transport vanes forward can increase material flow

and ground speed and can also reduce horsepower
and fuel requirements. For average crop conditions,
adjust the transport vanes over both the concave
area and the grate area to the middle position.
Adjust the transport vanes as follows:
1. Remove the Left separator side panels.
2. Loosen the three nuts, on each transport vane to 3

be adjusted, to within 3 to 5 mm (1/8 to 3/16 inch)
from the end of the bolts.
RD01H100
1. TIE PLATE
2. CONCAVE AREA
3. GRATE AREA
225
6 - FIELD OPERATION
1
2
RD01H100
1
1. TRANSPORT VANE 3. POSITIONING HOLES FOR MIDDLE POSITION ONLY
2. LOWER END
3. Move the lower ends of the transport vanes

forward or rearward as required. The transport
va nes over the grate ar ea c an b e moved
individually. The transpor t vanes over the
concave area are connected in pairs with tie
plates.
Forward (Advance) Position........Vane to front of hole

Middle Position ..................Vane centered under hole
Rear (Retard) Position ................ Vane to rear of hole
4. Put a punch through the vane positioning hole to

check for middle position only.
175784A1
5. Tighten the nuts on the transport vanes. Tighten
the center nuts first. Tighten the nuts on the
lower ends second and tighten the nuts on the
upper ends last. Tighten the nuts to a torque of
47 to 54 Nm (35 to 40 lb. ft.).
6. Install the Left separator side panels.
226
6 - FIELD OPERATION
AFX Rotor Assembly
3 2
4
RD02E265
1. RASP BAR EXTENDED WEAR CHROME ALLOY SHOWN
2. SEPARATOR BAR - EXTENDED WEAR SHOWN
3. EXTENDED WEAR ROTOR
4. IMPELLER (EXTENDED WEAR) SERVICE PACKAGE IS
AVAILABLE THROUGH YOUR DEALER
The AFX Rotor is available for threshing and

separating all crops. This rotor can greatly improve
performance in any damp crop, such as edible
beans, rice, damp windrowed crop and green stem
soybeans.
NOTE: The rice rotor is similar to the AFX rotor

except there are spiked rasp bars on the entire length
of the rotor.
Rasp bars with spikes or without spikes can be used

with the AFX rotor. For most conditions rasp bars
without spikes are installed over the concave and
separator grate areas. If material flow through the
Combine becomes restricted due to wet/damp
conditions, install rasp bars with spikes over the
separator grate area and if material flow continues to
be a problem, rasp bars with spikes can be installed
over the concave area (the concave stop bolts will
require adjustment. See Concave Adjustment in this
manual). Tighten the mounting bolts for the rasp bars
to a torque of 129 to 146 Nm (95 to 105 lb. ft.).
The AFX rotor can be used to harvest corn and grain.

When the AFX rotor is installed in corn or grain
Combines, straight separator bars will be substituted
for horizontally aligned pairs of rasp bars. Eight
straight separator bars are installed on the rotor for
use in corn. Four straight separator bars are installed
on the rotor for use in grain.
227
6 - FIELD OPERATION
The position of the standard eight or twelve straight separator bars for a Corn Combine equipped with the AFX
Rotor is as shown below:
Option:
● It is possible to add two or four additional separator bars over the concave area to enhance separation.
● The bars reduce high moisture concave plugging.
● The bars increase power consumption. Expect to remove the bars when harvesting green stem soybeans or
other crops with green/damp stems.
● Expect to run more open concave to reduce the power requirement.
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
RI03K008
1. Corn Combine straight separator bar position in concave area are only necessary in high yielding corn when
rotor loss is excessive.
2. Optional separator bar position.
228
6 - FIELD OPERATION
The position of the standard eight to twelve straight separator bars for a AXIAL-FLOW® Corn Combine equipped
with the AFX rotor is as shown below:
4
RI03M010
4. AFX rotor straight separator bar position. The position of the four straight separator bars in a
Combine equipped for use in small grains with the
5. AFX rotor optional separator bar position (if AFX rotor is as shown below:
required).
RI03M011
6. AFX rotor grain Combine straight separator bar position.
229
6 - FIELD OPERATION
NOTE: AFX Rotors have four leading rasp bars added in front of the original specialty bar placement. these bars
are intended to disperse crop before the crop moves over the concaves. The leading rasp bar retaining bolts align
with the transition cone flange. A special low profile socket wrench is required to remove the front rasp bars on the
AFX Rotors. The special low profile socket wrenches are available from your dealer:
● AFX rotor requiring U.S. standard socket - order 87417745.
● AFX rotor requiring metric socket - order 87313396.
230
6 - FIELD OPERATION
CONCAVE
Setting the Concave

The clearance between the rotor and the concave
can be set electrically from the cab or manually from
the Left side of the Combine.
Electrical Setting
A switch on the Right console opens and closes the

concaves. Plus (+) opens the concaves (increases
clearance). Minus (-) closes the concaves
( d e c r e a s e s c l e a r a n c e ) . W h i l e t h e sw i t c h i s
depressed, Combine Info Screen 1 will be displayed
and a number representing the relative position of
the concaves will be displayed in the first section.
RD07G026
The number will vary from 00 to 50 with 00 being fully
closed.
RD07J049
231
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Manual Setting
A 3/4 inch (19 mm) wrench or socket is required to

manually adjust the concaves from the Left side of
the separator by tur ning a hex shaft (1) in the
desired direction.
Manual operation may be required to break the

concave free in a slugged rotor condition before the
electrical adjuster can move it.
Different crops and conditions require different 1

settings. See Initial Crop Settings for a starting point.
The fully open position is used only when additional
clearance is needed to clear the rotor. Refer to
Clearing the Rotor. RD07J050
1. HEX SHAFT
NOTE: When the concave is set to the CLOSED
position, the rotor must not make contact with the
concave throughout an entire revolution of the rotor.
WARNING: Unless instructed otherwise never service or make adjustments to the machine with the engine
! running. Before making adjustments, put the shift control lever in Neutral and set the park brake OR put the
shift control lever in park position as equipped. M147C
232
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Adjusting Concave Position
A1906.55
The right to left position of the concave under the

rotor can affect the threshing results of the Combine.
The concave support pipe (1) and plate are equipped
with drawbolts to adjust the concave position. The 2
initial position for the concave is with the 11th to 14th
concave bar from the left closest to the rotor. When
unthreshed heads become a problem, the concave
position should be checked and adjusted so the 12th
length concave bar makes contact with the rotor.
3
Adjust the concave position as follows:
1. Lower the concave to position 3.

RD01H092
2. Loosen the nuts on the Right concave support

pipe eyebolts.
3. Loosen the five retaining bolts (2) on both the

front and rear concave support pipe and plate.
4. Adjust the drawbolts (3) to move the concave.

Adjusting the drawbolts so that dimension A is
smaller will move the concave to the right.
Adjusting the drawbolts so that dimension A is
longer will move the concave to the left.
233
6 - FIELD OPERATION
A
156L8
1. RIGHT CONCAVE SUPPORT PIPE EYE BOLT 3. BOLT
2. CONCAVE SUPPORT PIPE END PLATE 4. DRAWBOLT
Dimension “A” [A= 54 mm (2-1/8 inch) 12th to 14th 7. Tighten the nuts on the Right concave support
bar is zero position] pipe eyebolts.
NOTE: Make adjustments in 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 8. Check the adjustment of the concave stop bolts
inch) increments. One full turn of the drawbolt nuts and the gauge indicator position (see Concave
will move the concave, left or right, one concave bar Adjustment in this manual).
position.
9. Set the concave clearance for the crop being
5. Tighten the lock nuts on the drawbolts. harvested.
6. Tighten the five retaining bolts on each concave 10. Adjust concave to rotor pinch point for optimum
support pipe end plate. threshing, cleaning distribution and crop material
flow.
234
6 - FIELD OPERATION
5 6 7
RI03M019R
5. 11TH CONCAVE BAR 7. CONCAVE
6. 14TH CONCAVE BAR 8. FIRST BAR
Solid Line - Concave Open Black Area (Pinch Point) - The rotor should contact
the concave at the 11th to 14th bar of concave
Dotted Line - Concave Fully Closed section.
NOTE: Number 1 bar is the first bar after the hanger

support plate.
235
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Concave Wire Sizes

Concaves are available with large holes for 1/4 inch
wires and small holes for 3/16 inch wires. Different
wire sizes are recommended for different crops as
follows:
3/16 Inch WiresSmall Grains

1/4 Inch WiresCorn, Rice, Maize, Milo,
Edible Beans, Soybeans or Other Large Seeds
Smooth Slotted ConcavesEdible Beans
and other special conditions
Concaves with 3/16 inch wires with every other wire

removed can be used to har vest low acreage
amounts of corn, edible beans or soybean type RD01H106
crops. The increased distance between wires helps 1/4 INCH WIRE CONCAVES
to reduce rotor loss and crop damage.
Smooth slotted concaves are beneficial in edible

beans and other crops to reduce damage and
improve feeding.
RK99G166
1 SMOOTH SLOTTED CONCAVES
NOTE: Photo for illustration purpose only.
RD01H099
The concaves (1) will have to be removed to

remove and install concave wires (2). The front,
middle and rear concave sections are available
separately to change the concave for different
crops and crop conditions.
RD01H107
3/16 INCH WIRE CONCAVES
236
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Concave Filler Bars

Concave filler bars are available for both the 3/16
inch and 1/4 inch wire concaves. Filler bars are used
to hold the crop over the concaves for a longer time
to improve threshing. When the crop distribution to
the cleaning system is too heavy on the Right side,
filler bars can be installed on the Right side of the
concave for better distribution. See your dealer.
A2419
A2421
237
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Concave Interrupter Bars

Concave interrupter bars are available for the 3/16
inch wire concaves. Interrupter bars are used for
additional threshing capacity and allow grain
separation in hard threshing conditions. See your
dealer.
NOTE: ALL Number 1 Concave slots should be

filled.
A16746
A16747
238
6 - FIELD OPERATION
GRATES
The grate area is at the rear of the rotor cage
assembly. Access to the grates is through the
opening behind the rear Left side panel. The
grates are stationary and cannot be moved closer
to or farther away from the rotor assembly. The
grates are in three sections that are held together
with retaining bolts. The grates are installed on the
bottom of the rotor cage with mounting bolts on the
Left side. Either slotted grates, 3/8 inch square bar
grates or solid grates can be used.
A1895
Slotted Grates
Slotted grates are recommended for edible beans,
most small grain crops and can also be used for
cor n. To reduce the amount of chaff that goes
through the grates to the cleaning system, up to
seven channels can be installed on the outside of
the grates. Installing the channels in the middle of
the slots gives the minimum opening for grain. Up
to seven channels can be installed on the inside of
t h e g r a t e s fo r c o r n . I n s t a l l i n g t h e c h a n n e l s
between the slots gives the maximum opening for
cor n. The grates must be removed to add or
remove channels on the slotted grates.
A1901
3/8 Inch Square Bar Grates
3/8 inch square bar grates are recommended for
corn, milo/maize and rice. The square bar grates
help to reduce rotor losses in high yield corn. The
grates also help to reduce plugging in damp
conditions in other crops. The grates are also very
effective at reducing rotor loss in cereal grains as
well and may be necessary in high yielding crops.
A1887
239
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Solid Grates
Solid grates are recommended for sunflowers and
some grasses. The solid grate helps to keep stalks
and large stem/straw particles out of the cleaning
system.
A1886R
Round Bar
16mm Round Bars with 16mm spacing have proven
beneficial in reducing hairpinning of crops that plug
large wire grates, such as high moisture corn.
50041642
240
6 - FIELD OPERATION
GRAIN CLEANING
Controls and Adjustments
1 2
5 4
6
7
RH08C208
1. TAILINGS ELEVATOR 4. TAILINGS AUGER 6. CLEANING FAN
2. TAILINGS RETURN AUGER 5. SHOE SIEVE 7. GRAIN BED AUGER
3. CHAFFER SIEVE
241
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Introduction
The cleaning activity of the AXIAL-FLOW® Combine To ensure optimum efficiency of the cleaning system,
is the final separation of grain from material that has the threshed material should be distributed evenly
been distributed through the concaves and separator across the chaffer sieve. Uneven distribution will be
grates. Material is separated by the chaffer and shoe improved by use of the auger bed paddles. Sidehill
sieves to remove unwanted foreign material. Chaff divider attachments will prevent the drift of material to
and other unwanted material is suspended by air and the lower side of the chaffer in a sidehill grain
discharged out of the rear of the Combine. operation.
Adjustments required for this function are the RPM of
the cleaning fan (controlling air velocity) and the Only through experimentation will an operator find
adjustments of both chaffer and shoe sieves. Too the correct combination of chaffer and shoe sieve
much wind blast on light crops will contribute to settings that yield the maximum grain savings, clean
cleaning system losses. For extremely light seeded grain tank sample and reduced tailings return. A
crops, such as grass, the cleaning fan air volume number of special configuration sieves are available
must be reduced by adjusting the fan cutoff plate. for specialty crop applications.
Troubleshooting Problems to Correct Cleaning System Losses

The fi rs t ste p toward so lvi ng a ny p roblem is Problems with internal components are more difficult
accurately identifying that problem. This is especially to analyze. If you are experiencing loss of grain at the
impor tant in Combine operation because the separator you may want to diagnose the problem
machine performs so many different functions. through the “quick stop” procedure.
Functional problems such as poor cutting action and

reel wrapping usually are obvious and will be
uncovered readily when you use the Initial Crop
Settings in this manual.
242
6 - FIELD OPERATION
AUGER TROUGH
Clean Out Trough
5 5 5 5
4 2 3
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
RI08A162
1. SIDE VIEW 3. CLEAN GRAIN AUGER TROUGH PANEL 5. BOLTS
2. AUGER BED BOTTOM VIEW 4. TAILINGS TROUGH PANEL
The auger bed moves the threshed grain to the rear, onto the grain pan, chaffer sieve and cleaning system.
To clean out the auger troughs (2), remove the clean grain auger trough panel (3) and tailings trough panel (4).
Remove the six bolts (5) on each panel flange (three per side). From the right side of the machine, pull the trough
down and to the right, sliding the trough between the cross braces and the right side sill.
Clean out the auger trough when moving to a different field or changing crops. Clean out the auger trough at the
end of the season.
After the trough is clean, install the trough panels in the reverse order of removal. Tighten hardware.
243
6 - FIELD OPERATION
AUGER BED
Clean Out Trough
4
5
RI08F002
1. AUGER BED 3. CLEAN OUT COVER 5. BEARING AND FLANGE
2. NUT 4. COVER PLATE 6. SPACER
The augers move the threshed grain to the rear of the auger bed grain pan, onto the chaffer sieve and cleaning
system.
To clean out the auger bed (1), open the clean out cover door on the right side of the Combine. Loosen the six nuts
(2) on the clean out cover (3). Slide the cover to the right and align the clean out slots. Use compressed air to clean
out the bed. After the bed is clean, slide the clean out cover back to the left and tighten the hardware. Close the
auger bed clean out cover door.
Clean out the auger bed trough when moving to a different field or changing crops. Clean out the auger bed trough
at the end of the season.
244
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Grain Auger Distribution Paddle

A grain auger dis tr ibuti on paddle ( 1) c an be
installed on the Left auger if straw buildup is a 1
problem.
Paddles are to be installed on the auger shaft, trailing

90 degrees, directly behind the rear edge of the
auger flight.
When the Combine is equipped for operating in small

grain, a grain auger distribution paddle can be
installed toward the rear end of the Left auger shaft
(2) to even grain pan load and help keep the rear
cage area clear of straw buildup. 2
RD98G104
245
6 - FIELD OPERATION
CLEANING FAN
Speed Adjustment
The speed of the cleaning fan can be adjusted
from 450 to 1250 RPM. To adjust the fan speed,
use the cleaning fan speed control switch on the
Right console. Press down on the rear half of the
switch to decrease the fan speed and on the front
half of the switch to increase the fan speed. The
separator switch must be in the ON position with
the engine running to change the fan speed.
Operate with the cleaning fan at a speed fast enough

to provide as much air as possible to the cleaning
sieves without blowing clean grain out of the back of
the machine (see Initial Crop Settings for the
recommended starting fan speed for the type of crop RD07G026
being harvested). Adjust the fan speed higher or

lower as needed for the crop conditions. Use the
digital tachometer in the fan mode to indicate the fan
speed.
Clearing Grain from the Fan

Grain can collect in the fan housing as a result of 6. Check chaffer and shoe sieve adjustment. If
improper chaffer and shoe sieve adjustments, grain continues to collect in the fan, adjust the
improper fan speed or from the use of grain cleaning sieves as follows:
troubleshooting procedures such as the “quick stop”.
Remove grain from the fan housing as follows: A. Open the shoe sieve slightly.
1. Disengage the separator and feeder. Stop the B. Close the chaffer sieve slightly.
engine.
7. Reset the fan speed to meet crop needs. If grain
2. Check the chaffer and shoe sieves. Remove any continues to collect in the fan, increase the fan
plugged material. operating speed.
3. Start the engine and engage the separator.

Increase fan speed to a maximum.
4. Move the throttle hand lever to the full throttle

position. Operate the separator until the grain is
cleared from the fan.
5. Disengage the separator. Stop the engine.
246
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Cleaning Fan Air Volume

The maximum air volume for the cleaning fan is
obtained when the fan cutoff plate (1) is positioned
in the horizontal position. 1
A24349
The volume of air must be reduced for light crops
such as grasses. Loosen the fan cutoff lock plate
bolt (3) on each side of the Combine. Rotate fan
cutoff plate (2) rearward to the vertical position to
2
reduce the air volume. Tighten the lock plate bolts.
Air volu me a t given fan RPM wil l be r oughl y
halved.
Retur n the fan to max imum ai r vo lume by

loosening the lock plate bolts, pivoting cutoff plate
to the horizontal position and tightening the bolts. 3
A24350
247
6 - FIELD OPERATION
CHAFFER SIEVE
Chaffer Sieve Types

28.6 mm (1 -1/8 INCH) CLOS Z SLAT WITH
PIANO WIRE - This sieve is recommended for
small grains, rice, flax or small seed. The sieve
opening can be adjusted for cleaning in low
vo l u m e s m a l l c r o p s a n d t ra s hy c o n d i t i o n s.
Because of the smaller total opening, this sieve
has a lower capacity than other sieves.
186L7
28.6 mm (1-1/8 INCH) - PETERSON SLAT WITH
grasses and various small seeds. The sieve uses a
fin and hole design for air draft control. The sieve
helps to remove straw and stems.
183L7
4 1 . 3 m m ( 1 - 5 / 8 I N C H ) C O R N S L AT W I T H
corn and most other large seed crops. The sieve
uses more air and has a greater opening, even
when closed, than other sieves for increased
capacity. Because of the increased opening, the
sieve opening does not have to be adjusted as
wide as on other sieves. Less plugging with cobs
and trash will occur with this sieve. To clear the
sieve, move the adjusting lever to the full open
position, then back to the adjustment setting.
185L7
41.3 mm (1 -5/8 INCH) CLOS Z SLAT WITH
PIANO WIRE - This sieve has a high capacity in
beans and most small grains. Use of this sieve
requires more opening and less air than the deep
tooth sieve but the capacity is greater than the
28.6 mm (1-1/8 inch) regular tooth sieve.
184L7
248
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Chaffer Sieve Removal

Remove the chaffer sieve as follows:
NOTE: Before removal, turn the engine OFF and

remove the key.
1
1. Turn the separator drive pulley using the rotor

rocking wrench until the chaffer sieve is at the
extreme rear position that it will travel. This will
give the maximum clearance for removal.
2. Disconnect the grain scan / adjustment cylinder

harness connector (1) on the left hand side of the
machine. Remove tie straps from the harness
marking their position for installation. RD07K035
3. Remove the straw spreaders (2).
2
RH08A020
4. Remove the seal hardware (3). Remove the

clamp hardware (4) and pull the harness through
the sidewall.
3
5. Remove sieve adjustment linkage from the LH 4
side of combine (if equipped).
RD07K036
249
6 - FIELD OPERATION
6. Remove the chaffer sieve mounting bolt (5) and

(6) on each side of the sieve and lower the
support angles and the sieve.
5 6
A9852
7. Remove the chaffer sieve (7).
A9854
250
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Chaffer Sieve Installation

Install the chaffer sieve as follows:
1. Install the chaffer sieve (7).
A9854
2. Raise the sieve and the support angles. Install
the suppor t angle mounting bolt (5) and the
chaffer sieve mounting bolt (6) on each side of
the sieve.
3. Install the adjustment linkage on the LH side of

the Combine (if equipped).
5 6
A9852
251
6 - FIELD OPERATION
4. Install the harness through the sidewall. Install

the clamp and hardware (4). Install the seal and
hardware (3). Tighten all hardware.
3
4
RD07K036
5. Install the straw spreaders (2).
2
RH08A020
6. Route the harness up the left sidewall and
connect the grain scan / adjustment cylinder
harness to the connector (1). Install tie straps in
the positions marked during removal
1
RD07K035
252
6 - FIELD OPERATION
External Chaffer Sieve Adjustment (If Equipped)

The center section of the chaffer sieve can be
adjusted from the left side of the separator side
sheet.
To adjust the chaffer sieve center section:
1. Use the upper set of buttons (1) to open or close 1

the sieve as required for your crop. The chafer
sieve can be seen by opening the viewing door
(2). 2
NOTE: The CXCM must be powered up to move the

chaffer sieve. If the key switch is NOT in the ON
position, push and HOLD the button until the chaffer RH07G002
sieve begins to move. If a button is not pressed, after

a few seconds the CXCM will power down.
RH07G052
253
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Chaffer Sieve Internal Adjustment

The front and rear chaffer sieve sections can be
adjusted from the rear of the Combine. The
adjusting lever adjusts the chaffer sieve as shown
above. Push the lever to the right to close the
sieve. Push the lever to the left to open the sieve 1
(Refer to Initial C rop Settings for the
recommended starting setting).
2
The chaffer sieve adjustment is measured from
the top of one vane to the tip of the next forward
vane. Loosen the wing nut on the sieve adjusting
lever. Slide the adjusting lever in the slot until the 3
correct setting is obtained and tighten the wing
nut. A9849
DO NOT open the front section of the chaffer sieve

more than 13 mm (1/2 inch). Excessive separation
at the front section can cause overloading of the
front shoe sieve. This can cause air to go out the
rear of the machine and cause grain to fall into the 4
Cross Flow® fan.
WARNING: Unless instructed otherwise 6

never service or make adjustments to the
machine with the engine running. Before
5
! making adjustments, put the shift control
lever in Neutral and set the park brake OR put
the shift control lever in park position as
RD07K033
equipped. M147C
T85246
1. CHAFFER FRONT SECTION
2. CHAFFER MIDDLE SECTION IS ADJUSTED
FROM LEFT SIDE OF SEPARATOR SIDE
SHEET
3. CHAFFER REAR SECTION
4. FRONT CHAFFER SIEVE ADJUSTING LEVER
5. MIDDLE CHAFFER SIEVE ADJUSTING ROD
ASSEMBLY
6. REAR CHAFFER SIEVE ADJUSTING LEVER
254
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Sieve Viewing Door And Lamp
RH07G092
The sieve viewing door (1) and lamp (2) are located NOTE: For best lighting keep the lamp lens clear of
such that inspection of the chaffer sieve can be made dust and debris.
from outside of the left hand separator side. The
lamp switch (3) must be turned OFF after each use to
avoid draining the batteries.
Grain Pan Side Hill Dividers (If Equipped)

When operating on a hillside, grain will slide to the
down hill side of the Combine. Grain pan side hill
dividers (Tall dividers shown) are available for
installation on the chaffer sieve and on TOP of the
grain pan. See your dealer.
A1850
255
6 - FIELD OPERATION
SHOE SIEVES
Sieve Types
Using the correct shoe sieve for the crops will give a
cleaner sample in the grain tank. Using another
shoe sieve can reduce the cleaning system
capacity or cause a dirtier sample. Shoe sieve
recommendations are as follows:
28.6 mm (1-1/8 INCH) GRAIN SLAT (1). This is

an adjustable sieve with piano wire and can be
used for most crops.
1
188L7
41.3 mm (1-5/8 INCH) CLOSZ SLAT (2). This is
a n a d j u s t a bl e s i eve w i t h p i a n o wi r e a n d i s
recommended for corn.
“D” LIPPED 25.4 mm (1 INCH) HOLE -

Recommended for wheat barley and safflower and
soybeans if a very clean sample is required.
Special round hole shoe sieves include:

● 1/10 Inch Diameter
2
187L7
256
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Shoe Sieve Removal
With Straw Spreaders
1. Remove the straw spreaders. Remove the rear

axle shield and open and lower the tailings auger
trough door (1).
A9848
2. Remove the adjustment rod from the shoe sieve
adjustment lever.
RD07K028
3. Remove the two bolts (2) holding the shoe rail
plate (3) on each side. Place the plate on the
shoe sieve.
3
2
RP95K133
257
6 - FIELD OPERATION
4. Remove the shoe sieve (4).

4
A9851
With Straw/Chaff Spreaders
1. Remove the straw/chaff spreaders. Remove the

cleaning shoe door by removing the quick
attach pins (1) and lifting up on the front of the
door (2).
2
1
A24464
2. Remove the adjustment rod from the shoe sieve 1 3

adjustment lever.
RD07K028
258
6 - FIELD OPERATION
3. Remove the two bolts (3) holding the shoe rail

plate (4) on each side. Place the plate on the
shoe sieve.
4
3
RP95K133
4. Remove the shoe sieve (5).
5
A9851
Shoe Sieve Installation

1. Install the shoe sieve (1).
1
A9851
1 3
259
6 - FIELD OPERATION
2. Replace the two bolts (2) holding the shoe rail

plate.
RP95K133
3. Connect the adjustment rod to the internal
levers.
RD07K028
4. Raise and close the tailings auger trough door
(3) and install the rear axle shield. Install the
straw spreaders.
A9848
260
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Shoe Sieve Adjustment

The shoe sieve can be adjusted from the left
separator side sheet (Refer to Initial Crop Settings for
the recommended opening).
To adjust the shoe sieve, use the bottom two buttons

for adjusting the opening and closing of the shoe
sieve.
NOTE: The CXCM must be powered up to move the

shoe sieve. If the key switch is NOT in the ON
position, push and HOLD the button until the shoe
sieve begins to move. If a button is not pressed, after
a few seconds the CXCM will power down.
RH07G002
RH07G052
261
6 - FIELD OPERATION
GRAIN HANDLING AND MATERIAL DISTRIBUTION
1 2 3
6 5
RH08C208
1. INCLINED AUGER 4. STRAW SPREADER 6. CLEAN GRAIN AUGER
2. GRAIN BIN 5. DISCHARGE BEATER OR STRAW 7. CLEAN GRAIN
CHOPPER (IF EQUIPPED) ELEVATOR
3. UNLOADER AUGER TUBE
Introduction
The final functions of the balanced Combine are If additional grain cleaning at the elevator is desired,
conveying cleaned grain and discharging threshed perforated elevator troughs, doors and unloader tube
crop residue. Cleaned grain from the AXIAL-FLOW® assemblies are available.
Combine is elevated from the clean grain auger to
the grain tank. Crop residue is discharged from the A dd it io na l c h eck s in c lu de p r op er s l ip c l ut c h
rear of the rotor by a discharge beater and over the adjustment, tension of drive chain and proper
rear axle to straw spreaders. elevator chain tightness.
Elevator capacity may be improved by using steel

elevator flights when green or juicy crop conditions
are experienced. Steel elevator flights help clean
sides of the elevator walls. Two to a maximum of four
flights can be installed, equally spaced, on the
elevator chain.
262
6 - FIELD OPERATION
For the increasing number of farmers utilizing some

method of reduced tillage, the AXIAL-FLOW®
Combine straw material distribution design offers
unique advantages.
The straw chopper attachment breaks up crop

residues to assist in tillage and pest control. The
straw chopper attachment effectively shreds material
for m or e even f ie ld d i st r ibu tio n by th e s traw
spreaders. The chopper is installed in place of the
standard discharge beater. The chopper rotor is
dynamically balanced to provide smooth vibration
free operation. When straw or stem conditions dictate
the utilization of a straw chopper, the straw spreaders RH08A020
or straw/chaff spreaders can also be utilized to

ensure thorough and even distribution of residue.
The design improves soil condition by evenly

redistributing crop residue.
The spreader bats on the straw spreader and the

angles on the straw/chaff spreaders can be adjusted
to several positions depending on the pattern and
aggressiveness of residue distribution desired by the
operator. Positioning the bats angled in the direction
of their rotation, will result in the widest, most
aggressive distribution pattern. The spreader bat
speed can be changed also.
263
6 - FIELD OPERATION
ELEVATORS
Clean Out Doors

Bo th t he cl ean gra in ( 1) an d the tai lin gs ( 2)
elevators have a clean out door for inspecting the
conveyor chains and for cleaning out the elevator.
Open the doors and clean out the elevators before

harvesting a different crop. Clean out the elevators at 1
the end of each day. Leave the doors open when the
Combine is not in use to prevent plugging or freezing.
Clean out slots are provided on the left hand side of

the tailings (3) auger troughs to blow out material left
in the trough.
Check the tension of the elevator chains weekly. RH07G030
NOTE: If compressed air is used to clean elevator

areas, ALWAYS wear face protection.
2
RH08A033
RD01H033
264
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Steel Flights for Conveyor Chains

Steel flight assemblies can be installed on the
conveyor chains. The steel flight assemblies are
recommended for heavy crops such as corn and
for operation in wet and muddy conditions. The
steel flight assemblies help to keep dir t from
caking in the grain and tailings elevators. Two
steel flight assemblies per chain, equally spaced,
are recommended for best results.
RD97G153
Perforated Screens (If Equipped)

Perforated screens for the grain auger trough,
tailings auger trough, and clean grain elevator
clean out doors can be installed to help remove
fi n es a nd for e i gn m at er i a l du r i ng th e gra i n
handling process. See your dealer.
Perforated screens are not recommended for edible

beans, edible corn or popcorn.
RH08A031
265
6 - FIELD OPERATION
High Speed Sprocket for Corn

When har vesting high yielding corn, the clean
grain elevator can be converted to a higher speed
to increase elevator capacity.
1
To increase the elevator speed on the clean grain
elevator do the following:
1. Remove the grain elevator shield.
2. Release the tension on the clean grain elevator

drive chain. 1
3. Loosen the shaft clamps on both sides of the
dual sprocket assembly. Loosen the set screws RP95K009
(1).
4. Slide the dual sprocket assembly over, tighten

the shaft clamps and set screws.
5. Add 1 Roller Link and 1 Connecting Link to the

drive chain and Install on the larger sprocket.
6. Tighten the clean grain elevator drive chain.
7. Install the grain elevator shield.
NOTE: Combines equipped with Yield Monitor, Yield

Monitor must be recalibrated for elevator speed.
Refer to Yield Monitor Operator’s Manual.
Optional Low Speed Sprocket for

Edible Beans
When harvesting edible beans, a dual sprocket
offering the standard speed and a slower to speed to
reduce crop damage may be used. See your dealer.
266
6 - FIELD OPERATION
GRAIN TANK AND UNLOADER
Unloader Auger Cover Adjustment

The cover plates (1) are fitted over both grain tank
unloading augers. These covers can be adjusted to 4 4
regulate the unloading rate according to the nature 3
and moisture content of the grain being handled.
To adjust the covers,, pull handle (2) toward the

center of the grain tank and lift.
This will disengage the cover from the support (4).

Position the other end of the cover in the desired slot 1
(3). Re-engage handle (2) in the desired support
2
holes (4).
ATTENTION: NEVER enter the grain tank area with 10021837
the engine running and the augers rotating. Always

stop the engine, remove the key and make sure all
moving parts are stopped before entering grain tank.
In certain crop conditions, such as grass seeds, it

can be necessary to remove the covers completely to
improve the unloading of the grain tank. These crop
conditions can also cause the material to hesitate
during the unloading process. If agitation of the
material is necessary it must be done from the
operator’s platform using a pole or broom. DO NOT
E N T E R G R A I N TA N K A R E A . I f i t b e c o m e s
necessary to agitate the material at the rear of the
grain tank it must be done by a second person from
the engine service area using a pole or broom. DO
NOT ENTER GRAIN TANK AREA. One person must
remain in the operator’s cab to stop the engine if
necessary.
WARNING: DO NOT enter the grain tank when the Combine is running. The rotating augers in the bottom
! of the grain tank can cause severe injury including possible loss of limbs. M192A
267
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Clean Out Door

A clean out door is provided at the lower end of the
vertical unloader tube. Keep the area clean when
the Combine is not in use to prevent damage to the
unloader mechanism. Be especially careful during
freezing temperatures.
RH08A049
Right hand clean out doors are provided to blow out
material from the grain tank unloader augers.
RH07G016
Perforated Unloader Tube (If Equipped)

The perforated unloader tube can be used when
operating in corn or bean crops to remove cracks and
fines while unloading the crop into the transport
vehicle.
To uncover the perforated tube, loosen the four

clamps on the unloader tube and rotate the cover
one half turn. Tighten the four clamps.
NOTE: The perforated unloader tube is not

recommended for edible beans, edible corn or
popcorn.
T88693
268
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Unloader Drive Shear Bolt

The unloader drive shear bolt (1) is designed to
protect the drive and gear housing if plugging
occurs during grain tank unloading.
Replacement shear bolts are in a holder (2) to the 2

left of the unloader clean out door.
If additional shear bolts are required, see your dealer. 1

The shear bolts used are unique to ensure the
unloading auger is protected. Do not use hardware
other than specified in this location or unloading
auger damage may result.
RH08A050
269
6 - FIELD OPERATION
DISCHARGE BEATER
Bottom Adjustment
A spr ing loaded beater bottom does not have
a dj u s t able s l o t s e tt i ng s o n e a c h s id e o f th e
Combine.
157L8
270
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STRAW SPREADERS AND STRAW/CHAFF SPREADERS
Cone Removal
The straw spreaders and straw/chaff spreaders
distribute the straw from the beater evenly over the
gr ou n d. T hi s h el p s t o p r eve nt bun c hi n g a n d
windrowing, making plowing and tillage operations
easier.
For better windrowing when the straw is to be baled,

remove the spreaders (Refer to Baling Straw in this
section of the manual).
NOTE: Always clean the shafts and apply a dry

lubricant (Slip Plate) on the shafts before installing
the cones.
RH08A020
To remove the curved bat straw/chaff spreaders,

depress large button and drop spreader off of
shaft.
To remove the straw/chaff spreaders, depress 1

large button and drop spreader off the shaft.
WARNING: Avoid injury from rotating

spreader or thrown material. Do not stand
! behind Combine when the spreader is
turning. M191A
NOTE: DO NOT use wet lubricant on couplings. Oil

RH07G039
and grease accumulate dust which causes binding.
Chaff Spreader Speed Valve (If

Equipped)
The spreader speed valve (1) should only be

adjusted with the machine shut down. It should be
set at its slowest speed for corn. For other crops, it
should be set at the maximum speed.
NOTE: Decreasing spreader speed to control width

greatly increases the risk of plugging.
271
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Bat Adjustment
Curved Straw/Chaff Spreader
The curved bats on the straw spreader cones are adjustable to increase or decrease the spreading effect. The bats
give the most spreading effect in the No. 1 position. Use the other two positions to decrease the spreading. Install
the bats with concave surface facing to the rear when bats are positioned to the inside of the discs.
A B
1
2
1
RI01H061
1. NUMBER 1 POSITION 2. BLADE SUPPORTS
A. LEFT SIDE B. RIGHT SIDE
1. Remove mounting bolts.
2. Install in bat and bolt in desired position.
RD01H200
1 3
272
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Straw Directional Vane
The straw directional vane is standard with the

straw/chaff spreader. The straw directional vane
controls the amount of straw directed to each
straw/chaff spreader disc.
For more left side discharge of straw, move the vane

to the left hole.
For more right side discharge of straw, move the

vane to the right hole.
RD00E033
1 3
Straw Spreader Speed Adjustment

The position of the straw spreader pulleys can be
switched to change the speed of the straw
spreader. The smaller pulley will provide a faster
speed and the larger pulley will provide a slower
speed. See Straw Spreader Drive Belt in the
m a i n t e n a n c e a n d a d j u s t m e n t s e c t i o n fo r
instructions on switching the pulleys.
RH07G051
273
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STRAW AND CHAFF SPREADER ADJUSTMENTS

The straw and chaff spreaders can be adjusted for three different types of field operations.
● Spreading straw and spreading chaff.
● Spreading straw and windrow chaff.
● Windrow straw and windrow chaff.
Use the following set up instructions to adjust the spreaders as required.
Spreading Straw and Spreading Chaff
STEP 1
Raise the straw hood to the highest position.
NOTE: This is an initial setting. Adjust as required

for field conditions.
RH08E001
STEP 2 1 3
Raise the chaff spreader to the highest working

position as an initial setting. Adjust as necessary for
field conditions.
RH08E002
STEP 3
Adjust the chaff spreader speed control valve to the
slowest speed for corn. Use the highest speed for all
other crops.
RH08E003
274
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 4
Move the left side deflector (1) to the working position
and install the spring pins (2). Be sure the spring pins
are fully installed and locked in the working position.
NOTE: Deflector shown in the fully retracted position

which is recommended for straw spreading.
2
2
1
RH08E004
STEP 5
Repeat for the right side deflector. Illustration shows
left and right side deflectors locked in position.
RH08E005
STEP 6
Move the hinged deflector (1) to the down position
and secure to the rubber deflectors with lock pins (2).
Position the chaff spreader chutes (3) out to the work
position. Adjust as required for field conditions.
2 1 2
3 3
RH08E006
275
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 7
During field operation, spreader distribution can be
adjusted to the left or right by using the spreader
adjustment switch on the right hand console.
RH08E007
RH08E008
STEP 8
Variations in crop conditions and Header size may
require a “mechanical fine tune” adjustment to the left
and right hand shield assemblies. Turn the machine
OFF. Loosen the pivot linkage rod assembly bolt and
reposition the shield assemblies as required. Tighten
the bolt.
RH08E009
276
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Spreading Straw and Windrow Chaff
STEP 9
Disengage the spring loaded pin from the left hand
side of the chaff spreader mounting bracket.
RH08E010
STEP 10
Lower the chaff spreader to the fully down position.
Fully re-engage the spring pin.
RH08E011
The chaff spreader discs will deactivate when in the
fully down position.
RH08E012
277
6 - FIELD OPERATION
If desired, the dribble pan rubber curtain can be lifted

over the top of the chaff spreader to prevent trash
buildup.
RH08E013
Windrow Straw and Spread Chaff
STEP 1
Remove the straw spreader disk assemblies and
safely store them.
RH08E015
STEP 2
Remove the quick attach pins from the hinged straw
deflector and rubber cur tains. Raise the straw
deflector and secure to the upper brackets with the
quick attach pins.
RH08E016
278
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 3
Remove the quick attach pin securing the left and
right hand spreader shields to the pivot rods. This will
allow the spreader shields to pivot freely.
RH08E017
STEP 4
Secure the quick attach pins in the storage position.
RH08E018
STEP 5
Loosen the upper and lower thumb screws on the left
and right hand spreader shields.
RH08E019
279
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 6
Remove the hair pins retaining the spring loaded pins
at the top corner of each spreader shield.
RH08E020
STEP 7
Pull on the spreader shield to extend rearward.
Rotate the shield towards the center of the machine.
RH08E021
STEP 8
Insert the spring loaded pin into the hole provided in
the spreader deck shield.
RH08E022
STEP 9
Install the hairpin to secure the deflector shields in
place.
RH08E023
280
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STEP 10
Hold the deflectors up to straighten. Tighten all the
thumb screws.
RH08E024
STEP 11
Be sure that the deflectors are pressed against the
rubber seals on the underside of the deck.
Rh08E025
STEP 12
Adjust the spreader deck height as required by the
field conditions
RH08E026
1 3
281
6 - FIELD OPERATION
BALING STRAW
Guidelines for Optimizing Straw Operating Conditions

Quality ● Harvest during damp, tough conditions such as
early morning or late evening.
Due to the threshing and separating nature of the
AXIAL-FLOW® Combine, machine settings and
● Cut more of the stem than usual.
operating conditions can affect the quality of baling ● Remove the spreaders or, if impacting in stubble
straw. The following guidelines are to help you obtain is a problem, leave the spreader discs attached
the best straw possible from your AXIAL-FLOW® and remove the bats and/or angles.
Combine. Each field condition must be looked at in
particular to identify which options will give view
satisfactory results.
Recommended Equipment Options
AFX Rotor
● Remove the straight separator bars and install
rasp bars.
● Do not use spiked rasp bars, except in Damp,
weedy conditions.
RH08e028
Other Equipment
Machine Settings
● Use small wire concaves or at least one at the
No. 1 position. ● Use slower than normal rotor speeds.
● Use slotted grates with the channels on the ● Relax the concave setting while maintaining
outside in the 1/2 hole position. threshing and separating.
● Solid separator grates in the Nos. 2 and 3 ● Lower chopper, beater pan to the CORN position.
positions may be used if grain loss is not an ● Adjust the vanes over the grates to the fast or
issue. forward position.
● If possible, use a machine equipped with a ● Adjust the vanes over the concaves in the mid to
discharge beater instead of a straw chopper. fast position.
● Retract the straw chopper concave and/or slow
speed of chopper/beater.
● Use a slower speed on the rock trap beater (if
equipped).
NOTE: Care should be exercised to avoid

compromising acceptable grain loss and machine
performance.
282
6 - FIELD OPERATION
STRAW CHOPPER (If Equipped)
Speed Adjustment
To change the straw chopper speed, proceed as
follows:
1. Lift the channel stop off the spring. Move the idler
pulley handle (1) down to release the idler pulley
(2).
2. Position the belt (3) over the desired set of 3

pulleys:
1
(H) High Speed 2
- Large Driven Pulley (Upper Pulley)
- Small Driven Pulley (Lower Pulley)
(L) Low Speed

- Small Drive Pulley (Upper Pulley)
- Large Driven Pulley (Lower Pulley)
RD02E198
1. IDLER PULLEY HANDLE
2. IDLER PULLEY
3. STRAW CHOPPER BELT
Engage the idler pulley by moving the idler pulley
handle up until the channel stop drops into place
over the spring.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to readjust the belt tension.

See Straw Chopper Drive Belt Adjustment.
NOTE: Be sure to adjust the straw chopper concave

and concave blades after changing the straw
chopper speed.
175788A1
283
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Straw Chopper Concave Adjustment

.
5
3
2
RH00J016
1. CONCAVE 4. CONCAVE ADJUSTING BOLTS
2. ROTOR BLADE 5. DISTANCE OF 1.6 TO 4.8 mm (1/16 TO 3/16 INCH)
3. CONCAVE BLADE BETWEEN CONCAVE AND TIP OF ROTOR BLADE
The straw chopper operates at a speed of Loosen the concave adjusting bolts on each side of
approximately 3524 RPM with the drive belt in the the Combine and move the concave up or down for
high speed position and at a speed of approximately the correct clearance. The correct concave to rotor
881 RPM with the dr ive belt in the low speed tip clearance is 1.6 to 4.8 mm (1/16 to 3/16 inch).
position.
WARNING: The straw chopper rotor is running at all times when the separator is engaged. Be sure the
! shielding is in place before operating the chopper. M180A
WARNING: The straw chopper rotor operates whenever the separator is in operation. Be sure to disengage
! the separator, shut off the engine, remove the key from the key switch and make sure the rotor has stopped
spinning before reaching into or working in the separator area. M181A
284
6 - FIELD OPERATION
No cut position.
RD01H070
Coarse cut position.
RD01H073
Medium cut position.
RD01H074
Fine cut position.
RD01H077
1 3
285
6 - FIELD OPERATION
RD01H143
1. ROTOR 2. CONCAVE BLADE ASSEMBLY
To Chop and Spread Straw

Operate the straw chopper at the high speed. Set the NOTE: When the straw is to be baled, operate the
concave to rotor tip distance at 1.6 to 4.8 mm (1/16 to straw chopper at the low speed (L) setting. With the
3/16 inch). low speed setting the straw chopper will not chop the
straw too fine and windrowing will be better.
The concave blade assembly can be inserted into or
retracted from the concave for the desired cut length, Adjust the lower chopper beater pan to the CORN
coarse, medium or fine (see Baling Straw in this position.
manual).
To Chop and Spread Corn

● Operate the straw chopper at the slow speed.
● Lower the concave blade assembly.
● Adjust the concave bottom to the middle of the
adjusting slot.
286
6 - FIELD OPERATION
SEED LOSS
New standards have been written for reduced field When checking loss it is important to determine the
losses, improved grain quality and simplified machine source of the loss before making adjustments.
op era ti o n. Th e A X IA L- FL OW ® Co mb in e h as Checking losses where the separator empties
perfor med in har vesting conditions previously without considering whether they originate from
thought to be too adverse for successful Combine preharvest causes, Header causes or the separator
operation. With minimal field losses as his goal, the can lead to unnecessary or erroneous adjustments.
AXIAL-FLOW® operator has more latitude to adjust
for maximum Combine efficiency. Understanding The formula below has three major areas of loss:
crop flow and functions previously discussed makes
adjustment for field losses easier. A spontaneous Preharvest Loss + Header Loss + Separator Loss =
adjustment, without thorough analysis and diagnosis Total Loss
of specific reason for crop loss could lead the
operator away from the correct machine adjustment. When measuring losses, take a full cut with the
A universal harvesting rule is to set your Combine to Header at your regular operating speed without using
manual specifications first, then adjust. See Initial the spreaders. Stop the Combine in an area of the
Crop Settings in this manual. Make only one field that represents an average of the field. Do not
adjustment at a time, then reevaluate. use rows that are near the edges of the field and do
not make your measurements near the end of the
When adjusting a Combine, it is important to note field. Allow the Combine to clear after stopping and
that no Combine will save every seed. Combines can back up a distance equal to its length. You can then
be operated at speeds and settings which range from check all loss points without starting and stopping
almost zero loss to extremely heavy losses. Each again.
operator must determine what loss to accept for the
field condition and time available for harvest. He must IMPORTANT: Be sure machine is shut down and all
adjust the Combine and travel speed accordingly. moving components completely stopped before
Losses should be checked in several spots and starting evaluation.
averaged to eliminate the effects of any uneven
feeding.
Four Major Areas of Loss

● Pre - harvest Loss is the loss that has occurred
before you harvest your crop. This includes the
seeds on the ground due to weather, insect
damage, or other adversities. There is no way
that any Combine can harvest that grain.
● Header Loss may be caused by cutting too high,

reel shatter, cutter bar condition, stripper plates
that are too wi de and other Header mi s -
adjustments.
● Machine Leakage Loss may be caused by

improperly installed access doors.
● Separator Loss from rotor and/or cleaning

system may be caused by improper adjustment,
the lack of proper attachments or crop conditions.
287
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Determining The Source Of Loss Area “B” The grains are preharvest, plus Header
losses. Note the number in the Seed to Bushel work
To determine how much grain you are losing from table in row B.
each source, make a full cut at your regular operating Total Area “B” Loss
speed without using the straw spreaders. Select an - Total Area “A” Loss
area in the field that seems typical of the entire field Actual Area “B” Loss
and is away from the edge or end of the field. The
machine must be running at normal load. Area “C” The grains are pre - harvest, plus Header
Stop the machine, back up a distance equal to its loss, plus separator losses. Note the number in the
length so that you have a situation similar to that Seed to Bushel work table.
shown in the illustration below. This will give you
three “counting areas” as follows: Total Area “A” Loss
- Total Area “B” Loss
● Area “A” has not yet been entered by the Actual Area “C” Loss
Combine.
● Area “B” has been cut by the Header but not SEED TO BUSHEL TABLE
passed over by the feeder house or machine. EXAMPLE
● Area “C” is directly behind the separator. It has Wheat

been passed over by the Header, the machine Area Seed Count Seeds / sq. Ft=Bu. Bushel Loss
and the machine’s discharge, but it has not been
“A” 71 19.2 71 ÷ 19.2 = 3.69
backed into or had extra straw dropped into it.
“B” 149 - 71 = 78 19.2 78 ÷ 19.2 = 4.06
You may have to walk 10 to 20 feet behind the
“C” 315 - 201 = 114 93 114 ÷ 93 = 1.23
machine to get an accurate count.
Total Field Loss = 3.69 + 4.06 + .55 + 1.23 = 8.98
Your next step is to count the grains on the ground in A+B+C
each COUNTING AREA. Each counting area should Total Machine Loss = 4.06 + .55 + 1.23 = 5.29
be 1 square foot, the average of several readings B+C
with in each area will give you a more accurate
reading.
CROP -
Area “A” The grains you find are pre - harvest Area Seed Count Seeds / sq. Ft=Bu. Bushel Loss
losses. Note the number in the Seed to Bushel work “A”
table in row A.
“B”
“C”
Total Field Loss =
A+B+C
Total Machine Loss =
B+C
A
C
B
RH08D313
Areas Of Loss
288
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Calculating Losses How To Interpret Losses
Using the Seed Loss Table in this section, locate the Now that losses have been determined, look at it
number of seed required to equal one bushel per from a different point of view. It is not uncommon to
square foot. hear an operator state that his machine is losing
grain, when in fact the grain may never have reached
For Areas “A&B” you will use the Uniform Spread
the machine at all. Having completed the previous
Column. The crop is still spread over the entire acre.
steps, it is known exactly where the losses are
It has not been condensed into the width of the
coming from and it is important that they are broken
machine yet. It will take less seeds per square foot
down in to two distinctive categories:
because you have 43.560 square feet to spread them
over. Note the number in the Seed to Bushel Table in ● Total Field Losses
the column, Seeds / Sq. Ft. = Bushel.
● Total Machine Losses
For area “C” you will have to use the chart column for
When an operator figures grain loss in area “C” only,
the proper Header. Your cutting width had been
he is figuring in the pre - harvest “A” loss also which
condensed into the width of the machine, not spread
no machine can save. Total field loss is a valuable
over the total acre. Note the number in the Seed to
tool, because it takes into account crop
Bushel Table in column, Seeds / Sq. Ft. = Bushel.
management, harvest timeliness, crop variety, etc.,
For each area divide the seeds counted by the but must be broken down into Total machine loss to
required number of seeds / Sq. Ft. to come up with determine Total machine performance.
bushels lost in that area.
Refer to the numbers in the Seed to Bushel Table
column Bushel Loss.
Area “A”
+ Area “B” + Area “B”
+ Area “C” + Area “C”
Total Field Loss Total Machine Loss
Prioritize your approach to making adjustments.
Make adjustments that will make the most
improvements on performance the quickest.
When making adjustments, only make one
adjustment at a time, checking the results before
making another change.
The last item to look at is in Area “C”. It is still not
known if the loss is due to a poor threshing or
cleaning system operation. To divide the threshing
from the cleaning losses, temporarily open the
chaffer and shoe sieve. Any losses found will be from
the threshing, not the cleaning system. During this
test the grain tank sample could be very dirty.
See the recommended settings and initial
adjustments as recommended in this manual and
fine tune as required.
An Axial - Flow Adjustment Calculator is also
available from your dealer.
289
6 - FIELD OPERATION
“Quick Stop” Problem Diagnosis

This procedure allows you to inspect the inside of 3. Immediately after making the “quick stop”, move
your Combine as if it was in operation. Because the the separator drive and feeder clutch switches to
machine must be stopped for inspection, there will be the OFF position. Return the propulsion control
some major differences between the conditions lever to the stop position, restart the engine and
inspected and those that exist during operation. Even allow it to cool to a safe shutdown temperature.
with these obvious limitations the procedure can be Then stop the engine, set the parking brakes and
an extremely useful diagnostic tool. To perform a remove the key from the switch.
“quick stop” follow this procedure:
4. Open the Left front trim doors and remove the
1. Select a relatively level area of the field where Left side shields from the concave and grate
t h e c r o p i s r e a s o n a b l y u n i fo r m a n d areas.
representative. Use the highest transmission
gear in which you can achieve the nor mal 5. Inspect the concaves for indications of plugging
operating speed, i.e. use second gear if possible. or other problems.
2. While operating the Combine in a normal, steady 6. Check the material in the auger bed for signs of
manner, execute Steps A, B and C in rapid incomplete threshing, kernel damage or other
sequence. abnormal conditions.
A. With your right hand, move the engine 7. Agitate the crop material inside the rotor in the
speed control to the slow idle position. grate area. If there are loose kernels near the
rear of the grate area, this probably indicates
B. With your left hand, move the propulsion excessive rotor losses. On the other hand,
control lever to the fastest forward position. relatively few kernels near the front of the grate
area would suggest a reserve of separating
C. Apply both brake pedals with the pedals capacity.
locked together.
8. Check the distribution of material on the grain
Do not turn off the key switch until after the “quick pan and chaffer sieve. The load distribution on
stop”. the chaffer sieve should be inspected from the
rear as well as the left hand inspection area.
NOTE: Although this may appear to be abusive to
the Combine, it really only uses the brakes to stop 9. Lower the tailings auger trough door. Inspect the
the separator quickly. Without the external braking load and load distribution on the shoe sieve.
effort, the momentum of the rotor would continue to Check the type and amount of material in the
drive the separator to a coasting stop. In a successful tailings auger trough.
“quick stop” the Combine must stop within ten feet.
10. Make sure crop material flow is proper in the
IMPORTANT: Never use the “quick stop” procedure Header, feeder house and elevators.
when operating conditions are such that restarting
the rotor might be difficult. 11. Using all the information available, proceed with
adjustments or corrections as listed in the
troubleshooting charts.
12. Replace shields, close the tailings auger trough

door, close the trim doors and recheck to be sure
the machine is ready to be restarted safely.
290
6 - FIELD OPERATION
13. To restart a Combine after a “quick stop”, start

the engine and allow it to warm up enough to run
normally and evenly. Move the engine speed
control to the low idle position. Execute Step A
and then Step B as quickly as possible in
sequence:
A. Move the separator switch to the ON

position.
B. Move the engine speed control to the

forward or full-speed position to get all
components up to speed and then reduce
engine speed to 1/2 throttle so machine can
clean itself out.
14. If the rotor is choked you will have to use the

appropriate procedure to clear it.
15. When the separator has operated long enough to

be cleared, return the engine speed control to
the low idle position, activate the feeder clutch
switch and immediately return the engine to full
speed.
Be sure to use the uniform spread column and select

the crop you are harvesting. The number shown in
this column is the number of seeds per square foot to
equal one bushel per acre loss. This number is
divided into the number of kernels you found to come
up with the bushel per acre preharvest loss.
291
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Additional Separator Loss Information

This is loss from the rotor and cleaning system such There are three basic adjustments for the cleaning
as unthreshed heads, etc. which are a result of system. These are (1) opening and closing the
improper adjustments or lack of proper attachments. chaffer; (2) opening and closing the shoe and (3)
To o bta i n th is lo s s, c h eck A r ea “ C” wh i ch is cleaning fan rpm changes. The main air blast is
windrowed directly behind the separator. The grain in directed to the front part of the chaffer. Air speed
this area would be all losses. Subtract the preharvest should be sufficient to lift material and suspend it in
(Area “A”) and the Header losses (Area “B”) from this the air, letting heavier par ticles (grain) down. If
measurement to determine the separator loss. For a underblown, material will ride on the chaffer and
more precise measurement, refer to the Seed Loss grain will be sloughed off the end of the chaffer. If
Tables to obtain the amount of loss in bushels or overblown grain will be picked up and blown beyond
pounds per acre for your machine. the end of the chaffer.
Before making adjustments, make sure there are no The need for cleaning shoe adjustments can be
grain leaks due to missing bolts, clean out doors easily determined by monitoring grain tank samples,
open, etc. If separator loss is high, it is necessary to tailings and losses on the ground. If tailings are
determine whether the loss is from the rotor or excessive, open the shoe slightly. If grain tank
cleaning system. sample is trashy, close the shoe and/or increase the
fan speed. Too wide of a chaffer sieve opening can
To determine whether the separator loss is due to the add to excessive tailings. Tailings can be monitored
rotor or cleaning system, fully open the shoe and with the Tailings Monitor, Watch Your Monitor.
chaffer sieve.
An overloaded shoe sieve and high tailings can also
NOTE: This procedure will cause a poor sample due be the result of too low fan speed setting instead of
to excessive trash in the grain sample during the test. too open chaffer setting. It is important to remember
If separator loss remains high it is due to rotor losses. that the air velocity through the chaffer sieve will
If separator loss decreases the loss is due to change by changing the sieve opening (with constant
improper cleaning system adjustments. fan speed). Therefore the more the chaffer sieve is
opened the faster the fan speed should be set in
Sieve settings are essentially the same with an order to continue to lift the lighter chaff material and
A X I A L - F L OW ® Co m b i n e a s i n t h e p a s t w i t h blow it out the rear. This is handy to remember when
conventional Combines. Too heavy tailings could more capacity is desired from the cleaning system.
result in rotor losses.
With the introduction of the Cross Flow® fan to the
cleaning system, improved air flow uniformity has
allowed the fan to be operated at higher speeds
without concern for blowing grain out the back.
Consult the tables for suggested fan speeds.
For side hill operations, chaffer dividers are available.
292
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Seed Loss Table
SEEDS LOST PER SQUARE FOOT TO EQUAL ONE BUSHEL PER ACRE (1)
GATHERED DIRECTLY BEHIND SEPARATOR (2)
CUTTING WIDTH UNIFORM
20 FT 22.5 FT 25 FT 30 FT 35 FT 36 FT 40 FT SPREAD
CROP (6.1 m) (6.9 m) (7.6 m) (9.1 m) (10.7 m) (11.0 m) (12.2 m) LOSS (3)
OATS 36 41 45 54 63 65 74 9.3
BARLEY 68 76 85 102 118 121 134 17.4
WHEAT 74 84 93 111 128 132 147 19.2
RYE 143 161 179 214 244 251 279 37
FLAX 403 453 503 604 680 708 747 103.8
MAIZE 75 85 94 113 131 135 150 19.4
SOYBEAN 14 16 16 21 25 26 29 3.6
RED KIDNEY
BEANS 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 1.2
RICE 66 74 82 99 114 117 130 17
WHITE
PEA BEANS 9 10 11 13 15 15 17 3.7
SEEDS LOST PER SQUARE FOOT TO EQUAL ONE POUND PER ACRE (1)
GATHERED DIRECTLY BEHIND SEPARATOR (2)
CUTTING WIDTH UNIFORM
20 FT 22.5 FT 25 FT 30 FT 35 FT 36 FT 40 FT SPREAD
CROP (6.1 m) (6.9 m) (7.6 m) (9.1 m) (10.7 m) (11.0 m) (12.2 m) LOSS (4)
RED CLOVER 24 27 30 36 42 43 48 6.2
RYE GRASS 25 28 31 37 43 44 49 6.4
(1) The figures are approximate and can vary with seed size and seed variety.
(2) Seeds are gathered directly behind the separator. No spreading device, such as a straw spreader is used.
(3) The number of seeds per square foot that can be spread evenly over an acre to equal a loss of one bushel per
acre.
(4) The number of seeds per square foot that can be spread evenly over an acre to equal a loss of one pound per
acre.
293
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Corn Loss Table

CORN HEAD ROW SEPARATOR LOSS UNIFORM
ROWS SPACING IN KERNELS SPREAD
PER FT 2(1) LOSS (2)
28 INCH 5.0 1.84
(711 mm)
6 ROW NARROW
30 INCH 5.3 1.84
(762 mm)
36 INCH 6.5 1,84
(914 mm)
6 ROW WIDE
38 INCH 6.8 1.84
(965 MM)
22 INCH 5.2 1.84
(559 mm)
8 ROW NARROW
30 INCH 7.1 1.84
(762 mm)
36 INCH 8.8 1.84
(914 mm)
8 ROW WIDE
38 INCH 9.3 1.84
(965 mm)
20 INCH 7.1 1.84
(508 mm)
12 ROW NARROW 22 INCH 7.9 1.84

(559 mm)
30 INCH 10.7 1.84
(762 mm)
1) The figures are approximate and can vary with kernel size and seed corn variety. Kernels were gathered directly
behind separator and do not include row loss due to corn head and no spreading device such as straw spreader
was used.
(2) Uniform loss in number of kernels per square foot that can be spread evenly over an acre to equal loss of one
bushel per acre at 80,000 kernels per bushel.
294
6 - FIELD OPERATION
Rear Trailer Hitch - If Equipped

Rear trailer hitch used for towing Header cart to and
from the field.
RI08F056
EUROPE EXCEPT ITALY
RI08F055
ITALY ONLY
295
6 - FIELD OPERATION
296
7 - TIRES/WHEELS/SPACING/BALLAST
TIRE INFLATION
NOTE: Upon receiving your Combine immediately Make sure that the tire valve caps are in place and
adjust the air pressure in the tires as indicated in the are tightened securely to prevent loss of air and
table. protect the valve core and stem.
Keep the tires properly inflated to the pressure Never weld or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The
shown in the inflation pressure tables for the front heat can cause an increase in air pressure resulting
and rear tires. Both under inflation and over inflation in a tire explosion. Welding can structurally weaken
are detrimental to tire life. Don’t reinflate a tire that or deform the wheel.
has been run flat or when there is obvious or
Never introduce a flammable substance into a tire
suspected damage to the tire or wheel components.
BEFORE, DURING OR AFTER MOUNTING. This
Check the tire pressure weekly or after 50 hours of
may result in internal tire damage or fire, rim damage
operation.
or a potentially dangerous vapor remaining in the tire.
When Combines are transported on a carrier, such Any of these conditions could cause serious personal
as a railroad car or trailer, the tires are inflated to 207 injury during the mounting and inflating procedure.
kPa (30 PSI) to make possible rigid blocking and to
prevent bouncing. Pressure must be decreased to
operating pressure before the Combine is put into
service.
WARNING: Explosive separation of the tire and/or rim parts can cause injury or death. When tire service is
! necessary, have a qualified tire mechanic service the tires. M328B
WARNING: When inflating tires, use a clip on air chuck and extension hose long enough to allow you to
! stand to one side and NOT in front or over the tire assembly. Use a safety cage if available. M371
WARNING: A tire can explode during inflation and cause serious injury or death. Never increase air
pressure beyond 35 PSI (2.4 bar) to seat the bead on the rim. Replace a tire if it has a defect. Replace a
! wheel rim which has cracks, wear or severe rust. Make sure that all the air is removed from a tire before
removing the tire from the rim. Never use force on an inflated or partially inflated tire. Make sure the tire is
correctly seated before inflating. M170B
WARNING: Multi-piece rim wheels may separate and cause personal injury. Wheel separation may occur
! if machine is operated with low tire inflation pressure. If inflation pressure drops below 62 kPa (9 PSI),
contact qualified tire personnel to pressurize or repair the tire and wheel assembly. M580
WARNING: DO NOT weld to wheel or rim until the tire is completely removed. Inflated tires can generate
a gas mixture with the air that can be ignited by high temperatures from welding procedures performed on
! the wheel or rim. This condition can exist whether tires are inflated or deflated. Removing the air or loosening
the tire on the rim (breaking the bead) will NOT eliminate the hazard. The tire MUST be completely removed
from the wheel or rim prior to welding the wheel or rim. SC134
WARNING: Do not remove, install or make repairs to a tire on a rim. If required, the tire and wheel rim should
be removed from the machine by a qualified field technician with the proper equipment. If required, the field
technician should take the tire and wheel rim to a tire shop where persons with special training and special
! safety tools are available. If the tire is not in correct position on the rim, or if too full of air, the tire bead can
loosen on one side and cause air to leak at high speed and with large force. Because the air leak can thrust
the tire in any direction, and with much force, you will be in danger of injury. M169C
297
TIRE PRESSURE CHARTS
Drive Tires
HEADER MODEL HEADER WIDTH

(Grain Head = ft, Corn Head = rows)
2030 Grain Head 17.5, 20 24, 30 X
2040 Grain Head 17.5, 20 24, 30 X
2050 Grain Head 17.5 20, 24 30
2100 Corn Head X 6R, 6RF 8R, 8RF
SINGLE DRIVE TIRES
650/75R32 LI172A8 R1W 290 kPa (42 psi) 358 kPa (52 psi) Not Approved
800/65R32 172A8 R1W 200 kPa (29 psi) 262 kPa (38 psi) 331 kPa (48 psi)
900/60R32 176A R1 & R1W 158 kPa (23 psi) 207 kPa (30 psi) 269 kPa (39 psi)
Steering Tires
TIRE SIZE PRESSURE
460/70R24 152A8 R4 276 kPa (40 psi)
480/70R30 152A8 R1W 228 kPa (33 psi)
600/65R28 154A8 R1W 152 kPa (22 psi)
298
DRIVE WHEELS
Drive Wheel Tire Valves

To improve access to tire valve, the valve can be
located to the outside of the wheel. 3
Tire valve and valve hole plug have common spud
base (1), so dismounting tire from wheel is not 1
required. If wheel is mounted on Combine, raise 2
Combine until tire clear ground and block up
Combine with jack and blocks as required. Deflate air
from the tire. Unscrew core housing (2) from the tire
valve spud base and unscrew plug (3) from base on 1
other side of wheel. reinstall core housing on outside
of wheel and plug on inside of wheel. Inflate tire to
correct inflation pressure. Remove blocks and jack.
RH06E301
1 3
299
Drive Wheel Hub Bolt Torque

DO NOT LUBRICATE BOLTS OR FINAL DRIVE
HUB THREADS. Wheel bolts should be turned in at
least three full turns by hand before using power
tools to prevent thread damage. Use a Torque
Multiplier (6) and Torque Wrench (8) to tighten bolts.
New Delivered Machine - Wheels Installed
Torque wheel bolts after 10 hours of operation. Use a

Torque Multiplier (6) and Torque Wrench (8) capable
of delivering at least 1355 Nm (1000 lb. ft.).
IMPORTANT: The wheels and wheel hardware

“seat” relative to each other during the first 10 hours RD02E132R / RH07F026
of operation. This retorquing procedure is critical to 10 BOLT WHEEL SHOWN

the structural integrity of the wheels and wheel bolts.
New Delivered Machine - Wheels Not Installed or

When Changing Wheels
Install wheels and hardware per the Installation

diagrams shown on the next page. Tighten the wheel
bolts to a torque of 200 Nm (150 foot pounds), mark
bolt head relative to wheel. Tighten each bolt an
additional 90 degrees. Drive the Combine to a large
firm level surface and perfor m 10 “Figure 8’s”.
Retorque all bolts to 1355 Nm (1000 lb ft). Retorque
RII08F021
again after 10 hours of operation.
IMPORTANT: Final drives use a special locking (not 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

straight) thread design. DO NOT use a standard M22
tap to repair threads damaged during installation. To
repair damaged threads - use a M22 locking thread
tap available from your dealer.
1
RI06G100
1. OUTSIDE DUAL WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
2. WHEEL BOLT
3. BOLT SPACER (IF EQUIPPED)
4. 3/4 INCH DRIVE SOCKET
5. SOCKET EXTENSION - DUAL WHEEL ONLY
6. TORQUE MULTIPLIER
7. SOCKET EXTENSION - 3/4 INCH DRIVE
300
Wheel Installation
RH06G016
SINGLE WHEEL INSTALLATION - 15 BOLT
RI08F047
SINGLE WHEEL INSTALLATION - 10 BOLT
301
RH06G017
WHEEL SPACER INSTALLATION
302
Steering Wheel Hub Bolt Torque

On new machines or after changing steering wheels,
check the hub nuts on non-powered axles or wheel
bolts on powered axles. Check after the first hour of
operation, then every 10 hours of operation for the
first week. These nuts or bolts must be kept tight at
all times. Tighten the steering wheel hub nuts to a
torque of 410 to 492 Nm (302 to 363 pound foot).
Tighten the power guide wheel bolts to a torque of
550 to 610 Nm (406 to 450 pound foot).
RH08E050
POWER GUIDE AND NON POWER GUIDE WHEEL

TORQUE SEQUENCE
RI08C190 RI08C191
NON POWER GUIDE POWER GUIDE
303
DRIVE AXLE
Drive Wheels
Operate the Combine with the drive wheels turned out for maximum tread. The wide tread will help the stability of
the Combine. Operate the Combine with the drive wheels turned in to the minimum tread when harvesting on level
ground or in certain row crop conditions.
NOTE: Refer to the Tire Selection Chart for wheel treads.
WARNING: When operating the Combine with the wheels turned in for minimum tread, extreme care must
! be used to prevent the Combine from tipping over. M179A
304
STEERING AXLE
Refer to Steering Wheel Tread Positions in this
manual for steering axle width adjustment.
Toe In
Check the TOE IN with the Combine on level ground
and the steering wheels in the straight position.
1. Measure from the ground to the center of the

wheel hub (A).
2. Mark the front and rear of each rim with chalk at

the same height as measurement (A) and 300 RH08A020
mm from center of hub. Be sure to mark on the REAR VIEW - ALL EUROPE EXCEPT GERMANY
inner side of each rim. (See chalk mark locations
X in dimension A.
3. Make sure the wheels are in the neutral steer

position. Measure the distance between chalk
marks on the front of the rims (measurement B)
and rear of the rims (measurement C). C should
be larger than B. Subtract B from C to get the
TOE IN.
4. Rotate the wheels so that the marks at the rear

are now in the front. Repeat Step 3.
NOTE: The wheels can be rotated by raising the rear

axle off the ground or by moving the machine forward RH08A016
or rearward on smooth, level ground. Make REAR VIEW - GERMANY
measurements with the wheels on the ground.
5. Calculate an average TOE IN from the two TOE

IN values compiled. Compare this average to the
recommended TOE IN.
6. (If necessary) if the TOE IN is not in the

recommended range, adjust the tie rod length (1)
until the correct TOE IN is achieved.
NOTE: The left and right hand tie rod ends must be
adjusted the same amount to obtain full steering in
both directions.
1
RH08E047
305
MACHINE TOP VIEW
C B
RI00H074
B
RI08F017
TOE IN RANGE
8 TO 12 mm (0.3125 TO 0.50 INCH)
306
Steering Axle Positions
RH07G025
1. HEIGHT POSITION “A” 2. HEIGHT POSITION “B”
The Combine steering axle extension is adjusted for Tie rods and steer stop bolts must be adjusted with
the tire and axle combination installed at the factory. the axle extensions. See the Tire Selection And
The axle extension must be changed to level the Wheel Spacing Chart for proper stop bolt settings.
Combine when the tire size combination or the drive
Tighten the tie rod bolts to a torque of 122 to 163 Nm
axle clearance has been changed.
(90 to 120 lb ft). Tighten the steering stop bolt to a
The steering axle extension can be installed in two torque of 135 to 176 Nm (100 to 130 lb ft).
different height positions and four different width
positions.
WARNING: Before adjusting the steering
Change the position of the extension for the drive tire axle, use suitable jack stands securely
and steering tire combinations as listed in the Tire
Selection And Wheel Spacing Chart in this section.
! positioned underneath the rear of the
machine. Failure to comply may result in
death or serious injury. M1291
Install the bolts from the rear and tighten to a torque
of 440 to 485 Nm (324 to 358 lb ft).
307
Height Positions
Height position “A”. (shown in width position 2)
RI08D164
Height position “B”. (shown in width position 2)
RI08D165
Width Position
NOTE: Non power guide axle in height position “B”

shown in all views.
Width position “1”.
RI08D160
308
RI08D161
RI08D162
RI08D163
309
POWER GUIDE WHEEL DRIVE (If Equipped)

The hydraulic rear wheel drive provides additional propulsion for extreme operating conditions (mud) and
assistance to steering. This is accomplished by directing oil flow from the hydrostatic drive high pressure tubes
through a directional control valve to a hydraulic motor in each rear wheel. The control valve provides a positraction
effect in both forward and reverse.
RH08D314
When the Power Guide Wheel Drive is engaged the amount of wheel torque obtained is strictly a function of
hydrostatic pressure. The higher gear selection you have the higher your hydrostatic system pressure will be. For
this reason you will actually get a higher percentage of power assist from the Power Guide Wheel Drive in higher
gear ranges.
It is best to use the Power Guide Wheel Drive at all

times when working in the field. These advantages
are gained: first, you will be operating at lower
system pressure, extending the life of the main
hydrostatic transmission and gear train; second,
you will have improved steering obtained through
powering the rear steerable wheels; and finally,
running at lower systems pressure will normally
lower the hydrostatic oil temperature.
1
The Power Guide Wheel Drive is engaged by a
switch (1) on the console that energizes the solenoid
to activate the valve. The drive may be engaged or
disengaged at any time. When engaged the ground A24293
speed will decrease.
For operating the Combine on roads switch the

Power Guide Wheel Drive to OFF to obtain high road
speeds. The wheel motors automatically free wheel
when the Power Guide Wheel Drive is turned OFF.
There is no limit to the distance the machine can be
operated on the road.
310
STEERING AXLE WEIGHTS - BALLAST
Combines With And Without Power Guide Wheels

NOTE: Headers listed are the only Headers that require ballast. Other Headers do not require ballast.
NOTE: Use cast iron weights on rear wheels or fluid in rear tires to ballast steering axle.
Axial - Flow 5088 Combine

2100 Series Corn Head 6RF W/Non Power Guide............................................................................ 200 kg (440 lbs)

2100 Series Corn Head 8RF W/Power Guide ................................................................................... 400 kg (880 lbs)

2100 Series Corn Head 8RF W/Power Guide ................................................................................... 400 kg (880 lbs)
311
See Tire Chart on next page.
312
313
314
8 - LUBRICATION/FILTERS/FLUIDS
SHIELDS AND SIDE PANELS

To do maintenance on the different Combine systems ATTENTION: ALWAYS close or install shields and
the shields and side panels may have to be opened side panels to field operation position before
or removed. operating the machine in the field.
1 2
RH08A005 RH08D241
6
5
RD07K038 RD07K040
1. RIGHT SERVICE DOOR 3. RIGHT FRONT SIDE PANEL 5. LEFT FRONT SIDE PANEL
2. LEFT SERVICE DOOR 4. ROCKTRAP SHIELD 6. LEFT REAR SIDE PANEL
315
9
10
11
7
RD07K037 RH08A028
RD07K039
7. ROTARY AIR SCREEN PANEL 10. RIGHT SIDE MIDDLE SCREEN

8. FEEDER DRIVE SHIELDS 11. RIGHT SIDE FRONT SCREEN
9. RIGHT SIDE REAR SCREEN
WARNING: Rotating machine parts, stay clear, keep shields installed to help protect from clothing
! entanglement and injury. Wear close-fitted clothing. M124A
316
SERVICE REMINDER
Use the Service Reminder screens along with the
lubrication chart to service your Combine at the
correct service intervals.
See Ser vice Reminder Screen in Combine

Adjustments and Calibration for information on
setting up the service reminder screens.
RD07G057
ENVIRONMENT
Before you service this machine and before you Check with your local environmental or recycling
dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always center or your dealer for correct disposal information.
remember the environment. DO NOT put oil or fluids
into the ground or into containers that leak.
PLASTIC AND RESIN PARTS

Avoid using gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, etc., Using gasoline, kerosene, thinners, etc., will cause
when cleaning the instrument cluster, gauges, discoloration, cracking or deformation of the part
console, plastic windows, etc. Use ONLY water, mild being cleaned.
soap and a soft cloth when you clean these parts.
317
LUBRICATION/MAINTENANCE CHART
Procedure Every Every Every Every Every Every Every
10 50 100 300 600 1200 4500
Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours
Dump Rock Trap (If Equipped) X
Grease 10 Hr Fittings (Note 1) X
Check Wheel Bolt Torques (Note 2) X
Check Alternator Screen - Clean AR X
Check Hydraulic Reservoir X
Check Moisture Sensor (If Equipped) - Clean AR X
Oil Grain Elevator Chain (Note 3) X
Oil Tailings Elevator Chain (Note 3) X
Oil Auger Drive and Unloader Drive Chain (Note 3) X
Drain Water Separator Filter (Note 4) - Change AR X
Check Tire Pressures (Note 5) X
Oil Rock Trap Drive Chain (If Equipped) (Note 3) X
Check Feeder Reverser Mechanism (Note 12) - Clean AR X
Check Radiator Coolant Level X
Check PTO Fluid X
Check Rotor Gear Case Fluid Level X
Check Straw Chopper Gear Case Level (If Equipped) X
Check Transmission Fluid Level X
Check Final Drive Oil Level X
Check Battery Water level (Note 6) X
Clean Hydraulic Reservoir Breather X
Check Cleaning Fan and Feeder Gear Case Oil X
Change Engine Oil and Filter X
Change Coolant Filter X
Grease Hydraulic Pump Spline Fittings (Note 1) X
Check Inclined Delivery Auger Gear Case Oil X
Grease Unloader Idler (Note 1) X
Check Two Speed Header Drive Gear Case Fluid (If Equipped) X
Check Lower Unloader Gear Case Oil Level X
Tighten Coolant System Hose Clamps X
Change PTO Fluid X
Change Cleaning Fan and Feeder Gear Case Oil X
Change Lower Unloader Gear Case Fluid X
Change Rotor Gear Case Fluid X
Change Straw Chopper Gear Case Fluid (If Equipped) X
Change Transmission Fluid X
Change Final Drive Fluid X
Change Engine Fuel Filter (Note 7) X
318
Procedure Every Every Every Every Every Every Every

10 50 100 300 600 1200 4500
Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours
Change Feeder and Cleaning Fan Gear Case Fluid and Grease Shaft Bearing X
Check Upper Unloader Gear Case Oil Level (Note 11) X
Change Inclined Delivery Auger Gear Case Oil X
Change Two Speed Header Drive Gear Case Fluid (If Equipped) X
Change Primary Air Filter Element - Clean AR (Note 8) X
Change Engine Radiator Fluid (1800 Hours) X
Change Hydraulic Fluid and Filters X
Check Engine Valve Adjustment (Note 10) X
Check and Clean Fuel Injection Nozzles (Note 10) X
Change Secondary Air Filter- -AN
Clean Cab Air Filter - AR
Clean Cab Recirculation Air Filter - AR
Clean Radiator and Oil Cooler - AR
Check Accumulator (Note 10) - AR
Clean Yield Monitor Screen - AR
Notes:
1. Use CASE IH 251H EP grease or equivalent 8. Clean the element when the air filter restriction
NLGI No. 2 Multi-Purpose Lithium Grease. indicator is ON. Replace the element after 3
cleanings or annually.
2. Check the wheel bolts and nuts after the first
hour of operation, then every 10 hours during the 9. Change the secondary element whenever the
first week of operation, then every 100 hours primary element is changed. DO NOT clean the
thereafter. secondary element.
3. Use CASE IH Chain and Cable Lube (M20832). 10. See your dealer to have this service performed.
4. Replace if a loss of horsepower occurs. 11. Does not have to be changed.
5. Check the tire pressures weekly or every 50 12. Clean dirt and trash buildup from the upper and
hours. lower guide slots and motor frame area using
compressed air or water to ensure the
6. Check the water level every 100 hours or every 3 mechanism operates freely.
months.
AR = As Required
7. Replace the filter when a loss of horsepower
occurs or every 600 hours. AN = Annually
319
GREASE FITTINGS - TOP
3 4 5
6
1A
2 7
87488845
10 Hours
1 1A
RD05F095 RD05F095
Rotor Driven Pulley (1) - Use CASE IH 251H EP. Rotor Driven Cam Bearings (2) - Use CASE IH 251H
Pump until grease comes out of rear seal. EP - 5088 ONLY
320
50 Hours
2 5
RD00H036 RD02E164
Auxiliary Pump Tensioner Arm Rotor Speed Control Bear ing - Rear (1), two
pumps only
3
100 Hours
RD02E216
Rotor Speed Control Bearing - Front (1)
4 RD05F092
Separator Jackshaft (1) - Non chopper models only)
300 Hours
RD02E164
Rotor Drive Pulley (1)
RH08A026
Hydraulic Pump Coupler (Rotate engine until grease

fitting is visible in access port on top)
321
GREASE FITTINGS - LEFT SIDE
2
8
3
7
5 6
4 1
87720294
50 Hours
1 2
RD00H025 A24322
Chaffer Hanger (1) Unloader Drive Tightener Arm
RH08E045
Ball Joint
322
100 Hours 300 Hours
4 7
RD97G057 RH08A027
Drive Wheel Coupling - Outer (1) Unloader Auger Chain Drive Idler Tension Slide
5 600 Hours
RD00H037
Drive Wheel Coupling - Inner (1)

RH07G082
6 Feeder Jackshaft Bearing
RH08F039
Power Guide Axle Steering Knuckle (2)

A16683
Straw Copper Bearing (1)
323
GREASE FITTINGS - RIGHT SIDE
1 2 18
11 12 13
3 19
22
8 9 10
17 5 14
20 21 6 7 15 16
87720295
10 Hours
1 2
RK99G127 A24428
Chaffer Hanger (1) Tailings Delivery Auger Bearing (1)
324
50 Hours
3 6
RD02E200 A24489
Straw Chopper Idler Arm (1) Cleaning Unit Idler Arm (1)
4 7
RH07G008 A24495
Straw Spreader Idler Arm (1) Cleaning Fan Pulley (1)
5 8
RH08E046 RH07G027
Ball Joint Feeder Engage Idler Arm (1)
325
9 10
RH07G071 A1289.35
Header Jackshaft Belt Idler Arm (1) Fan Drive Belt Tightener Arm (1)
100 Hours
11 12 13
A24383
Elevator Drive Slip Clutch (1)

Elevator Inner Shaft Bearing (1)
Elevator Outer Shaft Bearing (1)
14 15
RH08A034 RH08C206
Tailings Auger Shaft Bearing (1) Fan Drive Thrust Bearing (1)
326
100 Hours 600 Hours
16 18
RD97G057 RH08A025
Drive Wheel Coupling - Outer (1) Header Jackshaft Bearing (Without Two Speed
Gearcase)
16
19
RD00E096
Drive Wheel Coupling - Inner (1) RD00E001
Feeder and Cleaning Fan Gear Case (1)
17
20
RH08F038
Power Guide Axle Steering Knuckle (2) A1413S35
Shaker Shaft Drive Slip Clutch (1)
327
600 Hours
21 22
A24494 A6695
Cleaning Fan Jackshaft (1) Straw Chopper Bearing (1)
328
CHAIN LUBRICATION
5
3
571L94R
NOTE: Use Case IH Chain and Cable Lube NOTE: Avoid excessive chain lubrication in severe
(M20832) or SAE 30 or heavier engine oil. Lubricate dust or sandy conditions. Sand or dust buildup can
the chain after running the Combine. Oils penetrate accelerate chain and sprocket wear. DO NOT
better between pins and bushings on a warm chain. lubricate the clean grain elevator chain, tailings
elevator chain or the feeder conveyor chain which run
in crop.
10 Hours
1
2
RH07G012
Grain Tank Auger Drive and Unloader Drive Chain
329
3 5
A
RH08D242
Rock Trap Chain
RH07G010
A. ELEVATOR DRIVE B. INCLINE AUGER DRIVE
SPROCKET SROCKET
Grain Elevator Chain
A24428
Tailings Elevator Chain
330
COMBINE SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Lubrication
Oil Level Check Interval .......................................................................................................................................Daily
Oil Change Interval ......................................................................................................................... Every 300 Hours
Oil Capacity - Without Filter Change ................................................................................. 19 Liters (20 U.S. Quarts)
Oil Capacity - With Filter Change ................................................................................... 22.7 Liters (24 U.S. Quarts)
Oil Type............................................................................................................................CASE Number 1 Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter

Filter Change Interval .............................................................................................. Every 300 Hours or Once a Year
Cooling System
Coolant Level Check Interval .............................................................................................................. Every 10 Hours
Check and Tighten Coolant Hose Clamps ....................................................................................... Every 250 Hours
Coolant Filter Change Interval ......................................................................................................... Every 300 Hours
Coolant System Change Interval.............................................................Every 2000 Hours (or Once Every 2 Years)
Coolant Conditioner Change Interval ....................................... Every 2000 Hours (or Anytime Coolant is Changed)
Coolant Capacity ......................................................................................................... 37.1 Liters (39.2 U.S. Quarts)
Thermostat ..................................................................................................................83° to 95° C (181° F to 203° F)
Deaeration Tank Cap ..........................................................................................................................69 kPa (10 PSI)
Fuel System
Water Separator Filter .............................Drain Water Every 50 Hours. Replace when a loss of horsepower occurs.
Primary Engine Filter .............................................. Replace Every 600 Hours or when a loss of horsepower occurs
Fuel Tank Vent Filter ...........................................Replace Every 600 Hours or if a vacuum is noticed in the fuel tank
Fuel Type ......................................................................................................................................Number Two Diesel
Air Filter
Filter Service Interval......................................................................Clean When Air Filter Restriction Indicator is ON
Primary Filter Replacement Interval ................................................................ Once a Year or After Three Cleanings
Secondary Filter Replacement Interval .......................... Replace when Primary Filter is Replaced - DO NOT Clean
Transmission
Oil Level Check Interval .................................................................................................................... Every 100 Hours
Oil Change Interval..................................................................................................................................... 600 Hours
Oil Capacity ...................................................................................................................16.2 Liters (4.3 U.S. Gallons)
Oil Type.......................................................................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA
Final Drive
Fluid Level Check Interval ................................................................................................................ Every 100 Hours
Fluid Change Interval ....................................................................................................................... Every 600 Hours
Fluid Capacity (Each) ...................................................................................................... 12.3 Liters (13 U.S. Quarts)
Fluid Type .............................................................................................CASE IH 135 H EP 85W-140 Gear Lubricant
331
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir and Filters

Oil Level Check Interval.........................................................................................................Every 10 Hours or Daily
Clean Reservoir Breather ................................................................................................................. Every 100 Hours
Reservoir Capacity ............................................................................................................38 Liters (10 U.S. Gallons)
Hydraulic Oil Type.......................................................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA
Hydraulic Oil Filter Change Interval................................................................................................ Every 1200 Hours
Hydraulic Oil Change Interval......................................................................................................... Every 1200 Hours
PTO Housing
Fluid Change Interval ..................................................................................................................... Every 600 Hours
Oil Capacity ..................................................................................................................... 13.2 Liters (14 U.S. Quarts)
Oil Type.......................................................................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA
Feeder and Cleaning Fan Gear Case

Oil Level Check Interval.................................................................................................................... Every 100 Hours
Oil Change Interval........................................................................................................................... Every 600 Hours
Oil Capacity ..................................................................................................................6.4 Liters (6-3/4 U.S. Quarts)
Oil Type................................................................................................... CASE IH Gear Lubricant SSL SAE 75W-90
Lower Unloader Gear Case

Oil Level Check Interval.................................................................................................................... Every 300 Hours
Oil Change Interval........................................................................................................................... Every 600 Hours
Oil Capacity ......................................................................................................................... 0.6 Liters (1.2 U.S. Pints)
Oil Type............................................................................... CASE IH 135 H EP 85W-140 or 80W-90 Gear Lubricant
Upper Unloader Gear Case

Oil Lever Check Interval ................................................................................................................... Every 600 Hours
Oil Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 0.43 Liters (0.9 U.S. Pints)
Oil Type............................................................................... CASE IH 135 H EP 85W-140 or 80W-90 Gear Lubricant
Rotor Gear Case

Fluid Capacity................................................................................................................... 7.5 Liters (7.9 U.S. Quarts)
Fluid Type .............................................................................................CASE IH 135 H EP 85W-140 Gear Lubricant
Straw Chopper Gear Case (If Equipped)

Fluid Type ...................................................................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA
Two Speed Feeder Gear Case (If Equipped)

Fluid Type ...................................................................................................................... CASE IH HY-TRAN® ULTRA
Inclined Auger Gear Case

Fluid Capacity............................................................................................................... 0.15 Liters (5.0 U.S. Ounces)
Fluid Type ........................................................................... CASE IH 135 H EP 85W-140 or 80W-90 Gear Lubricant
332
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Engine Oil Level

To check the engine oil level, put the Combine on
level ground and stop the engine. It is best to 1
2
check oil before engine is started. This allows the
oil time to flow into the sump to ensure an accurate
reading. Turn the dipstick handle counterclockwise
to remove the dipstick. If the oil level is below the
cross hatched mark, add oil to raise the oil level to
within the safe range. Do not raise the oil level
above the FULL mark.
Install the dipstick and turn the handle clockwise to

RD07K042
secure the dipstick in the tube.
1. DIPSTICK 2. OIL FILLER
Engine Oil Selection

CASE IH Number 1 Engine Oil is recommended for
use in your CASE Engine. CASE IH Engine Oil will
lubricate your engine correctly under all operating
conditions.
If CASE IH Number 1 Multi-Viscosity Engine Oil is

not available, only use oil meeting API engine oil
service category CI-4.
NOTE: DO NOT put Performance Additives or other

oil additive products in the engine crankcase. The oil
change intervals given in this manual are according
to tests with Case lubricants.
RH04F059
RR04F004
1 3
333
Synthetic Lubricants
Synthetic lubricants are available from your dealer for
your machine. Synthetics are used just as you would
use mineral-based lubricants.
IMPORTANT: The use of synthetic lubricants does

NOT permit extension of recommended service
intervals. All synthetic oils must meet or exceed the
API service requirements.
RR4F001
Oil Viscosity/Temperature Usage Recommendation
RR05N002
∗ Use of an engine oil heater, or an engine coolant heater, is required in shaded area.
334
Engine Oil Change

To change the engine oil put the Combine on level
ground and stop the engine. Change the engine oil
as follows:
NOTE: For best results change the oil while the

engine is still warm from operation.
1. Place the end of the engine oil drain hose (1) in 1

an appropriate size container. Loosen the oil filler
cap to vent the engine.
2. Open the oil pan drain valve (2) and drain the oil
from the engine.
RD07K044
3. Close the oil pan drain valve.
4. See ENGINE OIL FILTER if the oil filter is to be

changed.
5. Put the correct type and amount of new oil into

the engine. Remove the dipstick and check the
engine oil level. (See Engine Oil Level in this 2
manual).
6. Start the engine and check to make sure the

lubricating oil is pressurized.
7. Inspect the engine oil filter for leaks.

RH08B086
335
Engine Oil Filter

I M P O R TA N T: C h a n g e t h e o i l f i l t e r a t t h e
recommended time inter val. Your dealer has
approved filters. Do not use other type filters.
Change the engine oil filter as follows:
1. Drain the oil from the engine.
2. Turn the oil filter counterclockwise to remove.

Use a filter wrench if necessary.
3. Apply clean oil to the gasket on the new filter.
4. Install the filter. Turn the filter until the gasket RD07K043
comes in contact with the filter head. Tighten the

filter an additional one half turn by hand.
5. Loosen the filter approximately one turn. Turn the

filter again until the gasket comes in contact with
the filter head. Tighten the filter an additional one
half to three-fourths of a turn by hand.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a filter wrench to install

the oil filter. When the filter is too tight damage to the
gasket and filter may occur.
6. Close the oil pan drain valve.
7. Install new oil in the engine.
336
COOLING SYSTEM
Pressure Cooling System
WARNING: Check and service cooling system according to maintenance instructions. Hot coolant can
spray out if deaeration tank cap is removed while system is hot. To remove deaeration tank cap, let system
! cool, turn to first notch, then wait until all pressure is released. Scalding can result from fast removal of the
deaeration tank cap. M513
1. The pressure cap on a pressure cooling

system has a control valve that operates as a
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE to keep the pressure
within the system operating range. Operating
1
the engine without a pressure cap or with a
pressure cap that has a control valve that is
not set to operate at the correct pressure, can
cause damage.
2. A pressure cooling system decreases the loss of

coolant caused by evaporation or boiling. The
system must have good seals at the deaeration
tank pressure cap, hoses and hose connections.
It is important that you stop ALL LEAKS OF ANY RD03J102
SIZE as soon as the leaks are found. A small

leak can become a large flow when pressure is
increased in the cooling system. While the
Combine is in operation, a weak hose can break
and cause injury or damage. Check all hoses
and hose connections with frequency. KEEP
HOSES, HOSE CONNECTIONS AND
PRESSURE CAP IN GOOD CONDITION.
3. Check the coolant level of the deaeration tank

every 10 hours of operation. The cold coolant
level must cover the deaeration tank sight glass
(1).
Thermostat
NOTE: Do not operate the Combine without a
thermostat or with a defective thermostat. The
engine can run too hot or too cold causing possible
engine damage.
337
Coolant Solutions
Combine is shipped with the cooling systems filled When filling the system, you may use a premixed
with a 50 percent mixture of distilled water and 50:50 Ethylene Glycol/water solution or mix Ethylene
Ethylene Glycol solution for freeze and corrosion Glycol concentrate with water. Always use a good
protection. quality Ethylene Glycol coolant that Does Not
have any additives to stop leaks. The coolant must
You may need to add small amounts of coolant to the contain less than 0.1 percent silicate and must meet
cooling system to keep the system full (See Cooling ASTM specification D-4985 or D-5345.
System Filling in this manual). The engine on this
machine requires a Supplemental Coolant Additive IMPORTANT: Use only heavy duty low silicate
(SCA) for protection against corrosion of the cylinder coolant. Automotive antifreeze purchased at local
liners. Your engine has a special coolant filter which supply store outlets most likely is NOT low silicate
maintains the level of SCA in the cooling system and and MUST NOT be used in Case heavy duty diesel
which must be replaced at specified intervals listed in engine.
this manual. When adding to the cooling system, it is
recommended that a 50:50 mixture of low silicate Do Not install any r ust inhibitors that are not
heavy duty Ethylene Glycol/water coolant solution, approved. It is possible that the rust inhibitors and
containing SCA (Available at your dealer), be added. coolant will not mix and will work against each other
This will give your system maximum protection. to decrease corrosion protection, form deposits in the
cooling system and cause damage to the cooling
IMPORTANT: Change the coolant solution every two system and the radiator.
years as recommended in this manual. The heat
generated by the diesel engine causes a natural Do Not use a low boiling point, alcohol type coolant
change in the coolant which results in loss of solution. The boiling point of alcohol is below the
corrosion protection. The loss of the inhibitors may Combine minimum operating temperature, loss of
cause water pump cavitation and cylinder block coolant from evaporation will cause overheating.
erosion.
When refilling with a 50:50 mix of fully formulated
When draining system and refilling with new coolant (Containing SCA) low silicate heavy duty coolant,
at the intervals specified in this manual, remember always replace the coolant filter conditioner using a
that a mixture of 50% Ethylene Glycol and 50% good maintenance size filter.
quality water must be used. A 50:50 mixture is used if
the lowest outside temperature is above -37°C (- When refilling with a 50:50 mix of regular (Without
34°F). If the temperature is lower, adjust the mixture containing SCA) heavy duty coolant, always replace
to get a lower freeze point using the freeze point the coolant filter conditioner using a precharge size
concentration chart on the label of your antifreeze filter. If a maintenance size filter is used, you MUST
concentrate container. NEVER use a coolant add CASE Cooling System Treatment (Available from
solution containing more than 60% Ethylene your dealer) to the system for maximum protection.
Glycol. It is recommended that Ethylene Glycol and
water be used in your machine at all times. Fill the deaeration tank and radiator using the
procedure specified in this manual (See Filling the
Cooling System in this chapter).
338
Coolant System Filter Conditioner

The cooling system filter (1) contains an element
which filters the coolant and provides chemicals to
condition the coolant.
To maintain protection of the cooling system from

corrosion, deposit formations, chemical attach and
1
cavitation erosion of cylinder sleeves, the coolant
filter conditioner must be changed every 250 hours of
operation.
Whenever the cooling system is drained and refilled,

the coolant must be treated with CASE Cooling
System Treatment (Available from your dealer). The
coolant filter must also be replaced. This will assure RD07K043
that the chemical concentration is returned to the

same level as before draining the system. Changing
only the filter will not provide adequate chemical
additives.
The coolant filter shutoff valve must be closed before

changing the coolant filter.
TO REMOVE THE FILTER:
1. Close the shutoff valve.
2. Use a strap type wrench or filter wrench to

remove the filter.
TO INSTALL THE FILTER:
1. Lubricate the gasket on the new filter.
2. Turn the filter on the threads of the adapter until

the gasket makes contact.
3. Tighten the filter 1/2 to 3/4 turn after the gasket

makes contact with the adapter. DO NOT tighten
too much. DO NOT use a filter wrench to tighten
the filter.
4. Open the shutoff valve.
NOTE: Adding coolant “Stop Leak” to the cooling

system will cause premature plugging of the filter.
! WARNING: Hot coolant can spray under pressure. Close valves before removing filter. M153A
339
Draining the Cooling System

Clean the cooling system each time the coolant is
changed. Clean the system as follows:
1. When the coolant is hot, open the radiator drain

valve (1) and the block drain valve (2). Close the
drain valves after the system is empty. 1
2. Install a good type of radiator cleaner and fill the
system with clean water. Follow the instructions
given with the radiator cleaner.
3. Remove the radiator cleaner solution. Flush the

system with clean water.
RH08B056
IMPORTANT: Never put coolant in a hot engine

because the difference in temperature between the
metal and the coolant can cause cracks.
RD07K045
340
Filling the Cooling System

Any time the radiator is drained or if the coolant level
in the deaeration tank is below the sight glass on the
deaeration tank, the following procedure must be
used to install coolant in the deaeration tank and
radiator:
1
IMPORTANT: NEVER PUT COOLANT IN A HOT

ENGINE: THE ENGINE BLOCK OR CYLINDER 2
HEADS CAN GET CRACKS BECAUSE OF THE
DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE BETWEEN THE
METAL AND THE COOLANT.
Before filling the cooling system make sure all drains

are closed. RD03J102
1. Fill the cooling system with the coolant solution

specified in this manual.
2. Remove the deaeration tank cap (1). Fill the

deaeration tank and radiator slowly (which
permits air to escape). Fill the deaeration tank to
the top of the sight glass (2).
3. Check the hoses, radiator, pump and water

manifold for leaks.
4. Install the deaeration tank cap (1).
5. Start the engine and run at low idle for one

minute. Refill the deaeration tank to the top of the
sight glass (2).
6. Start the engine and increase the coolant

temperature to normal operating temperature.
7. Stop the engine to permit the coolant to cool.
8. Make sure you can see fluid in the deaeration

tank sight glass (2). If necessary add coolant
solution to the deaeration tank to fill the sight
glass (2).
Air-to-Air Intercooling
Th i s Co m bi n e i s e q u ip p e d w i th a n a i r - t o- ai r
intercooler to increase power (denser air) and
improve emissions. The engine intake air in this
cooler, tubes, and hoses are pressurized to turbo
boost pressure. It is very important that all hose,
gasket, and O-ring joints in this system are leakproof.
If not, engine power will be reduced.
341
FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system on the Combine has a 690 liter (180 Fuel Conditioner
U.S. Gallon) fuel tank, water separator filter, fuel
filters and fuel injection parts. To prevent dirt and Diesel Fuel Conditioner is available from your dealer.
water from reaching the injection parts, which will Instructions for the use of the fuel conditioner are on
cause damage and decrease performance, use the container.
clean fuel, drain the water separator filter at regular
intervals and service the fuel filters. The use of Diesel Fuel Conditioner will:
FOR THE PROTECTION OF YOUR FUEL SYSTEM, 1. Clean fuel injectors, valves and manifolds for
GET CLEAN FUEL AND KEEP THE FUEL CLEAN. increased service life.
Diesel Fuel Specifications 2. Disperse insoluble gummy deposits that can

form in the fuel system.
Use a Number 2 Diesel fuel in your engine. Do not
use other types or grades of fuel. The use of other 3. Separate moisture from the fuel.
fuels will result in loss of engine power and high fuel
consumption. 4. Stabilize fuel in storage.
NOTE: When the temperature is very cold, the use

of a mixture of Number 1 and Number 2 Diesel fuel is
permitted for a short period of time. See your fuel
dealer for winter fuel requirements in your area.
342
Biodiesel Fuel
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester Biodiesel (Biodiesel Fuel) With Biodiesel Fuels, it may be necessary to change
consists of a family of fuels derived from vegetable the engine oil, engine oil filter and fuel filter elements
oils treated with methyl esters. more frequently than with Diesel Fuels. Biodiesel
Fuel can remove rust and particles from the inside of
IMPORTANT: Biodiesel Fuel blends are approved on-site fuel storage tanks that would normally adhere
for your engine only if they comply with Specification to the sides of the tank. Like particle deposits that
standards EN14214 or ASTM D6751. commonly occur with Diesel Fuel, these particles can
become trapped by the machine fuel filters, causing
IMPORTANT: It is imperative that you check which blockage and shortening filter life. In cold weather,
blend is approved for your engine with your local this is more likely to happen. Consult your dealer for
dealer. Beware that the use of Biodiesel Fuel that information on cold weather operation and proper
does not comply with the Standards mentioned maintenance intervals when using any Biodiesel Fuel
above could lead to severe damage to the engine blend.
and fuel system of your machine. The use of fuels
that are not approved may void Warranty coverage. When handling Biodiesel Fuel, care must be taken
not to allow water into the fuel supply. Biodiesel Fuel
will actually attract moisture from the atmosphere.
Biodiesel Fuel Usage Conditions Fuel tanks must be kept as full as possible to limit the
amount of air and water vapors in them. It may be
IMPORTANT: The Biodiesel Fuel must meet the fuel necessary to drain the fuel filter water tap more
Specification mentioned above. frequently.
Biodiesel Fuel must be purchased from a trusted Potential oxidation and stability could be a problem
supplier that understands the product and maintains with the fuel stored in the machine.
good fuel quality. Biodiesel Fuel must be pre-blended
by the supplier. Mixing Biodiesel Fuels on-site can IMPORTANT: Machines must not be stored for more
result incorrect mixture that can lead to problems than 3 months with Biodiesel Fuel blends in the fuel
with both engine and fuel system. system.
Engine perfor mance is affected by the use of If long storage periods are necessary, the engine
Biodiesel Fuel. There may be up to 12 percent must run on Diesel Fuel for 20 hours to flush the
reduction in power or torque depending on the blend Biodiesel Fuel out of the engine fuel system prior to
used. storage.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT modify the engine and/or IMPORTANT: Biodiesel Fuel must not be stored in
injection pump settings to recover the reduced on-site storage tanks for more than 3 months.
performance.
Any spillage of Biodiesel Fuel must be cleaned up
The reduced power must be accepted if using any immediately before it can cause damage to the
Biodiesel Fuel blend. environment and the paint finish of the machine.
Some modification may be required to allow your Before using Biodiesel Fuel blends you should
engine to run Biodiesel Fuel. Consult you dealer for consult with your dealer to receive full information
complete information on these modifications. about the approved blend for your machine and any
detailed conditions of its usage.
Biodiesel Fuel has a higher cloud point than Diesel
Fuel. IMPORTANT: Be aware that not fulfilling the
requirements and conditions of Biodiesel Fuel usage
IMPORTANT: The use of high Biodiesel Fuel blends will void your machine’s Warranty coverage.
are not recommended in cold weather conditions.
343
Water Separator Filter Replacement

Close the fuel tank shutoff valve (1). Disconnect the
harness(2) from the filter bottom. Remove the water
separator filter (3) with a clamp type filter wrench.
Pre-fill the filter with clean fuel. Lubricate the new
filter gasket with a small amount of clean oil or
grease. Install the filter. Open the fuel tank shutoff
valve. To remove air from the system, refer to Air
Removal in this manual. 1
3
IMPORTANT: Turn the filter clockwise until the filter
gasket comes in contact with the filter head. Use your
hand to tighten 1/2 of a turn. To obtain the correct
seal, loosen the filter and again tighten 1/2 to 3/4 of a 2
turn after the gasket comes in contact with the filter RD07K046
head. When the filter is too tight, damage can occur

to the gasket and filter.
NOTE: When draining water from or changing the

water separator filter, always drain any water from the
fuel tank. Open the fuel tank drain located on the left
hand side of the tank until fuel flows from the drain.
Close the tank drain.
344
Fuel Filter Replacement

1. Turn the fuel shutoff valve clockwise to stop the
fuel.
2. Clean the filter and engine area next to the filter.
3. Turn the filter counterclockwise to remove. Use a
clamp wrench if required.
4. Remove and discard the gasket from the
adapter. Install a new gasket on the adapter.
5. Apply clean oil or grease to the gasket on the
new filters.
NOTE: Do not pre-fill the fuel filter located on the

engine. RD07K047
6. Install the new filter.
IMPORTANT: Turn the filter clockwise until the

gasket contacts the filter head. Use your hand to
tighten 1/2 of a turn. To obtain the correct seal,
loosen the filter and again tighten 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn
after the gasket contacts the filter head. When the
filter is too tight damage can occur to the gasket and
filter.
7. Turn the key switch ON and allow the electric fuel

pump to operate for approximately 2 minutes
prior to starting the engine.
8. Fill the fuel tank and remove air from the fuel
system.
NOTE: If the engine does not have power with a full

load after you have removed the air from the system,
see your dealer.
Fuel Tank Vent Filter Replacement

1. Loosen clamp holding filter in place.
2. Remove vent line.
3. Replace filter in clamp and install vent line.
NOTE: Filter must be replaced if a vacuum is noticed

in the tank. A hissing sound as the fuel cap is being
removed is an indication that the fuel tank vent filter
is plugged.
RH07G075
345
Fuel System Air Removal

Air must be removed from the fuel system. Air can
enter the fuel system under the following conditions:
● The fuel tank has no fuel.
● Fuel system par t are removed for service or
repairs.
● The Combine is in storage for a long period of
time.
1
NOTE: If the Combine has no fuel it is possible to
put fuel in the tank and start the engine without doing
the air removal procedure. However, a small amount
of air can be in the filters and injection pump. Air in
RD07K046
the system will cause loss of power and engine stall
when a load is applied.
WARNING: Never refuel the machine when

! the engine is hot or running. Never smoke
while refueling. M139C
1. Make sure there is fuel in the fuel tank.
2. Fill water separator filter (1) with fuel.
3. Turn key On and wait approximately 35 seconds

to allow the fuel system to prime. Tur n the
ignition key to the OFF position.
4. Repeat Step 3 two more times (Total of three

cycles).
5. Start engine.
NOTE: If the engine will not start, repeat Steps 3

and 4.
NOTE: Diminished engine performance can occur if

the fuel supply system is not bled properly.
IMPORTANT: Never crank the engine to remove air

from the fuel system or engine damage can occur.
346
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Air Filter Restriction Indicator

When the Air Filter Restriction Indicator is ON and
the chime warning sounds, the primary air filter
element needs service. The indicator is turned on
by an air restriction switch. This switch is activated
at an air restriction of 6.20 kPa (25 inches) of
w a t e r. R e fe r t o A i r F i l t e r S e r v i c e fo r m o r e
information.
RH07G116
Air Filter
The Combine is equipped with a two-stage air filter
system consisting of a primary (1) (outer) filter and
a secondary (2) (inner) filter.
The primary filter is a high capacity filter designed

1
to provide optimum protection to the engine. The
p r i m a r y f i l t e r c a n b e c l e a n e d o r wa s h e d a s
required between filter changes (Refer to Air Filter
Service for more information).
The secondary (inner) filter gives extra protection

to the engine if there is damage to the primar y
filter. The secondary filter cannot be cleaned or
washed. Replace the filter if the filter has damage RD02E151
or is dirty. This filter might look clean but is in fact

very dirty. It collects very small dirt particles that
cannot be seen with the naked eye.
RD02E152
347
Inspection
To prevent the entrance of dirt into the engine, it is All gaskets must be in good condition and all clamps
absolutely essential that frequent inspection of the drawn up tight.
flexible rubber connections from air cleaner to intake
manifold be made. Hoses or flexible connections Maintenance and care of the air cleaning system
must be replaced before they deter iorate. To which includes the filter elements is the responsibility
eliminate any undue strain on the connections, make of the owner.
sure the pipes line up. See that all joints between the
air cleaner and intake manifold are tight; this includes
hose connections, manifold joints and gaskets.
Air Filter Removal and Service

1. Release the four clips on the air cleaner cover
and remove the air cleaner cover from the air
cleaner housing.
RD02E150
2. Remove the primary filter from the housing. Do

not let dirt fall on the secondary filter element.
RD02E151
348
3. Remove and discard the secondary filter

element from the air cleaner housing.
NOTE: Do not remove the secondary (inner)

element unless the secondary element is to be
replaced.
RD02E152
Cleaning Primary Air Filter
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner body.
RD02E153
5. If most of the dirt is dry, clean the element with

compressed air (Be sure to wear face
protection when using compressed air).
Keep the air nozzle about 127 mm (5 inches)
from the element and move the nozzle up and
down while turning the element.
IMPORTANT: The nozzle pressure must not exceed

241 kPa (35 PSI).
NOTE: Do not use the compressed air method of

element cleaning if the dirt has oil or soot.
RK99G165
349
Primary Air Filter Inspection
6. To check the clean element for damage or

holes, put a lamp inside the element and turn
the lamp. Visually check the rubber gasket for
damage. Check the metal cover and filter
material for damage. Replace an element that
is damaged.
RK99G164
350
Air Filter Installation
7. Do not clean the element. Install a new

secondary element if the primary element is to
be replaced.
RD02E152
8. Install the air cleaner primary filter element.
NOTE: Apply a thin coat of talcum or baby

powder to the seal area of the element, before
installing. NEVER use a petroleum based
lubricant on the seal area. Petroleum lubricant
could “glue” the cover to the element seal and
damage the element.
RD02E151
9. Install the air cleaner cover on the air cleaner

housing and secure the four retaining clips to
the housing.
RD02E150
351
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Oil Level

To check the transmission fluid level, put the
Combine on level ground. Remove the fill plug (1)
and check the fluid level. If the fluid level is low, add
the recommended type fluid through the fill hole until
the fluid level is even with the bottom of the hole.
Install the plug.
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive heating, never

overfill the transmission. Any excess oil above the
bottom of the fill plug should be drained. Caution: oil 1
may be hot.
Transmission Oil Change RD07K048
To change the transmission fluid, put the Combine on

level ground. Remove the drain plug (2) located on
the bottom of the transmission housing. For best
results, drain the fluid when the fluid is warm. Install
the drain plug. Add the recommended fluid type
through the fill hole until the fluid level is even with
the bottom edge of the hole. Wait approximately 5
minutes. Check the fluid level again and add fluid as 2
necessary. Install the fill plug.
RD07K048
352
FINAL DRIVE
Fluid Check and Change

To check the final drive fluid level, put the Combine
on level ground. Remove the fill and level plug
located on the front of each final drive housing. If
the fluid level is low, add the recommended fluid to 2
raise the fluid level to the bottom edge of the fill
hole. Install the plug.
To change the final drive fluid, put the Combine on

level ground. Remove the drain plug (1) located on
the bottom of each final drive housing and drain the
fluid. For best results, drain the fluid when the fluid is
warm. Install the drain plugs. Add the recommended 1
fluid through the fill hole (2) until the fluid level is even
with the bottom edge of the hole. Install the fill and RD97D009
level plugs.
353
HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR AND FILTERS
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir
5
1 5
2
RD05D083 RD07K049
1. BREATHER 3. HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR 5. DRAIN VALVE
2. FILLER CAP 4. SIGHT GLASS
To check the hydraulic fluid level, put the Combine

on level ground with the Header down. If the sight
gauge window shows oil, the reservoir has enough
fluid. If more fluid is needed, remove the filler cap
and add oil until the oil is visible in the sight gauge
window. To drain the reser voir open the drain
valves at the hydraulic filters.
RI00H088
WARNING: Hydraulic oil or diesel fuel leaking under pressure can penetrate the skin and cause infection
or other injury. To Prevent Personal Injury: Relieve all pressure, before disconnecting fluid lines or
performing work on the hydraulic system. Before applying pressure, make sure all connections are tight and
! components are in good condition. NEVER use your hand to check for suspected leaks under pressure.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood for this purpose. If injured by leaking fluid, see your doctor immediately.
M149C
354
Hydraulic Oil Filters

The Combine is equipped with two (2) hydraulic oil
filters. The filter located to the front of the Combine 2 2
on the left hand side is in the return side of the
auxiliary hydraulic pump circuit. The filter located
to the rear of the Combine on the left hand side is
in the suction side of the hydrostatic propulsion
system.
NOTE: Prior to doing any work, remove the key

3
from the key switch to prevent anyone from
star ting the engine. 1
1. Put the end of the drain hose in a container.

RD07K049
2. Drain the reservoir by opening the drain valves 1. AUXILIARY RETURN FILTER
located at the filter manifolds. 2. DRAIN VALVE
3. HYDROSTATIC PROPULSION
SYSTEM SUCTION FILTER
3. Use a filter wrench to loosen the two (2) filters.
Remove the filters by rotating counterclockwise.
4. Close the drain valves at the filter manifolds.
NOTE: Service filters kits will include round and

square cross section gaskets. The round cross
section gaskets are used in the Combine.
5. Lubricate the new filter gaskets with CASE IH

HY-TRAN® ULTRA fluid.
6. Install the new gasket in the top of the oil filter.

The gasket must fit tight in the mouth of the
filter. Install filter to head by turning clockwise
by hand to make firm metal to metal contact
with filter head. This will require up to three
additional turns after initial contact.
7. Add 38 Liters (10 U.S. Gallons) of CASE IH HY-

TRAN® ULTRA to the reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir. RD00H054
355
Reservoir Fluid Level

After any service that requires draining the hydraulic After servicing the hydraulic system where hydraulic
reservoir, the following procedure must be followed: components or hydraulic lines were replaced, see
Propulsion System Air Removal in this manual.
1. Put the transmission shift lever in NEUTRAL and
set the Park Brake. IMPORTANT: Operating the Combine with the
hydraulic cylinders at full stroke or in an overload
2. Start the engine and set the engine speed at condition will cause pressure relief valves to open
1800 RPM. and raise the hydraulic fluid temperature above
normal. Do not overload the hydraulic system or the
3. If propulsion system was drained, follow hydrostatic propulsion system for more than 10
propulsion system air removal procedure. seconds.
4. Cycle affected auxiliary circuits four times.
5. Stop the engine. Check the fluid level in the

hydraulic reservoir. Add fluid as required.
6. Check the hydraulic system for leaks.
Hydraulic Breather
The Combine is equipped with a breather cap and
a closed cap. Clean the breather every 100 hours
of operation.
The breather cap can be rinsed in clean mineral

spirits. Rinse from the inside through the air holes to
the outside with running fluid.
The breather cap can also be soaked and blown dry

from the inside through the air holes with low air
pressure. (Be sure to wear face protection when
using compressed air)
IMPORTANT: The breather must be DRY before RD05D083
reusing.
356
PROPULSION SYSTEM AIR REMOVAL

Any servicing of the propulsion system that has
removed or replaced hydraulic system components
or lines will require removing air from the system.
Use the following procedures for combines without 2
Power Guide wheels and combines with Power
Guide wheels.
RD97G145
1. PROPULSION CONTROL CABLE
2. HYDROSTATIC PUMP
Combines without Power Guide Wheels

Block the drive wheels and engage the Park Brake to
prevent machine movement. Keep the hydraulic
reservoir fluid at the correct level. Oil must be visible
in sight gauge window. Stop the engine when adding
hydraulic fluid.
WARNING: Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required under all
! circumstances. M142A
! WARNING: Operate controls only when seated in the operator’s seat. M137A
PROCEDURE WITHOUT POWER GUIDE WHEELS

COMBINE ENGINE TRANSMISSION PROPULSION LENGTH
SERVICE BRAKE RPM GEAR SHIFT CONTROL LEVER OF TIME
POSITION POSITION/ACTION
RELEASED 1800 NEUTRAL NEUTRAL 2
POSITION MINUTES
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL MOVE LEVER 1/2 2
INCH FORWARD MINUTES
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL MOVE LEVER 1/2 INCH 2
IN REVERSE MINUTES
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL SLOWLY MOVE REPEAT
LEVER FULL FORWARD 3 TIMES
TO FULL REVERSE
357
Combines with Power Guide Wheels

Block the drive tires to prevent machine movement. The bearings of each wheel motor are lubricated by
Raise and block the Power Guide axle so that the the hydraulic oil in the motor case so no maintenance
wheels will rotate freely. Keep the hydraulic reservoir is required for either bearing.
fluid at the correct level. Oil must be visible in sight
gauge window. Stop the engine when adding
hydraulic fluid.
PROCEDURE WITH POWER GUIDE WHEELS

COMBINE ENGINE TRANSMISSION PROPULSION POWER GUIDE LENGTH
SERVICE RPM GEAR SHIFT CONTROL LEVER WHEEL SWITCH OF TIME
BRAKE POSITION POSITION/ACTION POSITION
RELEASED 1800 NEUTRAL NEUTRAL ON 3
POSITION MINUTES
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL MOVE LEVER 1/2 OFF 2
INCH FORWARD MINUTES
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL MOVE CONTROL OFF 2
LEVER 1/2 INCH MINUTES
IN REVERSE
RELEASED 2400 NEUTRAL MOVE CONTROL ON 30*
SEE NOTES LEVER 1/2 INCH SECONDS
1 AND 2 IN REVERSE MAXIMUM
APPLIED** 1100 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 15*
SEE NOTES LEVER 1/2 INCH SECONDS
2 AND 3 IN REVERSE MAXIMUM
APPLIED** 2400 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 4
IN FORWARD
APPLIED** 2400 3RD GEAR*** MOVE CONTROL ON 4
IN REVERSE
APPLIED** 1800 3RD GEAR*** 1/4 INCH ON 15
IN FORWARD SECONDS
APPLIED** 1800 3RD GEAR*** 1/4 INCH ON 15
IN REVERSE SECONDS
* Check guide wheels for rotation and direction of rotation

** Combine will move if brakes do not hold.
*** Check guide wheels for correct direction of rotation.
Note 1 Continue if the guide wheels do not rotate or if the guide wheels rotate in the reverse direction.
Note 2 If the guide wheels rotate in the forward direction see your dealer for repair of the hydraulic system.
Note 3 If the guide wheels rotate in the reverse direction, continue the procedure. If the guide wheels rotate in the
forward direction see your dealer for repair of the hydraulic system.
358
PTO HOUSING
PTO Oil Level

To c h eck th e P TO h o us i n g o il l evel , pu t th e
Combine on level ground. Check the fluid level on
the PTO dipstick (1). If the fluid level is at or below
the ADD mark on the dipstick, add the
1
recommended fluid to the PTO to raise the fluid
level to the FULL mark. Add fluid through the fill
tube.
RD01H114
PTO Oil Drain

A drain valve (2) for the PTO oil is located on the
bottom of PTO assembly.
RD01H243
PTO Oil Change

To change the PTO fluid, put the Combine on level
ground. Place the end of the drain hose in a
container. Open the PTO fluid drain valve (2) and
drain the fluid from the PTO. For best results, drain
the fluid when the fluid is warm. 2
Close the drain valve and fill the PTO housing to the
FULL mark on the dipstick with the recommended
fluid.
RD01H243
1 3
359
FEEDER AND CLEANING FAN GEAR CASE
Check Oil Level

To check the feeder and cleaning fan gear case oil
level, the Combine must be on level ground. The A B
dipstick (A) is located in the right front service door
next to the cab. If the oil level is at or below the ADD
mark on the dipstick, add the recommended oil to
raise the level to the FULL mark.
Input Shaft Bearing Grease
Install grease in the grease fitting (B) until purging

occurs at the vent cap on the gearcase input
housing.
RD00E001
Oil Change
To change the oil, put the Combine on level ground.
Remove right hand separator side panel (1). Use a
suitable container to catch drain oil. Remove drain
plug (2) from canister bolt (3). For best results drain
the oil when the oil is warm. Install the drain plug (2)
into the canister bolt (3) and fill the gear case through
the dipstick tube.
A24379
3
2
RD00H009
360
UPPER UNLOADER GEAR CASE

The unloader tube gear case oil should be checked
every 600 operating hours and before every harvest
season.
1
Gear case never needs oil changed.
To check the upper unloader gear case oil level, the

Combine must be on level ground. Check oil by doing
the following:
1. Place the unloader tube in the transport position.
2. Loosen the two nuts to remove the cover (1).

56063419
3. Remove the filler plug (2) of the gearbox. If the

fluid level is low, add the recommended fluid (see
Combine Service Specifications) to raise the fluid
level to the bottom edge of the level plug hole. 2
ZDA3083A
361
LOWER UNLOADER GEAR CASE
Check Oil Level

To check the lower unloader gear case oil level, the
Combine must be on level ground. The plug is
located on the rear of the gear case. Remove the
level plug (1) from the rear of the gear case.
If the fluid level is low, add the recommended fluid

1
(see Combine Ser vice Specifications in this
chapter) to raise the fluid level to the bottom edge of
the level plug hole.
ZDA7874A
Oil Change
To change the oil, make sure Combine is on level
ground.
3
1. Use a suitable container to catch drain oil.
Remove the drain plug (2). For best results
drain the oil when the oil is warm. Install the
drain plug.
2
2. Clean the area round the filler plug (3) and level
plug (1). Remove both the filler and level plugs.
3. Fill the gear case with new oil through the filler
plug hole (3) until fluid level is at the bottom
edge of the level plug hole (1). ZDA7870A
See Combine Service Specifications in this chapter

for recommended fluid type and capacity.
362
INCLINED AUGER GEAR CASE
Check Oil Level

Check the lower inclined auger gear case oil level
every 300 hours. The Combine must be on level
ground. The filler plug (1) is located through the
access hole (2) in the side plate. Remove the filler
plug (1) from the gear case. If the fluid level is low,
add the recommended fluid (see Combine Servcie
Specifications in this chapter) to raise the fluid level
to the bottom edge of the plug hole.
Oil Change
Change the oil every 600 hours.
1. Use a suitable container to catch drain oil.

Remove the drain plug (3). For best results
2 1
drain the oil when the oil is warm. Install the
drain plug.
2. Clean the area round the filler plug (1). Remove

the filler plug.
3. Fill the gear case with new oil through the filler
3
plug hole (1) until fluid level is at the bottom
edge of the plug hole.
RH08F025
4. Install and tighten the plug.
363
ROTOR GEAR CASE
1 2
RD05F091
1. FLUID LEVEL CHECK, DRAIN 2. VENT PLUG 3. BREATHER ADAPTER FITTING
Fluid Level
To check the fluid level put the Combine on level
ground. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (1). If the
fluid level is at or below the ADD mark on the
dipstick, add the recommended fluid (see Combine
Service Specifications in this chapter) to the gear
case to raise the fluid level to the FULL mark. Install
the fluid through the fill passage by removing the
breather adapter fitting (3). Loosen vent plug (2) to
bleed air from the system.
Fluid Change
To change the fluid, put the Combine on level ground.
Remove the screws that hold the dipstick tube in
place. Loosen the dipstick tube and drain the gear
case fluid. Install the dipstick tube in its proper
location. Fill the gear case to the FULL mark on the
dipstick with the recommended fluid. (See Combine
Service Specifications in this chapter).
364
Gear Case Fluid Level

To check the chopper gear case oil level, put the
Combine on level ground. Remove the level plug (1)
from the side of the gear case. If the fluid level is
low, remove fill plug (2) and add the recommended
fluid type (see Combine Service Specifications in 2
this chapter) to raise the fluid level to the bottom
edge of the level plug. 1
Gear Case Fluid Change

To change the fluid, put the Combine on level RD05F097
ground. Use a suitable container to catch the oil.
Remove the drain plug (3) on the lower pulley side
of the gear case. Install the drain plug (3). Add the
recommended fluid type (see Combine Service 3
Specifications in this chapter) through the fill plug
(2) on the top of the gear case to bring the fluid level
up to the bottom of the level plug (1) hole.
RD02E198
1. LEVEL PLUG
2. FILL PLUG
3. GEAR CASE DRAIN
365
TWO SPEED FEEDER GEAR CASE (If Equipped)
Gear Case Fluid Level

To check the two speed feeder gear case oil level,
put the Combine on level ground. Fully RAISE the 2
feeder housing. Engage the cylinder lock. Check
the sight glass (1) and be sure that the hydraulic
fluid is visible in the glass. To add fluid, remove the
fill plug (2) and add fluid as required until oil is
visible in the sight glass (1).
1
Gear Case Fluid Change

To change the fluid, put the Combine on level RH08A043
ground. Fully RAISE the feeder housing and
engage the cylinder lock. Use a suitable container
to catch the oil. Remove the gear case drain plug
(3) and let the oil drain. Install the drain plug.
Add the recommended fluid type (see Combine

Service Specifications in this chapter) through the
fill plug (2) on the top of the gear case to bring the
fluid level up to cover the sight glass (1).
3
RH08A044
366
OPERATOR’S CAB
Recirculation Air Filter

The cab recirculation air filter is located behind the
operator’s seat.
Clean the filter as required by operating conditions or

once every year. Use mild soap and water. Rinse
with clear water and squeeze out the excess.
Reinstall the filter.
NOTE: Make sure the area behind the seat is not

used for storage. If the filter is blocked it will degrade
the A/C performance.
A24302
Outside Air Filter

The outside air filter must be cleaned as required
by operating conditions to assure a full flow of
fresh air.
Conditions of high humidity and extreme dust require

a more frequent cleaning of the filter. Clean the filter
every 200 hours.
The filter is located behind the right hand service

door to the right of the operator’s cab.
To service the cab air filter, do the following: 1 2 3

1. Pull the yellow slider (1) down and out.
2. Remove the cover (2) by turning to the left and RH07G096
pulling down.
3. Remove the filter element. Clean with 4. Install the filter element into the housing.
compressed air blown from the inside towards
5. Install the cover. (When closed, the dust outlet
the outside, that is a maximum of 241 kPa (35
(3) should be toward the cab).
PSI). When using compressed air, always use
face protection. 6. Turn the cover (2) to the right until it locks.
NOTE: It is advised to replace the filter element 7. Install the yellow lock slider (1).
every year.
WARNING: Cab air filters remove dust in the air, but are not capable of removing chemicals used in
spraying crops or in weed control. Many chemicals used for these purposes are toxic when improperly used,
! and can be hazardous to operators and others in the area. Follow the instructions of manufacturers of both
the equipment and the chemicals regarding prohibitions against inhalation of dust or spray, personal
hygiene practices, and other precautions noted by the manufacturers. M108A
367
368
9 - MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS
FIRE PREVENTION - ENGINE AREA

Check the engine compartment every 10 hours for Due to the flammable nature of the crop materials
fire hazard crop materials. encountered by Combines, fire risks are high. This
r isk can be minimized by frequent removal of
Keep the engine, exhaust manifold and turbocharger accumulated crop material from the machine. If oil
a r e a s c l e a n . R e m ove a l l t r a s h , o i l a n d d u s t leaks appear, retorque bolt or replace gaskets if
accumulation from inside the engine compartment. necessary.
Fire Prevention - All Areas

Clean all areas of debris accumulation daily. This Debris accumulation remains the Number One cause
includes but is not limited to: for Combine fires. Daily cleaning will reduce the risk
of fires.
● Transmission and Cleaning Fan
● Straw Spreader Drive Gears When harvesting crops with extremely flammable
dust such as sunflowers, safflower, canola, etc., it
● Feeder Reverser Drive and Motor
may be necessary to clean more often than once
● Rotor Drive and PTO Drive daily. When extremely dry conditions exist, it may be
necessary to clean every time you unload.
● Battery Tray
● Feeder Drives Be sure to clean off the machine at the end of the
harvest day to make sure debris or dust piles are
removed. This will prevent ignition because of debris
laying against hot engine or other surfaces.
369
ENGINE FAN, ALTERNATOR AND COMPRESSOR BELT
Belt Removal and Installation

1. Loosen the air conditioner compressor and
remove the belt from the pulley.
RD05D070
2. Use a 1/2 inch square drive ratchet wrench to lift

the belt tensioner pulley and remove the fan belt.
RH99K057
3. Remove the fan belt by working the belt between

the fan blades. If difficulty is encountered, the fan
can be removed by removing the four retaining
bolts.
4. Loosely install new fan belt and reinstall fan if it

was removed. Use a 1/2 inch square drive
ratchet wrench to lift the belt tensioner pulley
and install the fan belt.
Service Tip: If difficulty is experienced installing

the fan belt (the belt seems too short), position the
belt over the grooved pulleys first then while
holding the tensioner up, slide the belt over the RD02F020
water pump pulley.
Install the air conditioning compressor belt and adjust

the tension.
370
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT
Belt Removal, Installation and Adjustment

1. Loosen the adjusting strap bolt on the right front
of the compressor (not shown). Loosen the pivot
bolts (1). Push the compressor down to loosen
the belt and remove the belt from the compressor
pulley.
1
RD05D070
2. Remove the four fan retaining bolts (2) and

remove the fan. Remove the old compressor
drive belt.
3. Install a new compressor drive belt. Install the

fan and four retaining bolts. Tighten the bolts.
4. Use a pry bar to push on the compressor ears

(Do Not push on the body) to tighten the drive
belt. Tighten the adjustment strap bolt and pivot
bolts.
2
5. Use a belt tension gauge and set the belt tension
to 423 to 512 N (95 to 115 pounds) on the new RD02F020
belt. Run the engine for ten minutes. Adjust the

tension on the belt from 400 to 529 N (90 to 119
pounds).
371
FUEL INJECTORS
Replacement or Refurbishing Interval .............................................................. Every 2000 Hours (or Every 2 Years)
Contact your dealer for service.
ROCKER ARM TO VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

Service Interval............................................................................................................................... Every 1000 Hours
Contact your dealer for service.
372
ROTOR DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
1. Start the engine. Move the separator drive
switch (1) to ON. Push the rotor switch (2) to
the high speed position. This will move the belt
(3) to the outer edge of the drive pulley and
force the driven pulley apart.
1
2. Stop the engine. Remove the key from the key
switch.
RD07G031
RD05D069
3. Shift the gear case speed control (4) to the

neutral position.
RH08A035
373
4. Remove the separator drive belt (5) guards

and shields (6). Refer to separator drive belt in
this section.
WARNING: DO NOT disassemble the torque

6
sensing unit. Special tools are required to
! prevent the torque sensing unit from coming
apart under tension and causing personal
5
injury. See your dealer. M190A
RD05D076
5. Use the tools supplied with your machine and
assemble the compressor plate to the torque
sensing unit with undercut on plate against end
of cam. Tighten the compressor plate nuts 7
evenly to remove all slack. This will hold the
driven pulley half (7) open. Turn the key to the
ON position but DO NOT star t the engine.
Push the rotor switch to the low speed position.
This will move the drive pulley apart. Remove
the key from the key switch.
RD02F022
374
6. Loosen the five retaining bolts (8) from the

three speed gearbox.
8 8
RD05D069
8 8
8 8
87301398
7. Loosen the gearbox adjusting nuts. Move the
gearbox all the way to the right.
RD05D068
375
8. Remove the variable stop stud.
T89910
9. Loosen the adjusting bolts and slide the
mounting bracket down. Remove the rotor
speed adjustment chain (9) from the sprockets.
9
T89912
10. Disconnect the wire harness (10). Remove the
four universal joint retaining bolts and separate
the universal joint from the drive coupling.
Move the drive shaft to the right in the slot (11). 11
10
T89919
11. Turn the rotor drive pulley by hand. At the
same time roll the belt over and off the front
half of the drive pulley. Roll the belt over and
off the rear of the driven pulley. Move the belt
around the torque sensing unit. Move the gear
box to the left and move the belt between the
pulleys.
RD05F093
376
12. Remove the rotor drive belt through the opening

between the dr ive coupling and the motor
mounting bracket.
Belt Installation
RD05F094
13. Check the torque sensing unit for foreign

material between the pulley halves and clean if
necessar y. Foreign material will retard the
adjustable pulley half, resulting in rotor belt
slippage.
870L92
TORQUE SENSING UNIT
14. Install a new belt following the above

procedure in the reverse order. Close the rear
driven pulley half by loosening the compressor
plate nuts. Make sure the bolts do not loosen.
Rem ove the c om pr es so r pl ate an d b ol ts.
Rotate the pulleys by hand to permit the belt to
take a set in the pulley groove. Install the
separator drive belt.
RD05F095
377
Belt Adjustment
15. Check the position of the variable drive pulley.
The drive pulley must be in the open position
(14). Start the engine and move the separator
drive switch to ON. Use the rotor speed control 14
switch to adjust the rotor to the slowest speed.
Move the separator drive switch to OFF and
stop the engine. Remove the key from the key
switch.
T93313.75
16. Measure the distance (A) across the outside of
the driven pulleys. The correct distance is:
60/7088 - 98.6 mm (3.88 inch)
5088 - 80.6 mm (3.17 inch)
To change the distance, shift the rotor gear case to
neutral (Step 3).
NOTE: As the belt stretches and wears,

readjustment is necessary when the distance
measures: 60/7088 - 93 mm (3.66 inch), 5088 - 72
mm (2.83 inch) or less.
RD05F096
398L92
17. Move the gear case to the left using the
drawbolt. At the same time rotate the pulleys
by hand until the distance across the outside of
the driven pulleys is:
60/7088 - 98.6 mm (3.88 inch)
5088 - 80.6 mm (3.17 inch)
Tighten the gear case retaining bolts. The M20
bolts should be torqued from the head side of the
bolts to 525 Nm (387 lb. ft.). Tighten the inner nut
on the draw bolt. Shift the rotor gear case to the
correct gear range.
Check the jackshaft limit switch positions. Adjust as
needed. Refer to Jackshaft Limit Switch Adjustment.
RD05D068
Check the jackshaft limit switch positions. Adjust
a s n e e d e d . R e fe r t o Ja ck s h a f t L i m i t S w i t c h
Adjustment.
378
SEPARATOR DRIVE BELT
5
1
6
4
RH01J029
1. DRIVE PULLEY SHIELD 3. DRIVEN PULLEY SHIELD 5. DRIVEN BELT GUIDE
2. TOP BELT SUPPORT 4. IDLER BELT GUIDE 6. BELT SUPPORT ROD
Belt Removal
1. Remove the driven pulley shield (1) and the top
belt support (2).
1
2
RD05D076
379
2. Remove the drive pulley shield.
RD01H116
3. Remove the idler belt guide rod.
RD01H124
4. Remove the cotter and retaining pin from the
cylinder extension tube.
RD01H116
5. Remove the belt starting with the driven pulley
first.
6. To install the belt, do Steps 1 through 5 in

reverse.
RD01H125
380
1
5
B
4
3
A
215L7/RI08F134
1. DRIVE PULLEY SHIELD 3. SEPARATOR BELT SUPPORT ROD 5. DRIVEN PULLEY SHIELD
2. SEPARATOR DRIVE PULLEY 4. DRIVEN BELT GUIDE 6. DRIVEN PULLEY
7. Set the drive pulley shield (1), so that a clearance (A) of 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch) is between the shield and
the drive pulley (2).
8. Set the driven pulley shield (5) so that a clearance (C) of 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch) is between the shield and
the driven pulley (6).
9. Set separator belt support rod (3) so that belt is supported and lifted 2 to 4 mm (1/16 to 1/8 inch) off the driven
pulley trap entrance (B) in the disengaged belt position.
10. Set separator belt guide rod (4) so that the clearance is 4 to 6 mm (3/16 to 1/4 inch) between the rod and the
rear side of the belt.
381
Belt Adjustment
11. The initial setting of the drive belt adjusting rod
mu s t b e 6 5 t o 7 0 m m ( 1 ) f r o m t h e l owe r
cylinder anchor (2) to the gauge window angle 1
(3). 3
218L7
12. Start the engine and move the separator
switch (4) to ON.
RD07G032
13. Look through the window gauge (5) to see the 1 3

position of the block (6).
IMPORTANT: New belts should be adjusted as

shown in Diagram A. If necessary, adjust until the 5
lower edge of the pivot block (6) is within the small
window (7). See adjustment instructions. New belts
should be checked after the first 10 hours of
operation. After initial run-in, if the edge of the pivot
block is still above the large window or within the
upper por tion of the large window, no fur ther
adjustment is required at this time. If desired, the 6
edge of the block can be readjusted as shown in
Diagram B. Check the belt adjustment every 100 RH08E040
hours of operation. The belt must be readjusted

when the edge of the pivot block (6) reaches the
lower edge of the large window (5). See Diagram C.
Adjust until the edge of the pivot block (6) is up to the
top edge of the large window (5) as shown in
Diagram B. As long as the lower edge of the block is
within the large window, the belt has proper tension
required to drive the separator components.
NOTE: The small window is used for new belt

installation only and adds additional tension in the
belt to compensate for belt seating and stretch during
initial run-in.
382
Diagram A - New Belt Adjustment
9 7 8 10
6
RH08E039
● Edge of block (6) within small window (7). Spacer (8) should rotate freely after the initial setting.
Diagram B - Readjusted Position
9 5 8 10
6
RH08E040
● Edge of block (6) at top edge of large window (5).
Diagram C - Readjust Belt
9 8 10
5
6
RH08E041
● Edge of block (6) is at the bottom edge of large window (5).

Adjustment Instructions
1. Move the separator switch to OFF.
2. Stop the engine and remove the key.
3. Loosen the lower nut (9) approximately the distance the edge of the pivot block should move to be at the
correct window position. (Diagram A or B)
4. Tighten the upper nut (10) until the internal spring spacer is tight against the leg of the window gage and lower
nut.
5. Repeat Step 12 and 13 on previous page to check that the adjustment is correct.
6. When engaged, the outer spring spacer (8) should be free to rotate.
7. Readjust the belt guides in Step 7 if necessary.
383
AUXILIARY PUMP DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
1. Remove the grain tank unloader drive belt from
the unloader drive pulley on the auxiliary pump
shaft.
2. Loosen the nuts (1) on the tension adjuster for

the drive belt on the auxiliary hydraulic pump
jackshaft.
1
RH07G086
3. Remove the auxiliary hydraulic pump jackshaft
drive belt (2) from the auxiliary pump driven
pulley. 2
RH07G086
4. Remove the three mounting bolts (3) holding
the pump drive pulley (4) to the PTO shaft.
3
RI07M002
384
5. Move the pump drive pulley and hub (5) outward

on the hydrostatic pump drive shaft (6). 7 8
Remove the belt (7) between the pump drive pulley
hub (5) and the PTO shaft (8).
6
5
RI07M004
Belt Installation and Adjustment

6. Install the belt (1) between the pump drive pulley 92
and the PTO shaft.

1
Move the pump drive pulley inward on the hydrostatic
pump drive shaft.
RI07M004
7. Install and tighten the three mounting bolts (2)

holding the pump drive pulley to the PTO shaft.
2
RI07M002
385
8. Install the auxiliary pump jackshaft drive belt

(3) on the driven pulley on the pump.
A24479
9. While holding the outer spring sleeve (6) up
against the pivot block, tighten the adjusting
nut (4) on the auxiliary pump drive idler tension
rod until the washer (5) contacts the outer
spring sleeve (6). Back the nut off slightly until 6
the spacer is loose and then tighten the lock
nut (7) to a torque of 98 to 133 Nm (73 to 98 lb
ft). The spacer must be loose after adjustment 5
is complete.
4
Re-adjust the spring tension when the gap
between the outer spring sleeve (6) and the
washer face (5) is 5 to 6 mm (3/16 to 1/4 inch). 7
566L93
10. Install the grain tank unloader belt on the

unloader drive pulley.
5
4
6
7
565L92
386
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
NOTE: Remove Auxiliary Pump drive belt from pulley first. See previous section.
1. Remove shield.
A24472
2. Remove the front belt guide from the combine
by removing the upper and lower mounting
bolts and separating it from the lower belt
guide.
RH07G054
3. Remove the unloader belt trap support from
the hydraulic pump mounting bracket.
A24477
387
4. Remove the remaining lower unloader belt

guide from the Combine.
RH07G020
5. Loosen the chain tension sprocket for the
unloader drive chain.
RH07G020
6. Loosen the set screws on the unloader drive
p u l l e y. M o v e t h e p u l l e y a w a y f r o m t h e
Combine.
RH07G020
7. Remove the mounting bolts for the unloader
jackshaft bearing flanges behind the unloader
drive pulley.
A2440.45
388
8. Remove the bearing flange bolts for the

unloader jackshaft at the sprocket.
RH07G020
9. Move the jackshaft assembly away from the
Combine.
RH07G020
10. Remove one end of the unloader drive belt
between the jackshaft and the Combine frame.
Remove the other end of the belt from the pulley
on the hydraulic pump.
A2437.45
389

11. Install one end of the unloader drive belt
between the Combine frame and the jackshaft.
Install the other end of the belt over the pulley
on the pump.
A2437.45
12. Move the unloader jackshaft assembly into
place at the support and Combine frame.
RH07G020
390
13. Install the bearing flanges on the support and

Combine frame.
RH07G020
A2440.45
14. Move the unloader drive pulley toward the
Combine. Position the inner surface of the
pulley 92 mm (3.62 inches) from the grain
support panel and tighten set screws
A2440.45
15. Move the tension adjusting sprocket against
the chain.
RH07G020
391
16. Adjust the spring length to match gage length.
RH07G012
17. Install the unloader belt guide into position
around the unloader drive belt.
RH07G020
18. Measure the gap between the unloader belt
guide and the unloader jackshaft driven pulley.
T92032.45
19. Adjust the unloader belt guide so that the gap

measures 2.3 to 5.3 mm (3/32 to 7/32 inch)
between the arrows. Snug the unloader belt
guide hardware in set area to hold adjustment
231L8
392

guide and the unloader jackshaft driven pulley
area. Adjust the belt guide so that the gap
measures 3.0 to 6.8 mm (1/8 to 17/64 inch) in
the area between the arrows. Snug the
unloader belt guide retaining hardware in set
area to hold adjustment.
T92033.45
231L8

guide and the unloader jackshaft drive pulley.
Adjust the belt guide so that the gap measures
2.2 to 3.8 mm (3/32 to 5/32 inch). After the gap
has been correctly adjusted at all points along
the unloader belt guide, tighten all of the bolts
that hold the unloader belt guide.
RD05D067
22. Install the upper belt guide on the support rod.
T92003
393
23. Adjust the unloader belt upper rod so that it

just touches the inside of the unloader drive
belt.
T92027
24. Install the unloader belt trap support on the
hydraulic pump mounting bracket.
A24477
25. Install shield.
A24472
394
FEEDER JACKSHAFT DRIVE BELT

Belt Removal
1. Start the engine. Disengage the separator and
feeder drive. Turn the engine OFF and remove
the key. Remove the three shields.
RD07K050
2. Remove the shield. 1 3
RD07K051
3. Remove the feeder drive belt. See Feeder Drive
Belt in this manual.
RD07K052
4. Remove the lock nut (3) and loosen the belt
tension spring assembly nut (4) to remove
tension on the feeder jackshaft drive belt.
Remove the feeder jackshaft drive belt. 3
RD07K053
395

1. Install the feeder jackshaft drive belt.
2. Adjust the belt tension. Tighten the belt tension

spring assembly nut to adjust the spring length.
3. Compress the spring to the length of the spacer 1 2

(2) on the outside of the spring. The spacer must
be free to turn after adjustment. Then install and
tighten the lock nut.
4. Keep the spring length adjusted to the length of

the spacer at all times.
5. Adjust the feeder drive belt idler mount only if RD07K053
required as shown in Feeder Drive Belt Idler

Adjustment.
Feeder Drive Belt Idler Adjustment

To adjust the forward path alignment of the idler arm
do the following:
1. Slide the vertical (3) inside mount up until the

slant of the pulley is correct with the belt.
3 4
2. Slide the horizontal (4) outside mount to position
the pulley until it is centered on the belt in
forward operation.
RD07K054
396
Reverse Path Alignment - Fine Tune

The feeder jackshaft drive belt path can also be
adjusted in or out. The idler arm assembly will come
assembled from the factory with the 10.9 on the bolt
head indexed to the six o’clock position.
Adjust the position of the bolt head on the idler pulley 5

to change the feeder jackshaft drive belt path.
A B C
RI08E260
5. BOLT HEAD B. MIDDLE
A. OUT C. IN
To adjust the belt path outward from the feeder,

turn the bolt so that the 10.9 on the bolt is in the 9
o’clock position. Adjust only as far as needed to
track the belt properly.
RD00H007
To adjust the belt path in toward the feeder, turn 1 3

the bolt so that the 10.9 on the bolt is in the 3
o’clock position. Adjust only as far as needed to
track the belt properly.
RD00H008
1 3
397
FEEDER DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
1. Start the engine. Disengage the separator and
feeder drive. Turn the engine OFF and remove
the key. Remove the three shields.
RD07K050
2. Remove the cleaning fan jackshaft drive belt.
Refer to Cleaning Fan Jackshaft Belt in this
manual.
RD00H015
3. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper (1)
and lower (2) guides. Move the guides away
from the drive pulley.
RD00H011
398
4. Remove the belt trap (3). Loosen the tension rod

(4) and remove the belt.
RD01H215
399
1 3
B
B
RI08E312
1. Install the drive belt.
2. Adjust the belt tension rod (1) to 85 mm (3-3/8 inches) above the top nut (2).
3. Adjust the lower nut (3) upward until the inner spacer is tight against the window gauge and upper nut (2).
4. Adjust the upper and lower guides to give a clearance (A and B) of 4 mm (5/32 inch) between the belt and the
guides.
5. Adjust the belt trap to give a clearance (C) of 4 mm (5/32 inch) between the belt and the belt trap.
6. Install the cleaning fan jackshaft belt. See cleaning fan jackshaft belt installation in this section.
7. Install all feeder drive shields except the small front shield
400
8. The feeder clutch will not engage without the

separator engaged. For this reason the coil
(3) on the separator valve must be removed
from the valve. This allows the machines
electronics to think the separator is running
even though it is not. Set the Auto Feeder
Cutoff to the OFF position, so that the feeder
clutch will engage and stay engaged, even
though the feeder will not be operating.
3
NOTE: This procedure requires that an operator
remains in the operator’s seat, or the feeder will
automatically shut off.
RD01H213
9. Start the engine. Engage both the separator

and feeder. Neither will turn, but the feeder
clutch will engage.
10. The second person should look through the

front shield opening and visually check the
position of the gauge block in relation to the
gauge window (4). The gauge block position
must be between the range shown in diagrams
A and B.
4
T85901
401
6
5
Diagram A Diagram B
RH02F002
5. TOP OF BLOCK AT BOTTOM OF GAUGE WINDOW
6. TOP OF BLOCK AT CENTER OF GAUGE WINDOW
7. TOP EDGE OF GAUGE WINDOW
11. If necessary, adjust the belt tension as follows:
A. Stop the engine and remove the key.
B. Adjust the upper and lower nuts as required

to get the top edge of the pivot block (5)
(Diagram A) in the correct window position.
C. Make sure the nuts are tight, then install the

front shield. 3
12. Install the separator valve coil (3) back on the

v a l v e a n d t i g h t e n f i n g e r t i g h t . D O N OT
overtighten, this may cause the valve to not RD01H213
function properly.
13. Turn Auto Feeder Cutoff back on.
14. Test the operation of the separator drive and

feeder drive. If necessary repeat Steps 8 through
13.
15. The belt must be readjusted back to the position

shown in Diagram A when belt stretch allows the
top edge of the pivot block (6) to be at the top
edge of the window (7) as shown in Diagram B.
402
CLEANING FAN DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
1. Start the Combine engine and place the
separator switch in the ON position. Adjust the
fan speed to the slowest speed. Disengage the 1
separator drive and turn the Combine engine
OFF and remove key. Remove all shields for
the fan drive belt (1).
A24340
2. Remove the cotter pin, washer and pin from
the control arm.
3. Swing the control arm away from the pulley.

Remove the stop bolt and washer from the end
of the shaft.
RH08E042
4. Remove the outer pulley half, then the drive
belt
RH08E044
403
Belt Installation
5. Install the drive belt in the reverse order of
Steps 1 through 4.
A243404
404
Belt Adjustments
6. Belt tension is applied by springs on the driven
pulley. Tighten the spring mounting bolts to
compress the spring until the spacer inside the
spring is tight.
T87483
383L8
4. FAN DRIVE SHAFT
5. FAN DRIVE PULLEY
7. Adjust the inner nuts on the control block rod for
fan speed so that the belt never runs above the
outside diameter of either pulley.
RH07G055
405
CLEANING FAN JACKSHAFT BELT
RD01H227
Belt Removal
1. Open the right front panel and remove the
rear shield (1), the middle shield (2), and the
front shield (3).
3
RH08A028
2. Remove the cleaning fan drive belt.
A17287
406
3. Remove the screw, nut and cotter pin and

remove the feeder jackshaft shield bracket.
RD00H011
4. Loosen the lock nuts on the fan jackshaft drive
belt tension spring rod.
RD00H012
5. Remove the belt tension spring rod cotter pin
and washer.
RD00H013
6. Remove the belt tension spring rod from the

belt tension idler arm.
RD00H014
407
7. Remove the cleaning fan jackshaft drive belt

from the feeder jackshaft pulley and the fan
jackshaft pulley.
RD00H015

8. Install a new cleaning fan jackshaft drive belt
on the fan jackshaft pulley and the feeder
jackshaft.
RD00H015
9. Install the belt tension spring rod in the idler
arm.
RD00H014
408
10. Install the cotter pin and washer on the belt

tension spring rod.
RD00H013
11. Tighten the fan jackshaft belt tension idler
adjusting nuts until there is contact with the
spring spacer outside the spring. Lock the
adjusting nuts in place so the spacer can still
turn.
RD00H012
12. Install the feeder jackshaft shield mounting
bracket and install the bolt, nut and cotter pin
for the bracket.
RD00H011
13. Install the cleaning fan drive belt.
A17287
409
14. Install the feeder drive shield.
A24491
15. Install the right front shield (3) the right middle
shield (2) and rear shield (1). Close the front
side panel. 3
RH08A028
410
ELEVATOR DRIVE BELT
RP95G095
1. ELEVATOR DRIVE BELT 2. FAN DRIVE BELT 3. FAN JACKSHAFT DRIVE BELT
Belt Removal
1. Remove the screen covering the belt and
pulleys.
2. Remove the cleaning fan drive belt.
3. Remove the cleaning fan jackshaft drive belt.
RD00H015
4. Remove the grain and tailings elevator drive
chains.
RP95K009
411
5. Loosen the tension on the pulley tension rod.
RP95K009
6. Rotate the elevator support bracket (1) from
the outer end of the elevator drive jackshaft
(2).
RP95K112
7. Loosen but do not remove the three nuts (3)
that hold the bearing on the inner end of the
jackshaft.
8. Remove the belt over the end of the jackshaft.

Remove the belt from the other pulleys.
9. Install a new drive belt in the reverse order,

Steps 1 through 8.
3
10. Tighten the tension rod until there is contact
with the spring spacer outside the spring. Lock
the adjusting nuts in place so the spacer can
still turn. RP95K009
412
STRAW SPREADER DRIVE BELT
2
1
RH07G114
1. STRAW SPREADER BELT 2. HANDLE
Belt Removal
1. Remove the shields that cover the belt and
pulleys.
NOTE: If the Combine is equipped with a beater

and/or straw chopper, remove the elevator
jackshaft and/or straw chopper belts.
Continued on Next Page
RD00E030
413
2. Pull handle UP on spring loaded pin to relieve

belt tension.
RH07G047
RH07G049
3. Remove the auger drive pulley.
T92628
414
4. Remove the spreader drive belt from the drive

pulley.
A29262
Two Speed Drive Pulley

To switch from fast speed to slow speed do the
following:
1. Repeat Step 1 and 2.
2. Switch belt positions on pulleys.
3. Using handle push down to put tension on belt.

Allow tension spring to lock in place.
4. Install shield.
RH07G050
415
Belt Installation
5. Install the spreader drive belt in the reverse
order, Steps 1 through 4.
RH07G048
Belt Adjustment
6. Tighten the adjusting nuts on the tension rod
until the nuts are tight against the tube spacer.
Loosen the nuts just enough to per mit the
spacer to turn. Lock the nuts together.
7. Adjust the auger drive slip clutch spring to a

length of 89 mm.
8. Install the belt drive shield.
NOTE: Pry bar may be needed for idler arm.
NOTE: Pry bar is stored at the Left rear, above the

fire extinguisher. RD01H138
NOTE: It is not necessary to loosen spring tension

adjustment setting to change spreader belt speed or
replacing the belt.
RH07G058
416
STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE BELT
Removal and Installation

1. Remove the belt shield. Lift the channel lock
(1) off the spring.
RD01H132
2. Move the idler pulley handle (2) down to
release the idler pulley. Remove the belt from
the pulleys.
2
RD02E199
3. Install the belt in the set of pulleys for the
desired speed (Refer to the decal on the drive
belt shield for instructions). Engage the idler
pulley (3) by moving the idler pulley lever up
until the channel drops into place over the
spring.
RD02E198
417
Adjustment
4. The idler pulley must be engaged to adjust the
tension on the belt.
4
With the channel lock (1) down over the spring
1
(2), turn the adjusting nut (3) on the spring
tension assembly until the nut contacts the
channel lock. Slightly back off the nut until the
channel lock is free. Hold the adjusting nut and
tighten the lock nut (4) against the adjusting nut.
Be sure the channel lock is free after the
adjustment is complete. 3
NOTE: Readjust the spring tension when the gap

2
between the channel lock and the adjusting nut is A2474
approximately 6 to 8 mm (1/4 to 5/16 inch).. 1. CHANNEL LOCK 3. ADJUSTING NUT

2. TENSION SPRING 4. LOCK NUT
418
GRAIN TANK UNLOADER CHAIN
Removal
1. Loosen the chain tension idler. Loosen nut and
remove idler sprocket from the bracket.
10034706
2. Remove the grain tank unloader drive chain
from the sprockets.
10034706
419
Installation and Adjustment

3. Install the unloader drive chain on the
sprocket, and reassemble the idler sprocket to
the bracket.
10034706
4. The maximum chain deflection between the
two sprockets is 25.4 mm (1 inch). Tighten the
spring tension idler maintaining the maximum
chain deflection between the sprockets.
5. Tighten idler sprocket to bracket.
10034706
420
ELEVATOR DRIVE SLIP CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT

The clutch is located on the drive for grain and
taili ngs elevato rs. To preve nt damag e to th e
Combine, the clutch will slip if any unusual strain is 1
put on the drive. Stop the Combine immediately and 3
remove the obstruction if the clutch is slipping.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT add washers to the elevator

drive slip clutch. The clutch has been designed for
higher torque capacity. Adding washers to further
compress the springs will cause the spr ing to
become solid and the clutch will therefore not slip. 2
This could cause the elevator drive system to fail.
RP95K009
1. TAILINGS ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN
2. ELEVATOR DRIVE SLIP CLUTCH
3. CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN
MOISTURE SENSOR CLEANING (if equipped)

The moisture sensor measures grain falling out of the
clean grain elevator into a small bin of the bypass
unit. The moisture content of the grain in this bin is
sensed by the moisture sensor at the back of the
bypass unit. The level of grain in the bin is controlled 1
by a proximity switch, which is located at the top of
the bin and an auger at the bottom of the bin. In order
to have a good moisture reading the moisture 2
sensor fin must always be clean and covered
totally by grain. The bin always has to contain a
minimum amount of grain.
A sensor fin covered with dirt and crop residue will

result in wrong moisture readings. Therefore it is RD07K067
advised to clean the sensor fin when necessary. The

frequency of the cleaning is dependent on the
harvest conditions. Certainly in the case of dirty, and
conditions where other parts of the Combine tend to
build up dirt (grain pan, sieves, auger) it is advised to
check the sensor fin daily and clean as necessary.
Clean the sensor fin as follows:

1. Loosen the two wing nuts (1) and remove the 3
moisture sensor (2).
2. Clean the fin (3) using a soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a screwdriver or any other

RD07K068
sharp device to avoid scratching the sensor fin.
3. Install the sensor in reverse order of
disassembly.
421
TAILINGS ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN
Removal, Installation and Adjustment

1. Remove the tailings elevator drive chain by
loosening the idler sprocket nut. Disconnect
the master connecting link and remove the
chain.
2. Install and adjust the chain to have 25.4 mm (1

1
inch) total free movement. Move the idler
sprocket up or down to adjust the chain free
movement. Tighten the idler sprocket nut (1).
NOTE: The tailings elevator drive chain must be

adjusted for free movement whenever the
tailings elevator conveyor chain is adjusted.
A24428
422
TAILINGS ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN

1. To remove the tailings elevator conveyor chain
(1), turn the chain until the master connecting
link is in a position at the lower door (2).
Disconnect the chain. Attach a new conveyor
chain to the old chain.
1
2. Pull the old chain out and the new chain in until
the connector is at the bottom of the elevator.
Connect the ends of the new chain together.
RD97G153
Adjustment
6
1. Loosen the tailings elevator drive chain (3) before
adjusting the elevator conveyor chain to avoid
overtightening the drive chain.
5
2. Loosen the nut on the idler sprocket and move 4
the idler sprocket up to loosen the tailings
elevator drive chin. Loosen the nut (4) on the
conveyor bracket. Loosen the bolt lock strap (5)
over the two adjusting bolts (6) at the top of the 3
elevator head.
A4489
3. Adjust the tailings elevator drive chain.
4. Adjust the two bolts evenly until there is a

clearance (A) of 0.8 mm (1/32 inch) between the
bottom of the elevator conveyor chain lower
sprocket and the chain. Position and tighten the
lock strap over the two adjusting bolts at the top
of the elevator head. Tighten the nut on the
conveyor bracket. Adjust the tailings elevator
drive chain.
NOTE: Check the tension of the elevator chain

weekly. Do not tighten the chain too much. It is
important to keep the correct tension on the chain.
Loose elevator chains will grind the grain between
the chain and the sprocket.
A
229L7
423
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR DRIVE CHAIN
Removal, Installation and Adjustment

1. Remove the clean grain elevator drive chain (1)
by l oo s e n in g th e nut on t he te n s i o n r o d .
Disconnect the master connecting link. Connect
1
a new chain to the old chain. Pull the old chain
out and the new chain in. Connect the ends of
the new chain.
2. Adjust the clean grain elevator drive chain by

tightening the nut on the tension rod. Tighten the
nut until the spring length is 152 mm (6 inches).
Lock the adjusting nuts together.
RP95K009
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR CONVEYOR CHAIN

1. To remove the grain elevator conveyor chain,
open the clean grain elevator clean out door (1).
Turn the chain until the master connecting link is
in a position at the lower door (2). Disconnect the
chain. Connect a new conveyor chain to the old
chain. 1
2. Pull the old chain out and the new chain in until
the connector is at the bottom of the elevator.
Connect the ends of the new chain together.
2
RH07G030
424
Adjustment
1. Loosen the clean grain elevator drive chain 3
spring tightener (3) before adjusting the elevator
conveyor chain to avoid over tightening the drive
chain.
2. Loosen the lock nut (4) on the adjustment rod (5) 5

to adjust the clean grain elevator conveyor chain.
A d j u s t t h e c o nveyo r t e n s i o n s o t h a t t h e
conveyor chain rides in the sprocket (6) within
0.8 t0 1.5 mm (1/32 to 1/16 inch). DO NOT
over tighten the conveyor chain. 4
RH07G072
RB97G010
3. Adjust the clean grain elevator drive so there is

152 mm (6 inches) between the washers on
the tensioning spring.
NOTE: Check the tension of the elevator chain

weekly. Do not over tighten the chain. It is
important to keep the correct tension on the
chain. A loose elevator chain will grind the grain
between the chain and the sprocket.
RD07M079
425
ROCK TRAP DRIVE CHAIN
Removal
1. Stop the engine and remove the key from the
switch. Remove the rock trap shield (1).
RH08D241
2. Remove chain tension by loosening the nuts
on the idler adjustment.
RH08D242
3. Remove the connector link (3) from chain (4).
Remove the chain from the rock trap sprockets.
4
3
RH08D242
426
Installation
1. Install the chain (1) on the rock trap sprockets.
Install chain connector link (2).
1
RH08D242
2. Tighten the adjusting nuts (3) on the tension
rod (4) until the nuts (3) are tight against the
tube spacer (5). Loosen the nuts (3) just
enough to permit the tube spacer (5) to turn.
Lock the nuts (3) together.
3
5
4
RH08D242
3. Install the Rock Trap Drive Chain shield.
RH08D241
1 3
427
FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN
Removal
1. Loosen the adjusting bolt (1) on each side of
t h e fe e d e r h o u s i n g a n d m o v e t h e d r u m
rearward.
1
RD07J048
2. Remove the master link (2) from the feeder
conveyor chain. Use the old feeder conveyor
chain to pull the new feeder conveyor chain
through the feeder housing.
2 2
2
RD97G165
Installation
3. Install the master link (2) (three required) in the
feeder conveyor chain.
2 2
2
RD97G165
428
Adjustment
Keep the feeder conveyor chain adjusted correctly at
all times. Inspect the chain for correct tension after
the first 50 hours of operation and at regular intervals
thereafter.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to adjust the chain evenly on

both sides to prevent excessive wear on both chains
and sprockets.
NOTE: The conveyor drum stop must be in the

middle position before adjusting conveyor chain
tension.
The conveyor chain tension is adjusted by moving RH07G035
the feeder drum forward or rearward. Adjust the

chain tension as follows:
1. Use the adjusting bolt on each side of the feeder

to move the drum forward to apply tension to the
chain.
2. Adjust the conveyor chain to give clearance (A)

of 0.8 to 3.2 mm (1/32 to 1/8 inch) between the
c ha in s la ts an d t he bo tto m o f t he fe ed er
housing (1).
A
NOTE: Measure the clearance at the point of
maximum sag of the lower strand of the
conveyor chain. 1
211L7
1. FRONT OF MACHINE
3. After adjusting the chain tension, check the

clearance between the chain slats (2) and the
feeder adapter (3). The clearance (B) must be
no more than 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) to provide B
correct feeding and transfer of material from
3
the Header auger.
4. If the clearance in Step 3 is not correct, add or

remove chain links as necessary and adjust
the position of the drum.
NOTE: If equipped with Terrain Tracker® be

3
sure the chain clears the adapter when the
feeder is tilted. A25920
429
FEEDER ADJUSTMENTS
Automatic Feeder Cutoff

The Automatic Feeder Cutoff monitors the speed of the feeder pivot shaft. Any time the feeder pivot shaft speed
drops below 210 RPM, power to the feeder clutch solenoid will be shut off. The feeder indicator on the shaft speed
monitor will illuminate and the audible warning will sound. The feeder will remain shut off until the feeder clutch
switch is turned OFF and ON.
NOTE: There is a five (5) second delay at start up to allow the feeder to reach operating speed before the feeder
cutoff starts to monitor the shaft speed.
Bypass Automatic Feeder Cutoff

The Automatic Feeder Cutoff can be bypassed to provide standard operation of the feeder clutch.
To bypass the Automatic Feeder Cutoff, refer to Change Mode in Operating Instructions in this manual.
430
Operational Check and Adjustments

If the feeder is not operating correctly, see the
following operating malfunctions for instructions.
1
NOTE: The separator must be engaged and the
operator must be in the seat to engage the feeder.
1. Feeder does not engage at all. This indicates

that there is no power to the feeder clutch
solenoid or there is no signal to the controller
from the seat switch. Check the following:
2
A. Check for a blown fuse (Number 10).
Replace as required.
RD01H078
B. The switch in the operator’s seat may have SENSOR WITHOUT ROCK TRAP
disengaged the feeder drive. Reset the
feeder clutch switch by turning OFF and ON
to permit operation of the feeder.
1
2. Feeder runs for approximately four (4) seconds
a n d d i s e n g a g e s. T h i s i n d i c a t e s t h a t t h e
instrumentation is not getting a signal from the
feeder speed sensor (1). Check the following
items:
A. Check for damage to the sensor (1) or

connecting wires. 2
B. Check the clearance between the sensor (1)
and the signal sprocket (2). The correct RD00E009
clearance is 0.25 to 1.5 mm (0.010 to 0.060 SENSOR WITH ROCK TRAP

inch).
If necessary, temporarily bypass the Automatic

Feeder Cutoff.
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat for more than

7 seconds, the feeder will disengage. The operator
must be in the seat and cycle the feeder clutch switch
to reengage the feeder.
NOTE: The feeder speed sensor (1) is located

opposite the signal sprocket (2) on the Left side of
the feeder housing or on the rock trap idler arm.
431
Adjustable Strippers
Adjustable strippers reduce the buildup of material
at the feeder conveyor sprockets. Adjus t the
strippers as follows: 1
1. Remove the upper top cover (1) from the feeder.
2. Loosen the two stripper retainer bolts for each

stripper (2).
3. Move each stripper until the sprocket is centered

in this slot and the sprocket teeth are a minimum
of 0.8 mm (1/32 inch) from the strippers.
4. Tighten the retainer bolts and install the feeder RD97G168
top cover (1).
RD97G167
Perforated Feeder Bottom (Parts

Accessory)
The perforated feeder bottom sheet will permit dirt
to pass through the perforations instead of into the
Combine when harvesting edible beans and peas.
See your dealer.
212L7
PERFORATED FEEDER BOTTOM SHEET
432
STRAW SPREADER
Drive Gear Compartment Cleaning

Remove the covers over the straw spreader drive
gears at 100 hour intervals by removing the two
bolts (1) from each cover.
1 1
RD97G064
Clean straw from the area around the gears (2)

and bearings.
RD00E035
! WARNING: Failure to clean this area can lead to excessive debris accumulation and possible fire. M509
433
SEPARATOR DRIVE
Jackshaft Limit Switch Adjustment
1
3
5
4
RD05F098
1. DISTANCE 3. SPROCKET 5. REAR LIMIT SWITCH
2. SLEEVE 4. FRONT LIMIT SWITCH
If the front and rear limit switches are replaced or

need to be reset, do the following:
1
1. Start the engine. Move the separator drive switch
to ON.
2. To set the front limit switch, close the variable

pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the fast
speed rotor drive position until there is a distance
(1) of 79 mm (3.11 inch) at the outer edges of the
jackshaft pulley halves. 423L8
3. Move the separator drive switch to OFF and stop

the engine. Remove the Key from the Key
Switch.
4. Loosen the front limit switch and rotate the switch

toward the sprocket until the switch clicks.
Tighten the switch.
434
5. To check the above setting, start the engine and

move the separator drive switch to ON. Open the
variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the
6
slow speed rotor drive position until there is a
decrease of 100 RPM in the rotor speed. Close
the variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to
the fast speed rotor drive position until the motor
shuts OFF. The distance between the jackshaft
pulley halves at the outer edges must be 79 mm
(3.11 inch).
424L8
6. To set the rear limit switch, start the engine and
move the separator drive switch to ON. Open the
variable pulleys by pushing the rotor switch to the
slow speed rotor drive position until there is a
distance (6) of 105.84 mm (4.17 inch) between
the jackshaft pulleys at the outer edges.
7. Loosen the rear limit switch and rotate the rear

limit switch toward the sprocket until the switch
clicks. Tighten the switch.
8. To check the rear limit switch setting, start the

engine and move the separator drive switch to
ON. Close the variable pulleys by pushing the
rotor switch to the fast speed rotor drive position
until there is an increase of 100 RPM in the rotor
speed.
9. Open the variable pulleys by pushing the rotor

switch to the slow speed rotor drive position until
the motor shuts OFF. The distance between the
jackshaft pulleys at the outer edges must be
105.84 mm (4.17 inch).
NOTE: The front and rear limit switches must be set

correctly to prevent an overload on the thrust bearing
when the rotor is run at fast speed or to prevent
locking up the threads when the rotor is run at a slow
speed. Check the position of the limit switches after
rotor drive belt or limit switch replacement. Adjust as
needed.
435
CONCAVES AND GRATES
Concave Removal
WARNING: Before setting the concave gauge, adjusting the concaves or removing concaves and rear
! grates, put all levers in neutral, set the parking brake and shut OFF the engine. Remove the key from the
key switch. M189B
1. Remove the concave panel from the right side

of the Combine.
A1906
2. Loosen the nuts on the four eyebolts just
enough to lift the pipe off the concave.
A1907
3. Lift the pipe off the concave sections. Move the

pipe to the Right side of the separator.
A1906
436
4. Remove the cover panel from the left side of

the Combine. Remove the five (5) bolts and
nuts that hold the center concave in place.
Lower the concave.
RD01H099
5. Pull the concave out from the left side of the
Combine. Push DOWN as you pull to the left.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to remove the front and

rear concaves.
RD01H103
Concave Installation
7. Install the desired concave sections. The front
concaves have a ramp on the front edge and
must be replaced in the front position.
NOTE: If necessary, turn the rotor to help in the

removal and installation of the concave sections.
RD01H327
437
Grate Removal
WARNING: Before setting the concave gauge, adjusting the concaves or removing concaves and rear
! grates, put all levers in neutral, set the parking brake and shut OFF the engine. Remove the key from the
key switch. M189B
8. Remove the cover panel on the left side of the

Combine.
9. Remove the four (4) bolts and nuts that

connect the three grates.
10. Remove the three (3) bolts and nuts that hold
the center grate to the rotor cage.
A1895
11. Remove the center grate. The center grate
must be removed from the Combine first to
allow clearance for removing the other two
grates. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 to remove the
front and rear grates.
NOTE: The front grate is held to the rotor cage by

four bolts and nuts.
A1899
438
Grate Installation
12. Install the grates on the left side of the
Combine. The rear grate must be installed first,
the front grate second and the middle grate
last. The slotted end of each grate hooks into
the spacer on the grate hanger bar which is
located on the right side of the Combine.
A1900
13. Install but do not tighten the four bolts and nuts
that connect the grates.
A1897
14. Install and tighten the bolts and nuts that hold
the grate to the rotor cage. Tighten the bolts
and nuts installed in Step 13.
15. Install the cover panel on the left side of the

Combine.
A1898
439
Concave Blade Replacement
A 4
5
RH00J016
1. CONCAVE 2. ROTOR BLADE 3. CONCAVE BLADE 4. CONCAVE ADJUSTING BOLTS
The concave blade assembly is removed from the

concave by removing bolt, nut and strap (5) and 6
cotter pin and flat washer (6).
1. Lift the concave blade assembly out. New blades

are riveted on the assembly with 3/16 x 5/8 inch
flat head solid rivets.
5
2. Use the concave adjusting bolts (4) to set a
clearance (A) of 1.6 to 4.8 mm (1/16 to 3/16 inch)
between the concave (1) and the tip of the rotor
blade (2). 6
RD00H028
440
Rotor Blade Replacement
2
1
RD01H143
1. ROTOR 2. ROTOR BLADE 3. ROTOR BLADE SUPPORT
1. Stop the engine and remove the key from the

switch to prevent anyone from star ting the
Combine.
2 3
2. The straw chopper rotor blades can be reversed
for increased wear. Place each blade on the
original blade support when reversing the rotor
blades. Position the nut against the support and
tighten the bolts from the blade side to a torque
of 102 to 115 Nm (75 to 85 pound foot).
3. Replace the straw chopper rotor blades in sets of

two. When replacing a straw chopper rotor blade,
make sure that the straw chopper rotor blade RD01H145
opposite the one that is being replaced, is also

replaced to maintain a balanced straw chopper
rotor.
4. Use 1/2 x 1 inch hex head, Grade 5 bolts and

flange lock nuts. Position the nuts against the
support and tighten the bolts from the blade side
to a torque of 102 to 115 Nm (75 to 85 lb. ft.). The
rotor must be balanced if too much vibration
occurs after reassembly. See your dealer.
NOTE: Do not remove the bolts on the balancing

disc at the ends of the straw chopper rotor.
441
COOLING SYSTEM
Cleaning the Stationary Air Screen, Radiator, Hydraulic Oil Coolers

and Condenser Core
Inspect the cooling system daily.
The stationary air screen is self-cleaning and gives

pr otection to the radiator, fuel/oil cooler and
condenser. In some conditions a layer of material
may build up on the screen. Periodic cleaning may be 1
required. With the engine stopped, lightly brush the
exterior of the screen to remove fine material.
Compressed air is recommended to remove material
from the screen, if necessary. Water may cause
plugging of screens and cores.
The radiator/cooler fins are designed to minimize

buildup of material in the cooler core. Material will RD07K037
normally deposit on the front face of the coolers.

Periodic cleaning may be required. With the engine
stopped, lightly brush the exterior of the coolers to
remove material. Compressed air can be used to
remove material from the coolers, if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Always wear face protection when

using compressed air.
To clean coolers, do the following:
1. Open the right rear panel (1)
2. Unlock the two air screen latches.

RD07K055
3. Open the stationary air screen and place the bar

in the lock position.
RD00K056
442
4. Use a soft brush to clean the radiator fins.
5. Open the radiator and engage the lock pin (2).

Use a soft br ush to cl ean the fin s on th e
remaining coolers.
RD07K057
RD07K059
A clean out plug (3) can be found on the bottom of

the radiator compartment. When a buildup of dust
and dirt is found, remove the plug and clean out the
compartment. Install the plug after cleaning.
3
RD07K060
443
FRONT SIGNAL PLATE ADJUSTMENTS

The Front Signal Plate should be adjusted to your
specific tire size and dish position. Use the following
to correctly adjust the front signal plates.
NOTE: Adjustment views from rear of front signal

plates. Left hand and right hand are as shown.
RI08G006
RI08G007/008/009/010/011/012
1. 650 tires - LH Dish Out, RH Dish Out. LH Plate Position 1, RH Plate Position 1.
2. 800 tires - LH Dish In, RH Dish Out. LH Plate Position 2, RH Plate Position 1.
3. 800 tires* - LH Dish Out, RH Dish Out. LH Plate Position 1, RH Plate Position 2.
4. 900 tires* - LH Dish In, RH Dish Out. LH Plate Position 2, RH Plate Position 3.
5. 900 tires* - LH Dish Out, RH Dish Out. LH Plate Position 3, RH Plate Position 1.
* = Requires deck extensions and RH arm in second hole position.
NOTE: Rear Signal Plates should be adjusted to within 100 mm of outside of machine.
444
10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
System Voltage.....................................................................................................................12 Volt Negative Ground
Batteries .................................................... Two 12 Volt Low Maintenance 950 CCA Hybrid Batteries Group Size 31
Alternator ................................................................................................................................................. 135 Ampere
Voltage Regulator ................................................................................. 12 Volt, Solid State Component of Alternator
Cranking Motor ......................................................................................................12 Volt, 4 kw with Solenoid Switch
Lamps and Bulbs

SEALED BEAM LAMPS ................................................................................................................. BULB NUMBERS
Headlamps (Cab Hi/Lo) ................................................................................................................9004 (137823A*)
Headlamps (Cab Hi/Lo) (Long Life) ......................................................................................... 9004XL (388872A*)
Cab Flood Lamps......................................................................................................................... 9005 (87106291)
Cab High Intensity Discharge, bulb HID OSRAM.....................................................................................87722023
LAMPS
Rear Turn Lamp ...............................................................................................................................................3157
Side Flood Lamps (If Equipped) .....................................................................................................894 (323094A*)
Headlamp HID Bulb .................................................................................................................................87282633
Aftercut Lamps (If Equipped) ........................................................................................................... 886 (9B47312)
Rear Flood Lamp (If Equipped)........................................................................................................................3157
Tail Lamps........................................................................................................................................ 1157 (T34857)
Turn Signal Indicator ........................................................................................................................ 192 (26069R*)
Dome Lamps..........................................................................................................................................3050958R*
Grain Tank Lamp............................................................................................................................ 892 (87329813)
Unloader Arm Lamp........................................................................................................................894 (323094A*)
Console Illumination Lamp.................................................................................................................168 (D71346)
Turn Signal Lamps (Front, Rear and External) .............................................................................. 1156 (9417866)
Instrument Panel Warning Lamps...................................................................................................... 73 (28628R*)
Rocker Switch Backlighting (without socket)............................................................................................ 134608A*
Rocker Switch Backlighting (with socket)...............................................................................................3141107R*
Service Lamp .....................................................................................................................................................862
Extremity Wide Clearance Lamps ..................................................................................................... 1156 (9417866)
Oval Sieve Lamp ...............................................................................................................................894 (323094A*)
Engine Warning Light Modular Lamp ....................................................................................................................658
WARNING: Before working on any part of the electrical system, disconnect the battery ground cable. Do
! not connect cable until all electrical work has been completed. This will prevent shorts or electrical shocks.
M198A
445
Cab Lower Fuse and Relay Panel

The lower cab fuse and relay panel is located beneath the right console. Remove the cover to access the panel.
RI08E263
FUSES
Upper Panel
Block 1
1. Moisture Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
2. Air Seat.................................................................................................................................................. 25 Ampere
3. Deck Plates ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Ampere
4. Backup Alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
5. Beacon Lights/Bin Almost Full............................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
6. Bypass Motor......................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
7. CODI Display Switched B+...................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
8. Service Tool ........................................................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
9. Underpanel Lights ................................................................................................................................. 20 Ampere
10. Key Switch Power ................................................................................................................................ 30 Ampere
446
Block 3
11. Fan Control .......................................................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
12. Concave Control .................................................................................................................................. 30 Ampere
13. Sieve Adjust......................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
14. Spread Pattern Adjustment/2 Speed Hydrostatic Drive....................................................................... 30 Ampere
15. HDR Worklights ................................................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
16. ...................................................................................................................................................................... Open
Lower Panel
Block 2
17. Dome LTS, Horn, Cig Ltr ..................................................................................................................... 20 Ampere
18. Hazard Flasher ...................................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
19. Radio & A Post B+ Unsw ..................................................................................................................... 20 Ampere
20. Aux PWR Conn B+ Unsw .................................................................................................................... 20 Ampere
21. Grain Tank Covers Switch ..................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
22. Auto Guidance Enable........................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
23. GPS Antennia/Flow Sensor ................................................................................................................. 10 Ampere
24. Radio Power ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Ampere
25. Auto Guidance ..................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
26. RH Tail/Position Lights........................................................................................................................ 7.5 Ampere
27. Instrumentation/GLM ........................................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
28. Operator Presents/Console ................................................................................................................. 20 Ampere
29. HVAC Control ...................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
30. Fuel Pump ........................................................................................................................................... 20 Ampere
31. Turn/Brake light.................................................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
32. Fan/Rotor/Concave Adjust/Switches ................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
33. Blower Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
34. Header Detect B+ ................................................................................................................................ 10 Ampere
35. Wipers ................................................................................................................................................. 10 Ampere
36 LH Tail/POS Light ................................................................................................................................ 7.5 Ampere
Block 4
37. Pressurizer Fan ................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
38. Parking Brake ..................................................................................................................................... 7.5 Ampere
39. Reel/HDR/Unload Control ................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
40. Feeder/Separator................................................................................................................................. 10 Ampere
41. 4-Wheel Drive/Variable Propulsion ...................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
42. Engine ECU........................................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
43. Turn Signals......................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
44. LH Rooflights ....................................................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
45. RH Rooflights ...................................................................................................................................... 30 Ampere
46. Worklights............................................................................................................................................ 20 Ampere
47. Lighting Controls.................................................................................................................................. 30 Ampere
48. Side Worklights.................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
49. High Beams ......................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
50. Low Beams .......................................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
51. CODI...................................................................................................................................................... 5 Ampere
52. Trailer Brake Lights ................................................................................................................................ 5 Ampere
53. Remote Sieve Control.......................................................................................................................... 15 Ampere
54. Sieve Relays ........................................................................................................................................ 30 Ampere
55. Backlighting ......................................................................................................................................... 10 Ampere
56. Chaff Spreader, Lube .......................................................................................................................... 20 Ampere
447
Relays
Upper Panel
Block 3
R1 ..............................................................................................................................................................Conc. Decr
R2 ................................................................................................................................................................. Fan Decr
R3 ............................................................................................................................................................... Conc. Incr
R4 ...................................................................................................................................................................Fan Incr
Block 2
R5 .......................................................................................................................................................... CXCM Power
R6 ............................................................................................................................................................. Engine Run
R7 ................................................................................................................................RT Automatic Steering Enable
R8 .................................................................................................................................LT Automatic Steering Enable
R9 .................................................................................................................................................Service Lights (opt)
R10 ..................................................................................................................................................................... Open
Block 1
R11 .................................................................................................................................................. Cab Power Relay
Lower panel
Block 3
R12 ................................................................................................................................................................. Swap 1
R13 .................................................................................................................................................................. Swap 2
R14 .................................................................................................................................................. Rear Work Lights
R15 ..................................................................................................................................................................... Open
R16 ...................................................................................................................................................Side Work Lights
R17 ..................................................................................................................................................................... Open
Block1
R18 ..................................................................................................................................................Sieve Select (opt)
R19 .......................................................................................................................................................... Brake Lights
R20 .................................................................................................................................................. Sieve Close (opt)
R21 ................................................................................................................................................... Sieve Open (opt)
R22 ......................................................................................................................................Left Enhance Turn (NAO)
R23 ................................................................................................................................... Right Enhance Turn (NAO)
448
Headliner Relay Panel

To access the headliner relay panel, remove the sun
visor and remove the front headliner.
RD00E062
RD07K066
RI07M046
R24 ....................................................................................................................................................... Beacon Lights
R25 .................................................................................................................................................Roof Light Control
R26 ................................................................................................................................................... Worklight Cutout
R27 ....................................................................................................................................................... RH Worklights
R28 .................................................................................................................................................Low Beam Enable
R29 ....................................................................................................................................................... LH Worklights
449
ALTERNATOR CHARGING SYSTEM
General
Follow these general rules to prevent damage to the 5. Never operate the Combine when the battery
electrical system: cables are disconnected.
1. Before working on the electrical system, 6. When you do maintenance on the engine,
disconnect the battery cables. Wash your hands prevent foreign material from enter ing the
after handling battery components. alternator.
2. Do not make a reverse battery connection. IMPORTANT: If you must do welding, disconnect the
batteries. Put the ground cable of the welder as close
3. When you use an auxiliary battery for starting, as you can to the weld area. Do not put the ground
connect negative terminal to Combine frame cable where the current can flow through bearings or
away from the batteries and positive to positive. along channels with wire harnesses.
4. When charging the Combine batteries,

disconnect the battery cables from the battery
ter minal s. Do not u se a batte r y c har gin g
machine for starting the Combine.
Alternator
The alternator is mounted in a fixed position on the In order to assure satisfactory operation of the
side of the engine. charging system make a periodic check as follows:
The alternator is equipped with a built-in regulator. ● Keep proper belt tension.
When the ampere indicator lamp comes on or ● Mounting bolts must be tight.
voltmeter reading drops, the operator should stop the
engine, remove the key and clean the alternator IMPORTANT: Keep the alternator screen clean.
screen and alternator, preferably with an air hose. Check the screen daily and clean as required.
ATTENTION: Always wear face protection if using To prevent possible damage to the system avoid the
compressed air. following:
1. Do not short-out or ground across the terminals

of the alternator.
2. Do not operate the charging system with the

output cable disconnected or with the battery
disconnected.
450
BATTERIES
1 2
RD97G066
1. NEGATIVE (-) TERMINAL 2. POSITIVE (+) TERMINAL
The Combine is equipped with two (2) 12 volt low When replacing the batter y make sure that the
maintenance batteries. Check the electrolyte level in ground cable is connected to the negative (-) terminal
each cell after every 100 hours or 3 months. Add on the battery. When disconnecting the battery,
distilled water to get the electrolyte level up to the disconnect the negative (-) cable first. When
indicator under each cap. Keep the vent holes open connecting the battery, connect the negative (-) cable
at all times. last.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the battery do not over

tighten the battery hold down bolts.
WARNING: BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL - flush with water. INTERNAL - drink large quantities of water
or milk. DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. EYES - Flush with water for 15
! minutes and seek medical attention immediately. BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep
sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed area. Always wear
eye protection when working near batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF
CHILDREN. M144B
451
Battery Cables and Terminals

The battery terminals must be kept clean and tight. A Inspect the battery cables for damage. Replace any
good method to clean the terminals is to use Battery battery cable that has damage.
Saver (Case Part Number M20831) according to
instructions on the container. This cleaner needs no To prevent hard starting, keep battery cables tight.
water. If Case Battery Saver is not available, remove
all corrosion with a wire brush, then wash with a
weak solution of baking soda. Put some petroleum
jelly or silicon grease on the terminals to prevent
further corrosion.
WARNING: When working around storage batteries, remember that all of the exposed metal parts are
! “live”.Never lay a metal object across the terminals because a spark, short circuit, explosion or personal
injury may result. M145A
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
! hands after handling. M793
When Batteries Are Not in Use

When the Combine is not in use, the batteries will
need a charge every six weeks. A stored battery not
in use will slowly discharge. A batter y that has
discharged can freeze at low ambient temperatures
and cause damage to the battery and Combine.
Battery Recycling
NOTE: Discarding old batteries can cause an
environmental liability. Check with your local
environmental or recycling center or your dealer for
correct disposal information.
452
Auxiliary Battery Connections
WARNING: Engine can start with transmission in gear when neutral or safety start switch is bypassed:
1. Do not connect across terminals on starter.
2. Attach a booster battery by connecting the positive terminal of the booster battery to the “positive
terminal” provided or to the positive terminal of the machine battery. Connect the negative terminal of
! the booster battery to the “negative terminal” provided or to the chassis of the machine. Then use
recommended starting procedures from operator’s seat.
3. When necessary, repair electrical system components promptly so that “jump starting” will not be
attempted.
Machine runaway can cause injury or death to operator and bystanders. M107D
If the battery is discharged and the lights do not If the voltmeter shows a voltage, a battery charger or
indicate some battery voltage, check the battery for an auxiliar y batter y can be connected to the
an open circuit with a voltmeter. Disconnect the discharged battery.
negative (-) battery cable from the battery. Connect
the voltmeter between the negative (-) and the When using a battery charger, make sure that the
positive (+) battery terminals. If the voltmeter shows charger is turned off before connecting to the battery.
no voltage, the battery has an internal open circuit. Charge the battery in a well ventilated area only. Do
Replace the battery. Connecting a battery charger or not try to charge a frozen battery.
an auxiliary battery to a battery with an open circuit
can cause a spark inside the battery. The spark can
cause a battery explosion.
WARNING: Unless instructed otherwise never service or make adjustments to the machine with the engine
! running. Before making adjustments, put the shift control lever in Neutral and set the park brake OR put the
shift control lever in park position as equipped. M147C
NOTE: The Combine uses an electrical system with

a negative ground. Making connections to the
electrical system in reversed polarity can cause
damage to the electrical system components.
453
Connect an auxiliary battery to the Combine battery

in the exact order as follows:
1. Connect the positive (+) terminal (1) of the

auxiliary battery to the positive (+) terminal on
the Combine batteries.
NOTE: The cable clamps must not make contact 1

with any metal objects.
2. Connect the negative (-) terminal of the auxiliary

battery to the Combine frame, away from the
batteries. Make the final connection at the
Combine frame.
IMPORTANT: This is the only safe method to start

the engine with an external power supply. Any other RD97G066
method of starting can cause injury or death to the

operator or other persons. Do not connect auxiliary
battery cables across the terminals of the starter.
Start the engine from the operator’s seat.
After the engine is started, disconnect the auxiliary

battery cables in the exact order as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative cable clamp from the

Combine chassis
2. Disconnect the other negative cable clamp from

the negative terminal of the auxiliary battery.
3. Disconnect the positive cable clamp from the

positive terminal on the Combine batteries and
then from the positive terminal on the auxiliary
battery.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
! hands after handling. M793
454
SEVEN TERMINAL ELECTRICAL OUTLET
Terminal Function
L Left Turn Lamps
R Right Turn Lamps
58L Left Tail Lamps
58R Right Tail Lamps
54 Brake Lamps
31 Chassis Ground
RD02H002
RD97G149
455
LAMP BULB REPLACEMENT

Head Lamp
Replacement Instructions
1. Remove the eight screws from the head lamp
bezel assembly and remove the assembly.
2. Allow bulbs to cool. Always wear eye protection.
3. Disconnect power plug before removing bulb.
4. Always grasp the bulb by the base, avoid
touching the glass.
5. Install new bulb by matching the base with the
socket. Secure bulb and connect power plug.
6. Properly dispose of old bulb in a closed
container.
RD07K069
IMPORTANT: DO NOT touch the glass of the new
bulb. If the glass is touched, it MUST be cleaned with
alcohol.
Halogen Stadium Lamps (RH)
7 5
2
8 6
RI07M043
1. HEAD LAMP BEZEL 3. FLOOD LAMP 5. BULB H4 - 12V 7. SEAL
2. DISTANCE LAMP 4. SCREW 6. COLLAR 8. BULB, 9005 - 12V
WARNING: Bulb contains gas under pressure and could shatter from flying debris or fragments. Protect
bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn on bulb only when installed in
! a lamp assembly. Replace lamp assembly if cracked or damaged. Keep bulb out of reach of children or
pets. Dispose of old bulb properly. Failure to comply can cause serious injury. M1224
456
HID Stadium Lamps (RH) (If Equipped)
9
4
6
11 8
10
2
5
7
12
13
RI07M044
1. BEZEL 6. BULB, 9005 - 12V 11. BALLAST, GEN5 4 PIN MOUNT, 12V
2. FLOOD LAMP, GLASS LENS 7. BULB H4 - 12V 12. HID HARNESS .5M OSRAM
3. FLOOD LAMP 8. LOCKING CLIP 13. SCREW
4. DISTANCE LAMP 9. COLLAR
5. BULB, HID DIS OSRAM 10. SEAL
WARNING: Do not tamper with the ballast on the high intensity discharge head lamps, as they contains
! high voltage. Personal injury or death can occur. M639R
457
High Definition HID Stadium Lamps (RH) (If Equipped)

4 2 6
5 1
4
7
4
RI07M045
1. HEAD LAMP BEZEL 6. SPACER
2. DISTANCE LAMP, TRAPEZOIDAL LENS 7. SCREW
3. FLOOD LAMP, 711OWF - HID 8. BALLAST, GEN5, 4 POINT MOUNT, 12V
4. BULB, HID DIS OSRAM 9. HARNESS, HID .5m OSRAM
5. LOCKING CLIP
WARNING: Do not tamper with the ballast on the high intensity discharge head lamps, as they contains
! high voltage. Personal injury or death can occur. M639R
7. Install head lamp bezel on the Combine.
RD07K069
458
FRONT LIGHTING ADJUSTMENT

Right Hand Turn Signal and Clearance Lamp Arm -
Remove adjusting pin (1) and lock bolt (2). Adjust
right hand front lighting arm as required for the
following tire combinations:
First Hole (Wide) Setting for Tires:

650 - Dish In
900 - LH Dish Out, RH Dish Out
Second Hole (Narrow) Setting for Tires:
900 - LH Dish In, RH Dish Out
800 - LH Dish In, RH Dish Out
Use the second hole anytime there is a deck
extension installed in the left side platform.
Install the lock bolt (2) and adjusting pin (1).
NOTE: Factory installed position is first hole.
NOTE: Rear Lamps should be adjusted to within 400

mm of outside of machine.
1 2
RI08G005/005
Left Hand Turn Signal and Clearance Lamp.
1. Wide Position - Used with 900 tires with LH and
RH Dish Out and 650 tires Dish In.
2. Narrow Position - All other tires.
RI08G001/002
459
ROAD LAMP REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the harness and remove the dust
cover.
A25979
2. Release the retaining wire that holds the bulb.
A25980
3. Pull the bulb straight out. Install new bulb.
A25981
460
Road Lamp Adjustment
H
C
L
RH03C035
1. LIT ZONE
C. = H - (L X 0.07) MAXIMUM
L. = DISTANCE FROM LAMPS TO THE WALL
H. = HEIGHT TO CENTER OF LAMPS FROM GROUND
(THIS WILL VARY DEPENDING ON TIRE SIZE)
EXAMPLE:
USING THE FOLLOWING VARIABLES
H = 2 METERS
L = 5 METERS
THE MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF C = 2 - (5 X 0.07) OR 1.65 METERS
The Road Lamps are “factory adjusted” with the 3. Measure distance H (H = distance from the
Combine on a level surface. ground to the center of the lamps.
To adjust the road lamps, proceed as follows: 4. Measure distance L (L = distance from the lamps
to the wall).
1. Park the Combine on a level surface and about 5
meters (16 ft.) from a perpendicular square dark 5. Distance C should be maximum = H - (L x 0.07).
wall.
6. Adjust distance C, using screws 2 and 3.
2. Lower the feeder housing.
NOTE: Turn screws 2 and 3 equally for both lamps.
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
461
Left Hand Lamp Adjustment (as viewed from back of

Combine).
Turn both screws equally to reposition lamp.
NOTE: Lamp harness unplugged for clarity.

3
2
RD03C022
Right Hand Lamp Adjustment (as viewed from back

of Combine).
Turn both screws equally to reposition lamp.
3
2
RD03C021
462
AFTER CUT LAMPS, SIDE AND REAR FLOOD LAMPS, UNLOADER ARM
LAMP AND SIEVE LAMP REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the two retaining screws and pull the
lamp assembly out.
RD02E174
2. Disconnect the bulb retainer clip and remove the

bulb.
RD02E176
3. Install new bulb and fasten in place with retainer

clip.
NOTE: DO NOT touch bulbs with fingers as skin

oils can cause premature failure of Halogen
bulbs.
RD02E175
463
4. Install the lamp assembly and two retaining

screws.
RD02E174
464
TAIL LAMP AND WARNING LAMP REPLACEMENT

Remove the two retaining screws. Discard old lamp
assembly. Install new lamp assembly and tighten the
two retaining screws.
RH06E305
RIGHT SIDE - ALL EUROPE
465
SIDE MARKER
Bulb Replacement
Remove the lens cove retaining screws.
RH08F023
Push down and rotate the bulb to remove. Install

the new bulb.
RH08F022
Install lens cover and retaining screws
RH08F023
466
FRONT TURN SIGNAL AND CLEARANCE LAMP
1
2
RH08F013
1. FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
2. FRONT CLEARANCE (POSITION) LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1. Remove the two screws from the lens cover.
RH08F014
2. Remove the lens cover.
RH08F015
467
1. Push down and rotate the bulb to remove.

Install the new bulb.
RH08F017
2. Install lens cover and retaining screws.
RH08F019
468
11 - STORAGE
STORAGE PREPARATION
When your Combine is not going to be used for some 6. Clean the air cleaner filter and body.
time, store the Combine in a dry, protected place.
Leaving your Combine outside, open to the weather, 7. Drain, flush and fill the cooling system with the
will shorten its life. correct antifreeze mixture to protect the Combine
to the lowest anticipated temperature. Add
Follow the procedure below when your Combine is cooling system conditioner and change the
placed in storage for periods up to six (6) months: coolant filter conditioner.
1. Cover the engine starter and alternator with 8. Close the fuel shutoff valve between the water
plastic before washing the Combine. Wash or separator filter and fuel tank to prevent fuel
clean and completely lubricate the Combine draining from fuel injection system into the fuel
(Refer to Lubr ication/Filters/Fluids in this tank.
manual).
9. Plug the engine breather pipe and exhaust pipe.
2. Clean the inside of the Combine including the
chaffer sieves, shoe sieves, operator’s cab and 10. The batteries need not be removed from the
instrument console. Combine except for extended storage periods
( m o r e t h a n 3 0 d ay s ) b e l o w f r e e z i n g
3. Rodents can damage a Combine in storage. temperatures. The batter ies must be fully
Rodents will eat plastic, insulation or rubber charged to prevent freezing. Disconnect the
material, especially when coated with grain dust. negative (-) ground cable at the batteries to
Clean the areas where rodents may nest. Leave prevent possible discharge. Wash your hands
access panels and doors open to remove after handling battery components.
convenient nesting pockets. In some conditions,
leaving moth balls will help discourage rats and 11. Store the Combine where there is protection
mice. from light. Clean the tires before storage.
Support the Combine so that the load is off the
4. Run the engine long enough to completely warm tires. If the Combine is not supported, inflate the
the oil in the crankcase before draining the oil. tires at regular intervals.
Remove and replace the oil filter as instructed.
Fill the crankcase with fresh oil and run the 12. Lubricate all the chains with oil.
engine for two to five minutes.
13. Open the doors at the bottom of elevators and
5. Open the drain on the water separator fuel filter the grain tank. Open the front auger bed door
and drain the water and sediment before closing. and clean out the auger bed.
Fill the fuel tank with a premium grade diesel
fuel. If this fuel grade has not been used 14. Retract all hydraulic cylinders to prevent the
regularly, drain the fuel tank and fill with premium piston rods from r usting. Always lower the
diesel fuel. Run the engine for five minutes to Header to remove the weight from the hydraulic
circulate the fuel through the fuel injection system. Coat all exposed cylinder rods with light
system. grease to prevent rust.
15. Remove tension from the belts.
469
11 - STORAGE
RD02E211
INSIDE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. ROTOR ROCKING WRENCH IN STORAGE POSITION
470
11 - STORAGE
REMOVING FROM STORAGE

It is recommended that caution be used when 4. Check the coolant level in the radiator.
starting an engine that has been in storage.
5. Check that the batteries are fully charged.
1. Open the fuel tank shutoff valve. Open the Connect the ground cables and tighten all
s e p a r a t o r f i l t e r d r a i n va l ve a n d r e m o v e ter minals. Wash your hands after handling
contaminated fuel. Close the drain valve. battery components.
2. Check that the grade of oil in the engine 6. Check brake linkages.
crankcase is as specified in this manual.
7. Check to make sure the feeder conveyor slip
3. Remove the plugs from the engine breather tube clutch will function properly.
and the exhaust pipe.
WARNING: Check the machine for leaks or any parts that are broken, not working correctly, or not there at
! all. Before you start the machine, tighten all caps, dipsticks, battery covers, etc. M104A
WARNING: Before starting the engine, be sure all operating controls are in neutral. This will eliminate
! accidental movement of the machine or start up of power driven equipment. M106E
WARNING: Never operate the engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required under all
! circumstances. M142A
8. DO NOT accelerate the engine rapidly or operate 11. Close the elevator doors and the grain tank
at high RPM immediately after starting. unloader door. Make sure the grain tank, tailings
auger trough and clean grain auger trough clean
9. Check the tension on the drive belts. out slots are closed.
10. Inflate the tires to the correct operating 12. Make sure that all shields are in proper position.
pressures.
471
11 - STORAGE
Identity Preserved (IP) Crops

Make sure your Combine and Grain Header are ATTENTION: SPECIAL CAUTION - If the Combine is
thoroughly cleaned out and free of any debris before to be first used in a specialty seed or edible seed
harvesting specialty sensitive crops. crop, it is suggested that the Combine be operated in
a non-sensitive crop to remove paint and other
ATTENTION: Always wear protective devices, such contaminates from various grain contact areas. This
as safety goggles, respirator, etc. when cleaning your same precaution should be used when the Combine
Combine. has been in operation, then sits idle long enough for
rust to form on the grain contact areas. Also, if a non-
sensitive crop has been used to remove paint and or
rust the Combine will have to be sanitized of rouge
seeds before being used in the specialty seed or
edible seed harvest.
472
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
DIESEL ENGINE
7088 Combine
Model ........................................................................................................................................................ 6TAA-9004
Type ........................................ Six Cylinder, Four Stroke Cycle, Turbocharged, Intercooled, Valve in Cylinder Head
Firing Order ...............................................................................................................................................1-5-3-6-2-4
Bore ................................................................................................................................................................114 mm
Stroke ..........................................................................................................................................................144.5 mm
Piston Displacement.......................................................................................................................................8.9 Liter
Compression Ratio ........................................................................................................................................17.0 to 1
Cylinder Sleeves.............................................................................................................Wet Type, Can Be Removed
Governor Engine Speed without Load - Separator OFF..............................................................................2410RPM
Governor Engine Speed without Load - Separator ON .............................................................................. 2410 RPM
Recommended Harvest Speed .......................................................................................................Above 2340 RPM
Engine Idle Speed .........................................................................................................................1000 to 1200 RPM
Rated Power ....................................................................................................................................340 HP + 20 Rise
Power Boost - Unloading .....................................................................................................................................0 HP
5088 and 6088 Combine

Model ........................................................................................................................................................ 6TAA-8304
Type ........................................ Six Cylinder, Four Stroke Cycle, Turbocharged, Intercooled, Valve in Cylinder Head
Firing Order ...............................................................................................................................................1-5-3-6-2-4
Bore ................................................................................................................................................................114 mm
Stroke .............................................................................................................................................................135 mm
Piston Displacement.......................................................................................................................................8.3 Liter
Compression Ratio ........................................................................................................................................17.0 to 1
Cylinder Sleeves.............................................................................................................Wet Type, Can Be Removed
Governor Engine Speed without Load - Separator OFF..............................................................................2410RPM
Governor Engine Speed without Load - Separator ON .............................................................................. 2410 RPM
Recommended Harvest Speed .......................................................................................................Above 2340 RPM
Engine Idle Speed .........................................................................................................................1000 to 1200 RPM
Rated Power ........................................................................................................................ 6088 - 305 HP + 25 Rise
5088 - 275 HP + 15 Rise
Power Boost - Unloading ...........................................................................................................................................0
Engine Lubrication System

Oil Pressure..................................296 to 372 kPa (43 to 54 PSI) with Engine Warm and Operating at Rated Speed
Type System ................................................................................................................................ Pressure and Spray
Fuel System
Fuel Injectors ................................................................................................................................................... 17 mm
Air Intake System

Type ..........................................................................................................Dry Type Air Induction System, Two Stage
473
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
POWER TRAIN
Transmission
Type ................................................................................................................ Three Speed Range Hydrostatic Drive
Gear Selection........................................................................................................................................ Three Speed
Hydrostatic Propulsion System

Pump Type.........................................Variable Displacement Axial Piston Pump With Manual Displacement Control
and Pressure Override Valve
Pump Capacity at 2200 Engine RPM .......................................................................257 to 272 l/min (68 to 72 GPM)
Maximum System Pressure.......................................................................................................... 465 bar (6750 PSI)
Auxiliary Hydraulic System

Pump Type...................................................................................................... Piston Pump/Gear Pump Combination
Header Lift/Steering Pump Capacity at 2400 Engine RPM (Piston Pump) .............. 98.4 l/min (26.0 GPM Minimum)
Maximum Header Lift System Pressure ....................................................................................... 207 bar (3000 PSI)
Minimum Steering Relief Pressure .............................................................................................. 185 bar (2 680 PSI)
Reel Drive Minimum/Maximum Flow at Coupling at 2400 Engine RPM...................................45.4 l/min (12.0 GPM)
Maximum Reel Drive System Pressure ........................................................................................ 150 bar (2175 PSI)
Foot Brakes
Hydraulically Operated Power Brakes ...............................................................................229 mm (12 Plates 9 Inch)
Wet Disc Type / Utilizes the Normal Hydraulic Fluid
from the Main Hydraulic System at 1240 kPa (180 PSI) [12.4 bars]
474
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL MACHINE
NOTE: Specifications are based on 2410 RPM at High Idle.
Feeder
Type .............................................................................................................................. Under Shot Slatted Conveyor
Width ..................................................................................................................................1 162 mm (45-3/4 Inches)
Length
- With Rock Trap.............................................................................................................1 384 mm (54-1/2 Inches)
- Without Rock Trap..............................................................................................................1 524 mm (60 Inches)
Pivot Shaft Speed .........................................................................................................................................470 RPM
Conveyor Chain Speed..............................................................................................................2.98 m/s (586 ft./min)
Feeder Jackshaft Speed
Single Speed or Low Speed of Two Speed ..............................................................................................594 RPM
High Speed of Two Speed........................................................................................................................684 RPM
Rotor
Diameter ......................................................................................................................................762 mm (30 Inches)
Length.....................................................................................................................................2 794 mm (110 Inches)
Speeds - Three Speed Gear Case
Lo-Range ...................................................................................................................................250 to 425 RPM
Mid - Range ...............................................................................................................................400 to 740 RPM
Hi-Range .................................................................................................................................690 to 1150 RPM
Rotor Cage
Diameter ......................................................................................................................................864 mm (34 Inches)
Length.................................................................................................................................2 059 mm (81-1/8 Inches)
Rotor Cage Separating Area ................................................................................................... 0.802 m2 (1243 Inch2)
Rotor Grate Area ..................................................................................................................... 0.897 m2 (1390 Inch2)
Total Separating Area (Separator Cage and Rotor Grate........................................................ 1.699 m2 (2633 Inch2)
Concave
Type ....................................................................................................................................3 Sections - Bar and Wire
Wire Size
- Grain Combine ...................................................... 3/16 Inch Diameter at 0.42 Inches Spacing (4.8 at 10.7 mm)
- Corn and Rice Combines........................................ 1/4 Inch Diameter at 0.83 Inches Spacing (6.4 at 21.1 mm)
Concave Area .......................................................................................................................... 1.144 m2 (1773 Inch2)
Total Threshing and Separating Are (Total Rotor Cage Separating Area,
Concave Grate Area and Rotor Grate Area) ........................................................................... 2.780 m2 (4307 Inch2)
Discharge Beater
Type ................................................................................................................................................3 Blade Triangular
Speed ...........................................................................................................................................................765 RPM
Auger Bed
Number of Augers......................................................................................................................................................5
Speed ...........................................................................................................................................................267 RPM
Direction of Rotation .................................................................................................................. 4 Augers - Clockwise
1 Auger - Counterclockwise
Cleaning Fan
Type ........................................................................................................................................................ Cross-Flow®
Minimum Speed............................................................................................................................................450 RPM
Maximum Speed.......................................................................................................................................13000 RPM
475
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
Chaffer Sieve
Type ............................................................................................................................................................ Adjustable
Spacing
- Grain and Rice Combines ...............................................................................................28.4 mm (1-1/8 Inches)
- Corn Combine..................................................................................................................41.1 mm (1-5/8 Inches)
Center Section.............................................................................................................................. Adjusted Externally
Shoe Sieve
Type .......................................................................................................................................... Externally Adjustable
Cleaning Area
Chaffer ..................................................................................................................................... 2.684 m2 (4160 Inch2)
Shoe ........................................................................................................................................ 2.331 m2 (3613 Inch2)
Pneumatic.................................................................................................................................. 0.112 m2 (174 Inch2)
Total ......................................................................................................................................... 5.127 m2 (7947 Inch2)
Elevators
Type ......................................................................................................................... Roller Chain with Rubber Flights
Speed
- Tailings Drive Shaft ................................................................................................................................ 468 RPM
- Tailings Conveyor Chain ..................................................................................................... 2.34 m/s (460 ft./min)
- Clean Grain Drive Shaft (Normal Speed)............................................................................................... 426 RPM
- Clean Grain Drive Shaft (High Speed) ................................................................................................... 505 RPM
- Clean Grain Conveyor Chain (Normal Speed) .................................................................... 2.69 m/s (530 ft./min)
- Clean Grain Conveyor Chain (High Speed) ........................................................................3.19 m/s (628 ft./min)
Grain Delivery Auger

Diameter ................................................................................................................................. 290 mm (11.42 Inches)
Speed
- Normal ................................................................................................................................................... 505 RPM
- High........................................................................................................................................................ 599 RPM
Tailings Auger Trough

Diameter ........................................................................................................................................ 127 mm (5 Inches)
Auger Speed................................................................................................................................................. 491 RPM
Tailings Delivery Auger

Diameter ........................................................................................................................................ 127 mm (5 Inches)
Speed ........................................................................................................................................................... 491 RPM
Grain Tank
Capacity
- 5088 ............................................................................................................................ 8,810 Liters (250 Bushels)
- 6088, 7088 ................................................................................................................ 10,571 Liters (300 Bushels)
Grain Tank Unloader

Unloader Jackshaft Speed............................................................................................................................ 928 RPM
Unloader Front Cross Auger Speed ............................................................................................................. 539 RPM
Unloader Rear Auger Speed ........................................................................................................................ 515 RPM
Vertical Auger and Horizontal Auger Speed .................................................................................................464 RPM
Unloading Rate............................................................................................................................3.0 Bushels/Second
476
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
Straw Spreader
Rotors ............................................................................................................................................................. Two Bat
Two Speeds ............................................................................................................................ 339 RPM (at High Idle)
Straw Chopper - Standard Cut (If Equipped)

Rotor Diameter .........................................................................................................................419 mm (16.5 Inches)
Number of Rotor Blades ..........................................................................................................................................28
Number of Concave Blades.....................................................................................................................................13
Speed of Rotor
- High......................................................................................................................................................2780 RPM
- Low.........................................................................................................................................................697 RPM
Straw Chopper - Fine Cut Flail (If Equipped)

Rotor Diameter .........................................................................................................................511 mm (20.1 Inches)
Number of Rotor Blades ..........................................................................................................................................76
Number of Concave Blades.....................................................................................................................................47
Speed of Rotor
- High......................................................................................................................................................3647 RPM
- Low.........................................................................................................................................................777 RPM
Stationary Air Screen

Speed
Power Clean Vacuum System ....................................................................................................................35 RPM
Combine Sound Level

In line with the European directive (CEE/86/188) and In this case, the use of ear protection equipment is
national legislation, listed below are the noise levels r e c o m m e n d e d . I n s ev e r a l c o u n t r i e s t h i s i s
at the operator’s ear measured in dBa, according to mandatory, so check with your local legislation.
the ISO 5131 standard.
The vibration level for the arms to which the operator
the noise is measured with the engine and all of this machine is exposed under normal operating
mechanisms engaged and r unning at nor mal conditions is below the 2.5 m/sec2 weighted root
operating speed for the specified use of the product mean square (RMS) value. The vibration level for the
and without crop flow through the machine. For whole body is below the 0.5 m/sec2 RMS value.
machines with a cabin, the noise is measured with all
windows and doors closed and also in the open This information and measuring methods are in line
position. with the European Machinery Directive 89/392 EEC
paragraph 3.6.3.
It should be noted that the noise level may exceed 85
dBa if the machine is operating with doors and/or
windows open.
Machine Model Cabin Noise Level (dBa) -

Doors and Windows Closed
AXIAL-FLOW® 5088, 6088 and 7088 Combine 77 dBa
477
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE TRAVEL SPEEDS
Transmission with 34/38 Change Gears
Power Guide Axle NOT Engaged
TIRE SIZE Low Hydro High Hydro
1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd*
mph kph mph kph mph kph mph kph mph kph mph kph
900/60R32 R1W 3.7 5.9 6.7 10.8 * * 4.7 7.6 8.5 13.7 * *
650/75 R32 R1W 3.5 5.6 6.3 10.1 * * 4.4 7.1 8.0 12.8 * *
800/65 R32 R1W 3.5 5.6 6.3 10.1 * * 4.4 7.1 8.0 12.8 * *
* Engine speed electronically limited in 3rd gear to produce 20 or 25 kph.
Speeds in reverse are 63 percent of the forward speeds shown.
Speeds with powered guide axle engage are 81 percent of speed shown in first gear and 69 percent of
speed shown in second gear.
WARNING: To avoid component failure do not overload, overspeed or alter the strength of any part of the
Combine. Avoid modifications which would: Increase engine power above that specified; Increase
component speed or load above that specified; Increase grain tank capacity above maximum specified;
! Overload tires by using Headers greater than recommended; Overload structure or drive components
through use of unauthorized attachments or alterations. Do not exceed recommended corn head or Header
size. M320A
478
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
APPROXIMATE OVERALL MEASUREMENTS
K
A C
E
H
F G J
RH08F011
A. Refer to Chart on Next Page E. Refer to Chart on Next Page

B. 1.092 meters (43.0 Inch) F. With Rock Trap - 2.311 Meters (91.0 Inch)
Without Rock Trap - 2.192 Meters (86.3 Inch)
C. Refer to Chart on Next Page G. Wheelbase - 3.815 Meters (150.2 Inch)
D. Refer to Chart on Next Pager H. 1.682 Meters (66.2 Inch)
NOTE: These dimensions are with the feeder raised.
479
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
RH08F010
TIRE SIZE A C D E K
Meters Inch Meters Inch Meters Inch Meters Inch Meters Inch
650/75R32 R1W 3.793 149.3 3.663 144.2 0.818 32.2 0.484 19.1 4.755 187.2
800/65R32 R1W 3.801 149.6 3.671 144.5 0.826 32.5 0.492 19.4 4.763 187.5
900/60 R32 R1W 3.823 150.5 3.693 145.4 0.848 33.4 0.514 20.3 4.785 188.4
18 Ft Unloader 21 Ft Unloader
Dimension Inch meters Inch meters
J 98.0 2.490 134.0 3.404
Unloader tube fully extended (102 degrees)
M 256.4 6.512 290.5 7.378
N 141.1 3.583 151.5 3.849
Top of Grain Top of AFS Top of Front

Tank Extension (K) Antenna Beacon (J)
Add to Dimension “D” Inch meters Inch meters Inch meters
Grain Tank Covers Up 150.3 3.818 145.3 3.691 121.6 3.089
Grain Tank Covers Closed 121.3 3.080 NA NA NA NA
Grain Tank Extensions Up 140.8 3.576 145.3 3.691 8.9 0.226
NOTE: These dimensions are with the feeder lowered.
IMPORTANT: Verify dimensions before transporting machine.
480
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
Steering
Turning Radius To Machine Centerline (Non-Powered Guide Axle) 2845 mm - 112 inch Tread .6198 mm (244 Inch)
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHTS

AXIAL-FLOW® 7088 Combine ..........................................................................................33 500 pounds (15 195kg)
AXIAL-FLOW® 6088 Combine ..........................................................................................32 500 pounds (14 741kg)
AXIAL-FLOW® 5088 Combine .........................................................................................32 000 pounds (14 514 kg)
NOTE: Weight is based on typical equipped Combine.
481
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
MACHINE SETTING FOR VARIOUS CROPS

CROP ___________________________________
Date
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor Gear
Ratio Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture __________________________________________
Yield _________________________________________________
Remarks ______________________________________ ________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
482
12 - SPECIFICATIONS

CROP__________________________________
Date
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor Gear
Ratio Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture ________________________________________
Yield _______________________________________________
Remarks ____________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
483
12 - SPECIFICATIONS

CROP __________________________________
Date
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor Gear
Ratio Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture ________________________________________
Yield _______________________________________________
Remarks ____________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
484
12 - SPECIFICATIONS

CROP ___________________________________________
Date
MACHINE SETTING
Rotor
Speed
Rotor Gear
Ratio Range
Concave
Indicator
Concave
Type
Chaffer
Setting
Shoe
Setting
Fan
Speed
Grate
Type
Transport
Vane
Position
Crop Moisture ________________________________________
Yield _______________________________________________
Remarks ____________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
485
12 - SPECIFICATIONS
486
INDEX
A Auger Trough
A/C Refrigerant Pressure Indicator . . . . . . . . . 49 Grain Distribution Paddle . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 243
Accidental Fire - What to Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Auto Guidance Master Switch . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 64
Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Automatic Climate Control . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 75
Adjustment Automatic Crop Settings (ACS) . .. . .. .. . . . 136
Chaffer Sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Automatic cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 223
Chaffer Sieve Externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Automatic Feeder Cutoff . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 186
Chaffer Sieve Internally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Automatic separator cutoff (ASC)
Cleaning Fan Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Discharge Beater Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Automatic Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Elevator Slip Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Auxiliary Pump Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Axle - Drive
Feeder Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Feeder Cradle - Tire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Axle - Steering
Header Auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Jackshaft Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Right Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Power Guide Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Shoe Sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Toe-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Straw Chopper Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Straw Spreader Bat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Unloader Auger Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 B
Adjustment-Filler Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Backup Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Adjustments and Calibration Baling Straw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Ballast - Steering Axle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Adjustments-Front Signal Plate . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Adjustments-Straw and Chaff Spreaders . . . . 274 Auxiliary Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
AFX Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Cable/Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Air Conditioning Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Battery Charging Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . 50
Air Conditioning Compressor Belt . . . . . . . . . 371 Battery Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Air Control Louvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Air Filter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Beacons - Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Air Induction System Before Starting Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Belt
Air Filter Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Air Conditioning Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Air Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Belts
Air Filter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Auxiliary Pump Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Filter Restriction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Cleaning Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Cleaning Fan Jackshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Elevator Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Air Removal - Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Air Screen - Stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Feeder Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Alarm - Audible Feeder Jackshaft Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Grain Tank Unloader Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Alarm - Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Rotor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Alarm/Abort Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Separator Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Alternator Straw Chopper Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Straw Spreader Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Unloader Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Amber Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Beverage Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Area Change Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Biodiesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Auger Bed Blower Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Clean Out Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243, 244 Bolt Torque - Drive Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Grain Distribution Paddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Bolt Torque - Steering Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Brake Switch - Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
487
INDEX
Brakes Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Jackshaft Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Oil Level/Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Breather - Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Cleaning-Moisture Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Clearing the Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Button Climate Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Quick Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Cold Temperature Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Combine
Overall Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
C Sound Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Cab Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Cab Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Transporting Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cab Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Combine Info Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cable - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Combine Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Cage Transport Vanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Combine Operation
Calibration and Adjustments Cutting and Feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Field Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Calibration Menu Screen 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Ground Travel - Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Calibration Menu Screen 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ground Travel - Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chaffer Sieve Ground Travel Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
External Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Threshing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Combine Service Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Combine Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Combine Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Viewing door and Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Combine Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chaffer Sieve Internal Combine/Header Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Components - Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Chain Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Concaves
Chains Adjusting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Clean Grain Elevator Conveyor . . . . . . . . . 424 Filler Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239
Clean Grain Elevator Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Feeder Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Interrupter Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Grain Tank Unloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Position Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tailings Elevator Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tailings Elevator Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Charts Wire Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Approximate Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Condenser Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Corn Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Connecting the Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Initial Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Connector
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Console - Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Seed Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Console - Right
Service Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Steering Axle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Console Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Controls - Cab Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chocks - Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Controls - Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Clean Out Doors Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cleaning Fan Coolant Level Low Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Air Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Coolant Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Clearing Grain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
488
INDEX
Cooling System Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 442 Engine
Coolant Solutions . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 338 Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 141
Deaeration Tank Coolant Level .. . .. . .. . 337 Cold Temperature Operation . . . . . . .. . . . 148
Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 340 Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 149
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 341 Fan, Alternator and Compressor Belt .. . . . 370
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 339 Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 369
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 337 High Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 160
Corn - High Speed Sprocket . . . . .. . .. . .. . 266 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 333
Crop Settings Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 335
AFX Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 336
Crop Settings-Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 333
Custom LCD Didplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 334
Run-In Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 143
D Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .4
Deaeration Tank - Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . 337 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 473
Decals Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 144
Safety and Informational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 147
Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Engine Preheat Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 50
Diagnostic Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Engine Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 49
Diesel Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Enter/Cancel Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 95
Directional Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 317
Disable Switch - Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Error Codes - Temperature Control . . . .. . . . . 76
Disabled Machine - Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Error Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 122
Discharge Beater Error, Alarm and Abort Code Tables . . . .. . . . 123
Bottom Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Explosion Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Extinguisher - Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 12
Disconnect Switch - Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disconnecting the Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 F
Dividers - Grain Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Feeder
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Adjustable Strippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Doors - Elevator Clean Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Draining the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Automatic Feeder Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Drive Wheels Chain Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Clutch Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tire Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Conveyor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tread Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Conveyor Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
E Jackshaft Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Edible Beans - Low Speed Sprocket . . . . . . . 266 Oil Level/Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Electrical Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Electrical Outlet - Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Perforated Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Electrical Outlet - Seven Terminal . . . . . . . . . 455 Reverser Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Rock Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Electrical System Safety Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lamps/Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Elevator Feeder Conveyor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Clean Grain Conveyor Chain . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Feeder Cradle
Clean Grain Drive Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Adjustment for Tire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Clean Out Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Feeder Reverser Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Field Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Perforated Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Field/Road Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Slip Clutch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Filler Adapter Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Filler Bars - Concaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239
Steel Flights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Filling the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tailings Conveyor Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Filter Cleaning Indicator - Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tailings Drive Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
489
INDEX
Filters Unloader Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Unloader Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Cab Air Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 367 Unloader Out Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Cab Outside Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Unloader Tube Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Coolant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Grates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Grease Fittings
Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 322
Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . 322, 324
Final Drive Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 320
Fire - What to Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ground Speed - Combine . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 160
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ground Travel - Starting . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 160
Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ground Travel - Stopping . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 163
Fire Prevention - Engine Area Clean-Up . . . . 369 Ground Travel-Starting . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . . . 161
Fire Prevention - Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fire Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 H
Front Headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Hand Rest - Operator’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Front Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Harvest Screen Monitor
Front Signal Plate Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fuel - Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Hazard Warning Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fuel Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Hazard Warning Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Header
Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fuel Specifications - Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Header Auger Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fuel System Header Controls
Air Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Auto Header Height Adjustment Control . . . . 62
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Auto Header Height Set Control . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fuel Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Header Height and Tilt Operation . . . . . . . . . . 173
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342, 473 Header Height Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fuel System - Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Header Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fuse and Relay Panel - Cab Lower . . . . . . . . 446 Header Operation
Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
G Header Position Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Gear Shift Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Header Resume Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Gear Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Header Sensitivity Change Screen . . . . . . . . . . 89
Germany Travelling Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Header Tilt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Good Management Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Header Type Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Grain Auger Paddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Header/Combine Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Grain Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Headliner - Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Auger Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Heater - Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Auger Distribution Paddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Heater Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Auger Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 High Idle Speed - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 High Speed Sprocket for Corn . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Quick Stop Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Highway Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Hitch - Rear Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Grain Delivery Auger Specifications . . . . . . . 476 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Grain Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Hour Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Grain Pan Dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Hydraulic System
Grain Scan Change Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Grain Scan Monitor Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Checking Sensor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Fluid Level Low Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Grain Tank Fluid Temperature High Indicator . . . . . . . . . 50
Full Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Oil Coolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Reservoir Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Unloader Auger Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Service Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Unloader Auger On Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
490
INDEX
I Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Identification Numbers - Product . . . . . . . . . . .. 3 Turn Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 158
Identity Preserved Crops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Lamps-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lighting - Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Inclined Auger Gear Case Service . . . . . . . . 363 Lighting - Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Indicator Limit Switch Adjustment - Jackshaft . . . . . . . . 434
Engine Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Locks - Feeder Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Indicator Test - Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Loss Information
Indicator-Battery Charging Warning . . . . . . . . 50 Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Indicator-Combine Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Losses
Indicator-Coolant Level Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Indicator-Engine Preheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Corn Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Indicator-Engine Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Indicator-Header Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Seed Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Indicator-Intake Manifold Temp High . . . . . . . . 49 Separating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Indicator-Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Louvers - Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Indicator-Trailer/Header Turn Signals . . . . . . . 50 Low Speed Sprocket for Edible Beans . . . . . . 266
Indicator-Water in Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Lower Sieve Position Control Switch . . . . . . . . 64
Inflation - Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Lube On Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Information - Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7 Lubrication
Initial Crop Settings Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
AFX Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Injectors - Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Instructional Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Instructional Seat Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 M
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Intake Manifold Temp High Indicator . . . . . . . . 49 Main Hydraulic Valve Stack Solenoid Locations and
Interrupter Bars - Concaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Manual Overides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
J Maintenance Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 20
Jackshaft Limit Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . 434 Manual Overides-Main Hydraulic Valve Stack . 156
Manual Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
K Material Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Measurements - Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Mirror - Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Moisture Sensor Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Monitor
L
Harvest Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Ladder - Operator’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Monitor Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Ladder Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Monitors
Ladder Sensor - Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Shaft Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Lamp Replacement
Flood Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 463
Front Turn Signal and Clearance . . . . . .. . 467 N
Road Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 460 Neutral Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 466
Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 465 O
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 465 Oil Change
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 445 Cleaning Fan Gearcase . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 360
Amber Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 158 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 335
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 456 Feeder Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 360
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 80 Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 353
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 80 Inclined Auger Gear Case . . . .. . .. . . . . . 363
Hazard Warning Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 72 Lower Unloader Gear Case . . .. . .. . . . . . 362
Head Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .. . 456 PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 359
Indicator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 142 Rotor Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 364
Rotating Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 158 Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . 365, 366
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 158 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . 352
491
INDEX
Oil Level Re-Configurable LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Cleaning Fan Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Recycling the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Feeder Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Reel Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Reel Controls
Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Minimum Speed Control . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 63
Inclined Auger Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 59
Lower Unloader Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 61
PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Speed Selector Switch . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 61
Rotor Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Reel Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 181
Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 366 Reel Position Control . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 182
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Reflectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 45
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Relay Panel - Front Headliner . . . .. . .. . .. . . 449
Oil Selection - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Reservoir - Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 354
Operating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Return to Cut Mode . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 60
Operator’s Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Ride Control Accumulator . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 217
Operator’s Presence System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Rock Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 187
Operators Manual Storage Compartment . . . . . 2 Drive Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 426
Outlet - Auxiliary Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 188
Outlet - Seven Terminal Electrical . . . . . . . . . 455 Operating Recommendations . .. . .. . .. . . 189
Rotor
P AFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 227
Paddles - Grain Auger . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . 245 Cage Transport Vanes . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 225
Panel - Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 47 Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 224
Panel - Right Control . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 78 Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 373
Park Brake Disable Switch . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 17 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 475
Park Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 49 Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . 65
Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 14 Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 223
Parking Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 65 Three Speed Gear Case . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 223
Pedals Rotor Rocking Wrench . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 470
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Run-In Procedure - Engine . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . 143
Steering Column Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Plastic and Resin Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 S
Power Guide Axle Safety
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 65 Accidental Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . 310 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 15
Power Train Specifications . . . . . . .. .. . .. . 474 Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 79
Product Identification Number . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 3 Explosion Prevention . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 10
Propulsion System Feeder Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .9
Air Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . 357 Fire Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . 10, 13
Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . 58 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .7
Motor Variable Speed Switch . . .. .. . .. . . 65 Hazard Warning Switch . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . 474 Highway Operation . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 18
PTO In Case of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 13
Oil Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .7
Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Instructional Seat . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 20
PTO Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 11
Lock - Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .9
Q Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . 16, 20
Quick Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Neutral Start System . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 22
Operator’s Presence System . .. . .. . . . . . . 22
R Park Brake Disable Switch . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 17
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . 73 Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .8
Rear Ladder Sensor .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . 57 Reflectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 45
Rear Lighting . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . 18 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 21
Rear Trailer Hitch . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . 296 Safety and Informational
Rear View Mirror . . . .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . 20 Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
492
INDEX
Screen Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Area Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Set Up Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Calibration Menu 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Seven Terminal Electrical Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Calibration Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Shaft Speed Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Combine Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Enter/Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Shear Bolts - Unloader Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Shields
Grain Scan Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Header Sensitivity Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Spreader Hoop Deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Shift Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Shipping Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Service Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Shoe Sieve
Screen - Stationary Air Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Screens Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Alarm/Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Diagnostic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Header Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Side Knife Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Set Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Side Panels - Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Screens - Perforated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Sound Levels - Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Specifications
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Auger Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Chaffer Sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Seats Cleaning Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Instructional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Operator’s - Operator’s Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Seed Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Discharge Beater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Separator Loss Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Selection Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Engine Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Sensitive Market Grains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Separator Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 General Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Drive Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Grain Delivery Auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Separator Drive Jackshaft Limit Switch . . . . . 434 Grain Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3 Grain Tank Unloader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Service Intervals Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Service Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Service Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Shoe Sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Service Reminder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Sound Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Service Specifications Sound Level - Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Cleaning Fan Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Straw Spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tailings Auger Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tailings Delivery Auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Speed - Threshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Speeds - Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Feeder Fan Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Spreader Direction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . 65
Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Sprocket - High Speed Corn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Sprocket - Low Speed Edible Beans . . . . . . . . 266
Hydraulic Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Starting Ground Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 161
Hydraulic Oil Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Starting Procedure - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Lower and Upper Unloader Gear Case . . . 332 Steering Axle
PTO Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Rotor Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Toe-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
493
INDEX
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Power Guide Axle . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 65
Steering Column Reel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 59
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Reel Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 61
Tilt Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Rotor Speed Control . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 65
Steering Wheel Separator Clutch . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 61
Tilt Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Side Knife Control . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 63
Steering Wheels Spreader Direction Control . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 65
Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 72
Stop Engine Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Unloader Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . 59, 60
Stop Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Unloader Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 59
Stopping - Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Upper Sieve Position Control . .. . .. . . . . . . 64
Stopping Ground Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Variable Propulsion Motor . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 65
Storage Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . 72
Operators Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 T
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Tables
Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Corn Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Storage Compartment - Operators Manual . . . . 2 Seed Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Straw - Baling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tachometer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Straw and Chaff Spreader Adjustments . . . . . 274 Tail Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Straw Chopper Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Concave Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 440 Tailings Auger Trough Specifications . . . . . . . 476
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Tailings Delivery Auger Specifications . . . . . . 476
Rotor Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Temperature Control Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Terminals - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Terrain Tracker
Straw Directional Vane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Straw Spreader Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Bat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Threshing and Separating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chopping/Spreading Corn . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Threshing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Chopping/Spreading Straw . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Throttle
Cone Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Tie Down Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Drive Gear Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Tie Down T-Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Tire
Straw/Chaff Spreader Pressure Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cone Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Tire Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switch Tire Valve - Drive Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Header Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tires
Switches Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Air Conditioning Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Maximum Header Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Auto Guidance Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Wheel Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 303
Auto Header Height Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 To The Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Auto Header Height Set Control . . . . . . . . . 62 Torques
Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Drive Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cleaning Fan Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dual Drive Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Concave Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Steering Axle Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Feeder Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Tow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Field Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Field/Road Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Trailer Hitch - Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Hazard Warning Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Trailer/Header Turn Signals Indicator . . . . . . . . 50
Header Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Transmission
Header Lower Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Gear Shift Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Header Raise Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Gear Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Lower Sieve Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
494
INDEX
Transporting Combine Tube Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Highway Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Upper Sieve Position Control Switch . . . . . . . . 64
Tie Down Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tie Down T-Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 V
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Vane - Straw Directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Transport Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Viscosity-Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Traveling on Public Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transporting Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 W
Travel Speed - Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Warning Lamp Replacement . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 465
Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Warning Lamps - Amber . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 158
Troubleshooting Warning Switch - Hazard . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 17
Threshing and Separating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Water in Fuel Indicator . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 49
Turn Indicator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Weight Ballast - Steering Axle . . .. . .. .. . . . 311
Turn Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Weights - Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 481
Turn Signal - Directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Weights - Steering Axle . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 311
What to Do in the Event of a Fire .. . .. .. . . . . 13
U Wheels - Drive
Unloader Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Auger Cover Adjustment . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 267 Tread Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Auger On Indicator . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 50 Wheels - Steering
Clean Out Door . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 268 Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Control Indicators . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 50 Windows
Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 387 Cab Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 81
Drive Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 419 Right Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 79
Drive Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 60 Windshield Wiper Switch . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . 72
Lower Gear Case Service . .. . .. . .. . .. . 362 Wire Sizes - Concaves . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 236
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 192 Wrench - Rotor Rocking . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . 470
Out Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 50
Perforated Tube . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 268 Y
Shear Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 269 Yield Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . 476
495
CASE
Printed in France
FOR THOSE WHO DEMAND MORE © 2008 CNH Global N.V.

5088 6088 7088 OM - Case

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5088 6088 7088 OM - Case

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Axial-Flow® 5088

Print No. 87479245

DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:

ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:

● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.

● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.

● Background color is YELLOW.

● Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine.

● Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the machine.

● Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine.

● Clears the area of other persons.

5 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

10 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

NOTE: When you are in the Combine seat looking

CNH America, LLC

This Combine complies with the provisions of

Signal Plate Location - Italy Only

Signal plate location is on the rear service ladder.

Manual Storage Compartment

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AND SERIAL NUMBERS

MODEL NUMBER AND PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER PLATE

Identification Number Locations

Product Identification Number

RIGHT FRONT OF COMBINE BETWEEN SERVICE LADDER MOUNTING BRACKETS

Engine Serial Number

Combine Model Number________________________________________________________________

Product Identification Number____________________________________________________________

Engine Serial Number___________________________________________________________________

MACHINE MAIN COMPONENTS

NOTE: For internal Combine components see Field

1. ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6. OPERATOR’S PLATFORM HANDRAILS

● Operate controls only when seated in the operator’s seat. R137A

● Never operate the machine with shields removed. R423

DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION are defined as follows:

ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:

● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.

● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.

● Background color is YELLOW.

● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.

Feeder Safety Lock

To Engage the Feeder Safety Lock:

1. Raise the feeder to the maximum height.

To Disengage the Feeder Safety Lock:

Raise feeder to maximum height. Raise feeder

FIRE AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION

3. Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal items.

4. Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.

● Use nonflammable cleaning solvent to clean parts.

● Always make sure ladder safety chains are properly connected.

● Make sure rear access ladder is UP during field operation.

Fire Extinguisher Inspection

Good Management Practices During Machine Operation

What to Do in the Event of a Fire

ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT SWITCH

The electrical disconnect switch (1) is located above

Push lever UP (2) to disconnect electrical system.

HAZARD WARNING LAMP/PARK BRAKE DISABLE SWITCH

3. Connect the brake pedals and the brake latch.

LIGHTING CONFIGURATION - LIGHTING CONFIGURATION -

LEFT HAND EUROPEAN LIGHTING RIGHT HAND EUROPEAN LIGHTING

Travel Speed - Germany Only

20 KPH DECAL - REAR 20 KPH DECAL - LEFT SIDE

Tire Chocks - Germany Only Rear View Mirror - Germany Only